TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section 05 - Pressure and Vacuum

2” and 2.5” Swichgage® and Murphygage® Instruments

96023 20, 25, A20 and A25 Series Vacuum Swichgage® Instrument
2 and 2-1/2 in. (51 and 64 mm) Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
96014 Differential Pressure for Filter Restriction
20DP, 25DP, A20DP and A25DP Series 2 and 2-1/2 in. (51 and 64 mm) Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
94116 20 and 25 Series Pressure Swichgage®
2 and 2-1/2 in. (51 and 64 mm) Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
94030 A20 and A25 Series Pressure Swichgage® Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
96012 B-Series Murphygage® Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
9104 Direct Mount Pressure Switch Model PSB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

4.5” Swichgage® and Murphygage® Instruments

96001 Pressure Gage and Swichgage® Instruments
OPL Series 4-1/2 in. (114 mm) Diameter Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
00029 Pressure Swichgage® 45APE Series Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
96107 Lead Line Pressure Swichgage® Instrument
Model PT167EX 4-1/2 in. (114 mm) Diameter Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Pressure Transmitters
01041 Pressure Transmitters PXT Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Section 10 - Temperature

2” and 2.5” Swichgage® and Murphygage® Instruments

95026 A20 and A25 Series Temperature Swichgage® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
94031 20 and 25 Series Temperature Swichgage®
2 and 2-1/2 in. (51 and 64 mm) Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
9137 Direct Mount Temperature Switch – Model TSB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Accessories for 2” - 2.5” Gages

8428 Sensing Bulb/Scale/Capillary Length Combinations for 20, 25, A20 and
A25 Series Temperature Swichgage® and Murphygage® Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Pyrometers
9011 Exhaust Pyrometers – Models 10705146 and 0705147 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

SDB Series Temperature Swichgage® Instruments

7543 Direct-Mount Temperature Swichgage® Instrument SDB Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

4.5” Swichgage® and Murphygage® Instruments

94117 4.5 in. (114 mm) Dial Temperature Swichgage® SPL and 45TE Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Digital Temperature Swichgage® Instrument

8911 Dual Temperature Swichgage® Model Series MDTM89 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Temperature Scanners
9106 Temperature Scanner/Pyrometer Swichgage® – Model TDX6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
00064 Temperature Scanner/Pyrometer – TDXM Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Temperature Sensors
96084 Thermocouple, RTD, and RTD Transmitter
Assemblies with Thermowell – TC, RTD, and RTDT Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
0610107 Thermocouple, ¼″ Diameter Stainless Steel Tube Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
0910430 Air Temperature Sensor – Model 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Section 15 - Fluid Level

Level Switch System - Bilge

95107 Bilge Level Switch System BLSK1 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Level Switches - Tank Level

94124 Hydrostatic Head Level Switches DF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Level Swichgage® Instruments - Coolant

00072 Level Swichgage® Instrument For Engine Liquids – L150/EL150K1 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Level Maintainers
1010627 Lube Level Maintainer – Model LM500/LM500-TF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
92149 Level Maintainer – LM300 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
00010 Lube Level Maintainer – Model LM2000/LM2000S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
96121 Oil Level Regulators for Lubricators – LR500 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
7225 Maintain Lube Level – Model LR857 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Level Swichgage® Instruments - Oil

0710176 Float Actuated Oil Level Swichgage® Instrument
for Small Engines and Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Level Swichgage® Instruments - Lube

6572 Lube Level Swichgage® Instrument – L129 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Level Switches - Crankcase

7229 Crankcase Level Switch – L971 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Level Switches - Scrubber

1010629 Liquid Level Switches – MLS Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
0600009 LS200 & L1100 Series Liquid Level Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Level Valves - Scrubber

01069 Dump Valves – DVU Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Level Swichgage® Instruments - Tank Level

94122 4-1/2 in. (114 mm) Dial Level Swichgage® Instrument – OPLH / OPLHACS Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section 20 - Time, Vibration and Speed

Tachometers - Analog
97026 Tachometers and Tach/Hourmeters – AT and ATH Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Tachometers - Digital
9004 Selectronic® Digital Tachometer – MT90 Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
96115 Digital Tachometer and Hourmeter
with Adjustable Overspeed Set Point – Model MTH6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
97050 Digital Tachometer and Hourmeter with Adjustable
Overspeed Trip Point – SHD30 and SHD30-45 Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Speed Switches
97118 Electronic Speed Switches – HD9063 Series, OS77D Series and SS300 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Hourmeters - Electromechanical
97030 Hourmeters – TM Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Timers - Mechanical
96095 Time Switches
Models 5T, 15T, 12T and 24T 12 or 24 Hour and 5 or 15 Minute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Vibration Switches
05062 Electronic Vibration Switch (EVS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
96013 Shock and Vibration Switch – VS2 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
94092 Shock and Vibration Control Switch – VS94 Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Section 25 - Magnetic Switches

Remote Alarm/Annunciators
95046 SELECTRONIC® TATTLETALE® Remote Alarm Annunciators ST Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Magnetic Switches
78793 TATTLETALE® Annunciators and Magnetic Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Section 30 - Engine Panels

Engine Panel Accessories
8904 Selectronic® Flasher Alarm Light and Mini-siren – TL7 and SAH Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Engine Panels - Mechanical and/or Electric
03063 Swichgage® Shutdown Panels for
Irrigation Engines and Pumps – 75160 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
94032 Swichgage® Shutdown Panels
for Mobile Equipment of All Kinds – WAI Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
8198 Swichgage® Kits for Engines – WD100 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
03061 Swichgage® Shutdown Panels with Open Back
for Diesel Engines – WD300 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
04001 Electric Gage Shutdown Panels
for DEUTZ 1011/2011, 912/913 and 914 – WDU Series Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
03062 Swichgage® Shutdown Panels for High Plains
and Other Irrigation Engines – WHB Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

94100 Shutdown Panel Kits for Deutz and Other Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
97077 Swichgage® Diagnostic Panel Kits
for Cummins B and C-Series Engines W0162 and W0163 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
8426 Swichgage® Shutdown Panel Kit – W0168 and W0241 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
92226 Swichgage® Shutdown Panel Kit – Model W0270 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
MurphyLink® PowerView™ Panels
03114 MurphyLink® Series M110 Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
03022 MurphyLink® Series M310 Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
0910438 Automatic Engine Controller – Model AEC101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Section 40 - Engine and Motor Controls

Engine and Generator Controls
0810288 Keystart 9620 Series – Engine and Generator Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
0810330 CANstart 9630 Series – Engine and Generator Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Auto Start Controllers
94012 Automatic Engine Controller ASM150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
03021 ASM170 Auto Start Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
97079 MURPHYMATIC® Engine Micro-Controller A91 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
05195 Auto-Start/Stop Controller – Cascade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Digital Engine Controller
1010554 EMS PRO Engine Monitoring Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
1110770 EMS PRO LITE – Engine Monitoring System Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
0910364 EMS467 Monitoring System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
92199 Electronic Monitoring Systems EMS447/EMS448 controllers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
95122 Electronic Monitoring System/Controller – Model EMS547 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Rack Pullers
00092 Pull/Push DC Solenoids for Diesel Engines — RP2900 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
95028 Rack Puller for Diesel Engines Model RP75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Throttle Controller
04052 MURPHYMATIC® Engine Throttle Controller Model AT03069 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Clutch Controller
01035 Electric Motor Driven Clutch Operator for Engine Automation Systems - Model CO3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Electric Motor Controllers
0910462 Transformer Relay Assemblies TR Series by MURPHYMATIC® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Murphy Power Ignition Controls
0910474 MPI-8/16/32 Ignition Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
0910517 MPI Ignition Control Systems (Murphy Power Ignition) MPI 601 Series CD Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
0910515 MPI Detonation Sensing Interface System - Model DSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
0910514 Power Supply (Murphy Power Ignition) MPI Brushless Alternators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
0910513 MPI Ignition Control Systems (Murphy Power Ignition) MPI Ignition Coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Air-Fuel Ratio Controls - Compliance Controls

0910476 AFR-1R — Rich Burn Air-Fuel Ratio Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
0910477 AFR-9R — Multipoint Air-Fuel Ratio Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
0910475 AFR-64R — Rich-Burn Air-Fuel Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
0910491 AFR-64L — Lean-Burn Air-Fuel Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
0910478 AFR-FI — Air-Fuel Ratio Controller for Fuel Injected Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
1010670 EICS — Engine Integrated Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Section 50 - Compressor Controls and Panels

Control System Accessories
1110714 M2 Wireless Monitoring System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Annunciators
8535 LCDT Selectronic® Tattletale® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
0910435 TTD™ Series Configurable Fault Annunciator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
96122 Series 1501 Selectronic® Micro-Controller/Annunciator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Controllers
0910434 Centurion™ Configurable Controller – C4 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
0910452 Centurion™ PLUS Full Featured Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Panels
0910471 TTD™ Annunciator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
0910472 Centurion™ Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
0910492 Centurion™ PLUS Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
1210950 Control Systems & Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Section 55 - Valves
Check/Relief Valves - Diesel Fuel
7867 Diesel Fuel Check Valves – CKV/PRV Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Shutoff Valves
99026 Diesel Fuel Shutoff Valves – SV Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
94134 Electromechanical Fuel Shutoff Valves – M25 and M50 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
94129 Pneumatic Valves for Fuel Gas Shutoff
Models M2582-P and M5180-P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Pulsation Dampener Valves
95145 Pulsation Dampener – PD8100 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Section 70 - Electric Gages

Electric Gages
95090 EG SERIES – Electric Gage and Swichgage® Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Annunciators
0910469 Four-Function Tattletale® Annunciator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

Section 75 - Genset Controls

Genset Controls
0810288 Keystart 9620 Series – Engine and Generator Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
0810330 CANstart™ 9630 Series – Engine and Generator Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
94012 Automatic Engine Controller ASM150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
03021 ASM170 Auto Start Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
05195 Auto-Start/Stop Controller – Cascade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
02058 Digital Generator Set Controller – iGUARD™ Gen-Set Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
0910470 Murphy Generator Control Panels (MGC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Battery Chargers
1010704 Sentinel 150 Series – UL Approved Automatic Battery Chargers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
1010706 Sentinel 300P Series – Programmable Switch Mode Battery Chargers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Section 78 - MurphyLink® Products

PowerView™ Displays
0910495 PowerView™ – Model PV750 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
1010638 PowerView™ – Model PV450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
1010582 PowerView™ – Model PV101-C - Configurable Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
1010676 PowerView™ – Model PV101-C - Configuration Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
PowerView™ PVA Gages and Accessories
1010612 PowerView™ – CAN Gages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
02125 PowerView™ – Analog Gages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
03020 Wiring Harness Accessories for PV101 PowerView™ Module and PVA Analog Gages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
PowerView™ PVM Gages and Accessories
0710178 PowerView™ – PVM Series Gages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
0710179 Wiring Harness Accessories for PowerView™ - Model PV101 and PVM Gages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
PowerView™ Power Supplies
0910389 PVS-5 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
PowerView™ CAN I/O Modules
0710175 XM500 I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
0610067 CANdrive™ – CANbus J1939 to Electric Gage Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
0810308 FuelCAN™ – Fuel Level Sender to J1939 Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
0810313 SenderCAN™ – SAE J1939 Input/Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
0810332 MeCAN™ – Mechanical Engine to J1939 CAN Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
 SECTION 05 PRESSURE / VACUUM

2î and 2.5î SwichgageÆ and MurphygageÆ Instruments

96023 20, 25, A20 and A25 Series Vacuum Swichgage® Instrument
2 and 2-1/2 in. (51 and 64 mm) Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
96014 Differential Pressure for Filter Restriction
20DP, 25DP, A20DP and A25DP Series 2 and 2-1/2 in. (51 and 64 mm) Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
94116 20 and 25 Series Pressure Swichgage®
2 and 2-1/2 in. (51 and 64 mm) Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
94030 A20 and A25 Series Pressure Swichgage® Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
96012 B-Series Murphygage® Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
9104 Direct Mount Pressure Switch Model PSB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

4.5î SwichgageÆ and MurphygageÆ Instruments

96001 Pressure Gage and Swichgage® Instruments
OPL Series 4-1/2 in. (114 mm) Diameter Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
00029 Pressure Swichgage® 45APE Series Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
96107 Lead Line Pressure Swichgage® Instrument
Model PT167EX 4-1/2 in. (114 mm) Diameter Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Pressure Transmitters
01041 Pressure Transmitters PXT Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
 96023
-1- Revised 03-06
Section 05

20, 25, A20 and A25 Series Vacuum Swichgage® Instrument

2 and 2-1/2 in. (51 and 64 mm) Dial
Features
• Combination Indicating Gage and
Limit Switch
• Critical Vacuum Limit Switches
Are Visible and Adjustable (Most
Models)
• Switch Can Activate Alarms and/
or Shutdown Equipment
• Monitor Engine Load

1 Products covered by this bulletin comply with EMC Council directive 89/336/EEC regarding electromagnetic compatibility except as noted.

The 20 Series (2 inch/51 mm dial) and the 25 Series (2-1/2 inch/64 mm dial) Swichgage instruments are diaphragm-actu-
ated, vacuum-indicating gages, with built-in electrical switches. These switches are used for tripping alarms and/or shut-
down devices.
The 20 and 25 series gage mechanism is enclosed in a steel case coated to resist corrosion (except for a small weep hole
in the bottom of the case).
The A20 and A25 series gage has a polycarbonate case and is sealed from the environment. All gages feature a polycar-
bonate, break-resistant lens and a polished, stainless steel bezel to help protect these rugged, built-to-last instruments.
The gage pointer acts as a pressure indicator and as one switch pole which completes a circuit when it touches the adjust-
able limit contact. Contacts have a self-cleaning motion to ensure electrical continuity.
Gage-only models, without contacts (Murphygage® instruments), are also available.
A pulsation dampener (PD2160) is included with each Swichgage to help eliminate pointer flutter. When monitoring intake
manifold vacuum, the PD2160 is mounted in the manifold. The PD2160 has a 1/8-27 NPT connection.
A vacuum tubing kit (V5179) is available for all models to help reduce pulsations. The kit includes 48 inches (1.2 m) of cop-
per tubing and two compression fittings. Specify tubing kit V5179.
Applications
Commonly used to measure loading of spark ignition engines through intake manifold vacuum. Also can serve as over-
speed protection from sudden loss of load on these engines. Use anywhere the vacuum source is compatible with port
materials.
Specifications
Dial: White on black, dual scale; U.S.A. standard scale is Inches 25 and A25 Series: 4-3/4 x 4-3/4 x 2-3/4 in. (121 x 121 x 70
of Hg/kPa. mm).
Case (mounting clamp included): Adjustable Limit Contacts:
20 and 25 Series: Plated steel. 2-SPST contacts; pilot- duty only, 2 A @ 30 VAC/DC. Contacts
A20 and A25 Series: Polycarbonate/glass filled. are gold flashed silver.
Bezel: Polished stainless steel, standard; others are available Limit Contact Adjustment: by a 1/16 in. hex wrench.
(see How to Order). Limit Contact Wire Leads (20 and 25 Series):
Lens: Polycarbonate, high-impact. 18 AWG (1.0 mm2) x 12 in. (305 mm).
Process Connection: 1/8-27 NPTM brass. Limit Contact Terminals: A20 Series number 4 screw termi-
Sensing Element: Beryllium copper diaphragm. nals; A25 Series number 6 screw terminals.
Gage Accuracy: ±2% of scale in operating range (mid 1/3 of Unit Weight
scale). 20 Series: 8 oz. (0.23 kg).
Unit Dimensions 25 Series: 11 oz. (0.31 kg).
20 and A20 Series: 3 x 3 x 3 in. (76 x 76 x 76 mm). A20 Series: 6 oz. (0.17 kg).
A25 Series: 10 oz. (0.28 kg).
 -2-

Dimensions
20 Series Models 25 Series Models

A20 Series Models A25 Series Models

How to Order
 96014
-3- Revised 01/07/10
Section 05

Differential Pressure for Filter Restriction

20DP, 25DP, A20DP and A25DP Series 2 and 2-1/2 in. (51 and 64 mm) Dial
1
Features
• Monitors Engine Oil and Fuel Filters
• Actuates Alarm or Shutdown System When Filter
Becomes Clogged
• Combination Indicating Gage and Limit Switch
• Actuates Filter Backwash
• Signals Coolant Loss or Aeration On Engine Water
Pump
1 Products covered by this bulletin comply with EMC Council directive 89/336/EEC regarding electromagnetic compatibility except as noted.
The 20DP and A20DP Series (2 inch/51 mm dial) and the 25DP and A25DP Series (2-1/2 inch/64 mm dial) Swichgage instruments are
diaphragm-actuated, differential pressure-indicating gages, with a built-in electrical switch. This switch is used for tripping alarms and/or
shutting down equipment. These gages are intended to monitor and indicate oil, fuel or water filter restriction and can reduce the risk of
dangerously high pressure which may rupture the filter, resulting in contaminants entering the system.
The 20DP and 25DP series mechanism is enclosed in a steel case coated to resist corrosion. The A20DP and A25DP series have a
polycarbonate case and are sealed from the environment. All feature a polycarbonate, break-resistant lens and a polished, stainless
steel bezel to help protect these rugged, built-to-last instruments.
The gage pointer acts as a pressure indicator and as one switch pole which completes a circuit when it touches the adjustable limit con-
tact. Contacts have self-cleaning motion to ensure electrical continuity.
Features
• CONSTANT VISUAL INDICATION of the condition of your filter is shown on the dial.
• TWO INSTRUMENTS IN ONE – an accurate indicating gage and adjustable p.s.i.d. limit switch. Reduces inventory and installation
time.
• ADJUSTABLE CONTACT lets you set the monitoring range of the gage. The contact is tamperproof and can be set only with a 1/16
Allen-head wrench.
• DURABILITY – All gages are made of durable materials allowing them to withstand rugged applications.
• EARLY FILTER CHANGES cost you money and increase the risk of contaminants entering the system. A Murphy filter restriction
Swichgage instrument will let you know when to change the filter and maintain peak efficiency.
Specifications
Dial: White on black, dual scale; U.S.A. standard scale is psi/kPa. Adjustable Limit Contact: SPST contact; pilot- duty only, 2 A @
Other scales available–inquire. 30 VAC/DC; closed when the low limit is met, open when
Case: 20DP and 25DP Series: plated steel. A20DP and A25DP pointer is in normal operating range. Contacts are gold
Series: polycarbonate. flashed silver.
Bezel: Polished stainless steel, standard; others are available Limit Contact Adjustment: by 1/16 in. hex wrench thru 100%
(see How to Order). of scale.
Lens: Polycarbonate, high-impact. Limit Contact Wire Leads (20DP and 25DP Series): 18 AWG
Temperature Range: (1.0 mm2) x
Ambient: -40°F (-40°C) thru 150°F (66°C). 12 in. (305 mm).
Process: -40°F (-40°C) thru 250°F (121°C). Limit Contact Terminals: A20DP Series number #4 screw ter-
Process Connection: 1/8-27 NPTM brass. minals. A25DP Series number 6 terminals.
Sensing Element: Beryllium copper diaphragm. Unit Weight: 20DP and A20DP Series: 9 oz. (0.25 kg); 25DP and
A25DP Series: 11 oz. (0.29 kg).
Gage Accuracy: ±3% maximum across scale.
Unit Dimensions: 20DP and A20DP Series: 3 x 2-3/4 x 2-3/4 in.
Snap-Switch Rating (“DPE” models): SPDT, 3 A @ 30 VDC (76 x 70 x 70 mm). 25DP and A25DP Series: 4-3/4 x 4-3/4 x
inductive; 4 A @ 125 VAC inductive. 2-3/4 in. (121 x 121 x 70 mm).
Base Models
20DP, 25DP, A20DP and A25DP Swichgage instrument Features an internal snap-acting SPDT switch, instead of the sin-
The gage pointer makes with an adjustable contact to complete a gle pole/pointer contacts. When the switch closes on rising pres-
pilot-duty circuit. sure, it becomes Set, as pressure falls the switch Resets.
20DPE, 25DPE, A20DPE and A25DPE Swichgage instrument 20DPG, 25DPG, A20DPG and A25DPG Murphygage instru-
20DPE (was 20DPEO), 25DPE (was 25DPEO), A20DPE (was ment
A20DPEO) and A25DPE (was A25DPEO). Gage without contact(s).
-4-
 94116
-5- Revised 04-05
Section 05

20 and 25 Series Pressure Swichgage®

2 and 2-1/2 in. (51 and 64 mm) Dial
*

Features
• Combination Indicating Gage and Limit Switch
• Critical Pressure Limit Switch Is Visible and
Adjustable (Most Models)
• Switch Can Activate Alarms and/or Shutdown
Equipment
• Exceeds SAE Standards
* Products covered by this bulletin comply with EMC Council directive 89/336/EEC regarding electromagnetic compatibility except as noted.

The 20 Series (2 inch/51 mm dial) and the 25 Series (2-1/2 inch/64 mm dial) Swichgage® models are diaphragm-actuated, pressure-indi-
cating gages, with built-in electrical switches. These switches are used for tripping alarms and/or shutdown devices.
Ranges are available from 0-15 psi (103 kPa) [1.0 bar] thru 0-400 psi (2.8 MPa) [28 bar].
The gage mechanism is enclosed in a steel case coated to resist corrosion. A polycarbonate, break-resistant lens and a polished, stain-
less steel bezel help protect this rugged, built-to-last instrument. Accuracy and protection from moderate overpressure is assured by a
unique, unitized diaphragm chamber. A built-in pulsation dampener helps eliminate pointer flutter and is removable for cleaning. For
models 20P and 25P, the gage pointer acts as a pressure indicator and as one switch pole which completes a circuit when it touches the
adjustable limit contact. Contacts are grounded through the Swichgage® case and have self-cleaning motion to ensure electrical continu-
ity.
Models 20PE and 25PE have internal snap-acting SPDT switches.
Gage-only models, without the switches (MURPHYGAGE®) are also available.
Applications
The Swichgage® was specifically designed to protect engines/equipment in Oil Field, Marine, Irrigation, Construction and Trucking appli-
cations to monitor Engine Lube Pressure, Water Pump Pressure, Hydraulic Pressure, Air Pressure, etc.
Specifications
Dial: White on black, dual scale; U.S.A. standard scale is psi/kPa; Maximum Pressure: See Pressure Ranges and Factory Settings
U.K. standard scale is psi/bar; others available (see How to table on page 2.
Order). Adjustable Limit Contact (20P and 25P): SPST contact; pilot-
Case: Plated steel; mounting clamp included (except for direct duty only, 2 A @ 30 VAC/DC; Normally Close (NC) when the
mount models). low limit is met. Normally Open (NO) when pointer is in nor-
Bezel: Polished stainless steel, standard; others are available mal operating range. Contacts are gold flashed silver.
(see How to Order). Limit Contact Adjustment: by a 1/16 in. hex wrench thru 100%
Lens: Polycarbonate, high-impact. of the scale.
Oil: Silicon Oil. Limit Contact Wire Leads: 18 AWG (1.0 mm2) x 12 in. (305
Temperature Range: mm).
Ambient: -40°F (-40°C) thru 150°F (66°C). Snap-Switch Rating (20PE and 25PE): SPDT, 3 A@ 30 VDC
Process: -40°F (-40°C) thru 250°F (121°C). inductive; 4 A @ 125 VAC inductive.
Process Connection: 1/8-27 NPTM brass. Snap-Switch Wire Leads: 20 AWG (0.75 mm2) x 12 in. (305
Sensing Element: Beryllium copper diaphragm. mm).
Gage Accuracy (% of Full Scale): Unit Weight: 20 Series: 8 oz. (0.23 kg).
25 Series Models: 11 oz. (0.31 kg).
RANGE LOWER 1/4 MIDDLE 1/2 UPPER 1/4 Unit Dimensions: 20 Series: 3 x 3 x 3 in. (76 x 76 x 76 mm).
≤300 psi (20 Bar) ±3% ±2% ±3% 25 Series Models: 4-3/4 x 4-3/4 x 2-3/4 in. (121 x 121 x 70
400psi (28 Bar) ±3% ±3% ±5% mm).

Base Models
20P and 25P Series Swichgage® 20PABS and 25PABS Swichgage®
The gage pointer makes with an adjustable contact to complete a Same as 20P and 25P with internal SPDT snapswitch for pre-
pilot-duty circuit. alarm. 20P7 and 25P7 Lockout Swichgage® Same as 20P and
20PE and 25PE Swichgage® 25P Series. They also include a front, semi-automatic lockout for
20PE (was 20EO) and 25PE (was 25EO). Features internal startup override. This built-in device holds the pointer away from
snap-acting SPDT switches, instead of the single pole/pointer the contact on startup. When pressure exceeds the set point, the
contacts. When the switch closes on falling pressure, it becomes lockout is automatically disengaged (see page 3 for details).
Set, as pressure rises the switch Resets. 20PG and 25PG MURPHYGAGE®
Gage without contact(s).
 -6-

Dimension

Pressure Ranges and Factory Settings

NOTES
1. Values in ( ) are mathematical conversions from psi to kPa/MPa–they do not reflect actual second scale range. U.S.A. standard scale is psi/kPa; U.K.
standard scale is psi/bar-exact set-point shown. Consult factory for other scales.
2. For models 20PE and 25PE; the switch trip point cannot be set at either the low or high extreme of the scale. The trip point must allow for the
reset differential.
3. For adjustable switch models, the trip point is adjustable only over the lower half of the scale.

20PABS and 25PABS Settings

Ranges Available Maximum Standard Settings High Settings Low Alarm
psi (kPa) [bar] Pressure psi (kPa) [bar] psi (kPa) [bar] psi (kPa) [bar] psi (kPa) [bar]
0-15 (103) [1.0] 2 x scale 3 (21) [0.2] 12 (83) [0.8] 3 (21) [0.2] 6 (41) [0.3]
0-30 (207) [2.0] 2 x scale 7 (48) [0.4] 24 (165) [1.6] 7 (48) [0.4] 10 (69) [0.6]
0-50 (345) [3.5] 2 x scale 10 (69) [0.8] 40 (276) [2.8] 10 (69) [0.8] 13 (90) [1.0]
0-75 (517) [5.0] 2 x scale 15 (103) [1.0] 60 (414) [4.0] 15 (103) [1.0] 18 (124) [1.5]
0- (690) [7.0] 2 x scale 20 (138) [1.5] 80 (552) [5.5] 20 (138) [1.0] 23 (159) [1.5]
100
0- (1.0 [10] 2 x scale 30 (207) [2.0] 120 (827) [8.0] 30 (207) [1.5] 33 (228) [2.0]
150 MPa)
0- (1.4 [14] 2 x scale 50 (345) [3.0] 150 (1 MPa) [10] 50 (345) [3.0] 53 (365) [4.0]
200 MPa)
0- (2.1 [20] 1-2/3 x scale 75 (517) [5.0] 225 (1.6MPa) [15] 75 (517) [5.0] 78 (538) [5.0]
300 MPa)
0- (2.8 [28] 1-1/4 x scale 150 (1.0 [7.0] 300 (2.1MPa) [20] 75 (517) [5.0] 15 (1MPa) [10]
400 MPa) MPa) 0

Features
A. Process Connection and Port: Machined from brass bar stock. Together with the diaphragm
forms the diaphragm chamber.
B. Diaphragm: Beryllium copper; material is die formed and heat treated to very close physical
and metallurgical specifications.
C. Pulsation Dampener: Designed to minimize undesirable pointer chatter. It is removable for
cleaning.
D. Dial: White letters on a black background, dual scale (psi & kPa) standard; others available on
request (see How to Order on page 4).
E. Case: Steel with zinc and iridite; mounting clamp included (except for direct mount models).
F. Bezel: Polished stainless steel standard, black bezel also available.
G. Lens: Made of polycarbonate glass, high-impact treated.
H. Pointer: Tempered nickel silver for continuity and corrosion resistance. It is mounted on a
machined brass post.
I. Limit Contact: SPST contact; N.C. when low limit is met. N.O. when pointer operates above
limit.
J. Limit Contact Adjustment: by 1/16 in. hex type wrench thru 100% of the scale. Easy adjust-
ment knob available.
K. Wire Leads: 12 in. (305 mm) long, 18 AWG (1.0 mm2) for face-adjustable contacts. 20 AWG
(0.75 mm2) for Snap-switches models.
 -7-

Magnetic Switch
INDUCTIVE AND HIGH CURRENT LOADS REQUIRE THE USE OF A MAGNETIC SWITCH. The Swichgage® contacts are for light-duty electrical
switching to operate alarms or control devices. Murphy manufactures the Magnetic Switch for protection of the light-duty Swichgage® limit contacts. TAT-
TLETALE® Magnetic Switches show the cause of shutdown for applications that include: capacitor discharge or magneto ignitions, battery systems and
electric motor driven equipment. Typical wiring diagrams are shown below.

Start-Up Lockout

The Swichgage® low limit contact can

be by-passed on start-up by pushing
this optional lockout button. It holds the
pointer away from the shutdown con-
tact while the engine starts. The lock-
out will disengage automatically on
rising pressure.

Pre-Alarm Using 20/25PABS

The 20PABS and 25PABS features a standard limit contact for low pressure equipment shutdown. It also has an internal SPDT snap-switch to signal an
alarm before shutting down. When the low side of the snap-switch trips (preset point), on falling pressure, the switch completes a circuit to activate an
alarm. If the pressure continues to fall, the face-adjustable pointer contact will make and the shutdown circuit will be completed (see the typical diagram
below for reference). The front contact shutdown limit setting (which is adjustable) and the snap-switch are preset at the factory. Refer to “Pressure
Ranges and Factory Settings” table on opposite page for settings. For alternative alarm before shutdown, see Magnetic Switch model 760A or 761APH.
 -8-

How to Order
To order, use the diagram below. List options in ascending alphabetical order (A-Z). Example: 20P-IP1-100.
 94030
-9- Revised 03-06
Section 05

A20 and A25 Series Pressure Swichgage® Instrument

Features
• 2 and 2-1/2 in. (51 and 64 mm) Dial
1

• Corrosion Resistant Polycarbonate Case

• Indicating Gage and Limit Switch
• Switch Can Activate Alarms and/or Shut Down
Equipment
• Critical Pressure Limit Switch Is Visible and
Adjustable (Most Models)
• Contact(s) Isolated From Ground
1 Products covered by this bulletin comply with EMC Council directive 89/336/EEC regarding electromagnetic compatibility except as noted.
The A20 Series (2 inch/51 mm dial) and the A25 Series (2-1/2 inch/64 mm dial) Swichgage instruments are diaphragm-actuated, pressure-indicating
gages, with built-in electrical switches for tripping alarms and/or shutdown devices.
Ranges are available from 0-15 psi (103 kPa) [1.0 bar] thru 0-400 psi (2.8 MPa) [28 bar].
All models of these rugged, built-to-last instruments are face sealed from the environment by the unique combination of a polycarbonate case and lens, a
polished stainless steel bezel and O-ring seals. Ranges above 30 psi (207 kPa) [2 bar] are totally sealed from the external environment (except PE
Series) Ranges of 30 psi and lower have a small weep hole in the bottom of the case. Accuracy and protection from moderate overpressure is assured
by a unique, unitized diaphragm chamber. A built-in pulsation dampener helps eliminate pointer flutter and is removable for cleaning.
For series A20P and A25P, the gage pointer acts as a pressure indicator and as one switch pole which completes a circuit when it touches the adjustable
limit contact. Contacts have self-cleaning motion to ensure electrical continuity.
Models A20PE and A25PE have internal snapacting SPDT switches for three wire control; can be wired to make or to break a circuit.
Gage-only models, without switches (Murphygage instrument) are also available.
Applications
A20/A25 Series applications include: engines/equipment in Oil Field, Marine, Irrigation, Construction and Trucking Engines for Lube Oil
Pressure, Water Pump Pressure, Hydraulic Pressure, Air Pressure, etc.
Specifications
Dial: White on black, dual scale; U.S.A. standard scale is psi/kPa; U.K. Maximum Pressure: See Pressure Ranges and Factory Settings table on
standard scale is psi/bar (see How to Order). page 2.
Case: Polycarbonate/glass filled, corrosion-resistant; steel mounting Adjustable Limit Contact (A20P and A25P): SPST contact; pilot-duty
clamp included. only, 2A@30 VAC/DC; Closed when the low limit is met. Open when
Bezel: Polished stainless steel, standard; others are available (see How pointer is in normal operating range. Contacts are gold flashed silver.
to Order). Limit Contact Adjustment: by a 1/16 in. hex wrench thru 100% of the
scale.
Pointer: Tempered nickel silver; Red tip.
Lens: Polycarbonate, high-impact. Wiring: A20P: Number 4 screw terminals; A25P: Number 6 screw termi-
nals.
Oil: Silicon Oil.
Snap-Switch Rating (A20PE and A25PE): SPDT, 3 A@ 30 VDC induc-
Temperature Range: tive; 4 A @ 125 VAC inductive.
Ambient: -40°F (-40°C) thru 150°F (66°C).
Process: -40°F (-40°C) thru 250°F (121°C). Wiring: A20PE: Number 4 screw terminals;
A25PE: Number 6 screw terminals.
Process Connection: 1/8-27 NPTM brass.
Unit Weight: A20 Series: 8 oz. (0.23 kg).
Sensing Element: Beryllium copper diaphragm.
Gage Accuracy (% of Full Scale): A25 Series Models: 11 oz. (0.31 kg).
RANGE LOWER 1/4 MIDDLE 1/2 UPPER 1/4 Unit Dimensions: A20 Series: 3 x 3 x 3 in. (76 x 76 x 76 mm). A25 Series
Models: 4-3/4 x 4-3/4 x 2-3/4 in. (121 x 121 x 70 mm).
≤300 psi (20 Bar) ±3% ±2% ±3%
400psi (28 Bar) ±3% ±3% ±5%
Base Models
A20P and A25P Series Swichgage Model A25PE-EX is CSA listed for Class I, Division 1, Groups C and D
The gage pointer makes with an adjustable contact to complete a pilot- hazardous areas.
duty circuit. A20PABS and A25PABS Swichgage instrument
A20PE and A25PE Swichgage Sames as A20P and A25P with internal SPDT snap-switch for pre-alarm.
A20PE (was A20EO) and A25PE (was A25PEO). Features A20PG and A25PG Murphygage instrument
internal snap-acting SPDT switches, instead of the single Gage without contact(s).
pole/pointer contacts. When the switch closes on falling pres-
sure, it becomes Set, as pressure rises the switch Resets
(refer to wiring diagram on page 3).
Model A25PE is CSA listed for non-hazardous areas.
 - 10 -

Dimensions

A20 Series Models A25 Series Models

Pressure Ranges and Factory Settings

NOTES • For models A20PE and A25PE; the switch trip point cannot be set at
• Values in ( ) are mathematical conversions from psi to kPa/MPa–they either the low or high extreme of the scale. The trip point must allow for
do not reflect actual second scale range. U.S.A. standard scale is psi/ the reset differential.
kPa; U.K. standard scale is psi/bar-exact set-point shown. Consult fac- • For adjustable switch models, the trip point is adjustable only over the
tory for other scales. lower half of the scale.

A20PABS and A25PABS Settings

Ranges Available Maximum Standard Settings High Settings Low Alarm
psi (kPa) [bar] Pressure psi (kPa) [bar] psi (kPa) [bar] psi (kPa) [bar] psi (kPa) [bar]
0-15 (103) [1.0] 30 psi (207) 3 (21) [0.2] 12 (83) [0.8] 3 (21) [0.2] 6 (41) [0.3]
0-30 (207) [2.0] 60 psi (413) 7 (48) [0.4] 24 (165) [1.6] 7 (48) [0.4] 10 (69) [0.6]
0-50 (345) [3.5] 100 psi (690) 10 (69) [0.8] 40 (276) [2.8] 10 (69) [0.8] 13 (90) [1.0]
0-75 (517) [5.0] 150 psi (1.0 MPa) 15 (103) [1.0] 60 (414) [4.0] 15 (103) [1.0] 18 (124) [1.5]
0-100 (690) [7.0] 200 psi (1.4 MPa) 20 (138) [1.5] 80 (552) [5.5] 20 (138) [1.0] 23 (159) [1.5]
0-150 (1.0 MPa) [10] 300 psi (2.1 MPa) 30 (207) [2.0] 120 (827) [8.0] 30 (207) [1.5] 33 (228) [2.0]
0-200 (1.4 MPa) [14] 400 psi (2.8 MPa) 50 (345) [3.0] 150 (1 MPa) [10] 50 (345) [3.0] 53 (365) [4.0]
0-300 (2.1 MPa) [20] 500 psi (3.4 MPa) 75 (517) [5.0] 225 (1.6MPa) [15] 75 (517) [5.0] 78 (538) [5.0]
0-400 (2.8 MPa) [28] 500 psi (3.4 MPa) 150 (1.0 MPa) [7.0] 300 (2.1MPa) [20] 75 (517) [5.0] 150 (1MPa) [10]

Features
A. Process Connection and Port: Machined from brass bar stock. Together with the dia-
phragm forms the diaphragm chamber.
B. Diaphragm (not shown): Beryllium copper die formed and heat treated to very close
physical and metallurgical specifications.
C. Pulsation Dampener: Designed to minimize undesirable pointer chatter. It is remov-
able for cleaning.
D. Dial: White letters on a black background, dual scale; others available on request–see
How to Order.
E. Case: Polycarbonate/glass filled, corrosion resistant; mounting clamp included.
F. Bezel: Polished stainless steel standard, black bezel also available.
G. Lens: Made of high-impact resistant treated polycarbonate.
H. Pointer: Tempered nickel silver for continuity and corrosion resistance—mounted on a
machined brass post. Red tip.
I. Limit Contact: SPST contact; N.C. when low limit is met. N.O. when pointer operates
above limit.
J. Limit Contact Adjustment: by 1/16 in. hex type wrench thru 100% of the scale. Easy
adjustment knob available.
K. Electrical Connections: Number 4 screw terminals for A20 Series; and number 6
screw terminals for A25 Series models.
 - 11 -

Magnetic Switch
INDUCTIVE AND HIGH CURRENT LOADS REQUIRE THE USE OF A MAGNETIC SWITCH. The Swichgage contacts are for light-duty electrical switch-
ing to operate alarms or control devices. Murphy manufactures the Magnetic Switch for protection of the pilot-duty Swichgage limit contacts. Tattletale®
Magnetic Switches show the cause of shutdown for applications that include: capacitor discharge or magneto ignitions, battery systems and electric motor
driven equipment. Typical wiring diagrams are shown below.

Pre-Alarm Using A20/A25PABS

The A20PABS and A25PABS features a standard limit contact for equipment shutdown on low pressure. It also has an internal SPDT snap-switch to sig-
nal an alarm before shutting down. When the snap-switch trips (preset point), on falling pressure, the switch completes a circuit to activate an alarm. If the
pressure continues to fall, the face-adjustable pointer contact will make and the shutdown circuit will be completed (see the typical diagram below for ref-
erence). The front contact shutdown limit setting (which is adjustable) and the snap-switch are preset at the factory. Refer to “Pressure Ranges and Fac-
tory Settings” table on opposite page for settings. For alternative alarm before shutdown, see Magnetic Switch model 760A or 761APH.

Typical Internal Wiring Diagrams

Pointer shown in the shelf position. Pointer type contact rating: pilot-duty 2 A @ 30 VAC/VDC resistive.
Snap-acting switch rating: 3 A @ 30 VDC inductive. 4 A @ 125 VAC inductive.
 - 12 -

How to Order
To order, use the diagram below. List options in ascending alphabetical order (A-Z). Example: A20P-K-100.

Illumination – Order Separately

A20 Series: Clamp Lite Assembly; 12 V= 05702176; 24 V= 05702177

A25 Series: N/A.

 96012
- 13 - Revised 02-06
Section 05

Murphygage® Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Instruments - B-Series

Features

• 2 in. (51 mm) Dial Gages

• Heavy-duty Rated
• Environmentally Sealed1
• Pressure Models Up to 400 psi (2.76 MPa) [27.6 bar]
• Temperature Models Up to 440°F (220°C)
2

1 All pressure gages, above 30 psi (200 kPa) [20.0 bar] and all temperature gages, are environmentally sealed and filled with inert gas. This seal protects the mech-
anism and eliminates “clouding” of the lens from moisture condensation.
2 Products covered by this bulletin comply with EMC Council directive 89/336/EEC regarding electromagnetic compatibility except as noted.

The B-Series Murphygage® instrument is a high quality, diaphragm-actuated indicating gage. Built by Murphy with the same heavy-duty design as the
standard 20 series and 25 series Swichgage® instrument, the B-gage is more compact and is the optimum instrument for gage-only applications. It has a
high impact polycarbonate lens, sturdy steel case, and a polished, low-profile stainless steel bezel. Accuracy and protection from moderate over-pressure/
over-temperature are assured by a unique, unitized diaphragm chamber, superior quality materials, and the design of the gage movement.
Pressure Murphygage® instrument
Pressure changes at the diaphragm convert to accurate mechanical movements that are indicated on an easy to read analog dial. A pulsation dampener
in the pressure port helps eliminate pointer flutter; it can be removed for cleaning to maintain the gage’s response and accuracy.
Vacuum Murphygage® instrument
Available in 0 to 20 or 0 to 30 in. Hg. (0 to -68 or 0 to - 102 kPa) vacuum.
Temperature Murphygage® instrument
As temperature rises, the fluid in the sensing bulb vaporizes to apply pressure on the diaphragm; the movement translates this vapor pressure to a cali-
brated reading of temperature on the dial. The standard capillary is copper with a PVC armor. Optional armor covering is galvanized
steel or 316 stainless steel (specify). Optional bulb types, adaptor nuts and thermowells are available.*
Applications
Industrial engines and equipment in Oil Field, Marine, Irrigation, Construction and Trucking industries. Monitoring Engine Coolant, Crankcase Oil, Trans-
mission Oil.
Specifications
Dial: White on black; U.S.A. standard scale is dual scale; others available (see How Temperature Range:
to Order). Pressure/Vacuum:
Gage Accuracy: Ambient: -40°F (-40°C) thru 150°F (66°C).
Pressure/Vacuum (% of Full Scale): Process: -40°F (-40°C) thru 250°F (121°C).
Temperature: See chart on reverse side.
RANGE LOWER 1/4 MIDDLE 1/2 UPPER 1/4 Maximum Panel Thickness: 1/4 in. (6 mm).
≤300 psi (24 Bar) ±3% ±2% ±3% Port: Brass.
Case: Plated steel; mounting clamp included (except for direct mount models).
400 psi (28 Bar) ±3% ±3% ±5% Bezel: Polished stainless steel, standard; optional bezels are available (see How to
Order).
Temperature: See chart on reverse side. Pointer: White (black dial); black (white dial).
Lens: Polycarbonate, high-impact.
Sensing Element: Beryllium copper diaphragm.

Comparison of a Murphygage® instrument to Most Other Gages

The basic difference between the Murphygage® instrumentand most other gages is the internal design. The Murphygage® instrument does
not rely on the gage case to serve as part of the sensing chamber. The diaphragm (A) which must expand and contract consistently with
changing pressures and temperatures, is held firmly in place by the back plate (B) and the mounting plate (C). In most other gages the dia-
phragm (D) and an expansion retarding plate (E) are soldered directly into the case port and held in place by a locator ring (F). Should the
case receive any damage in this area the diaphragm operation could be affected. However, in the Murphygage® instrument, the diaphragm
is protected and securely locked in position.
Another feature of the Murphygage® instrument is the removable pulsation dampener (pressure instruments only) (G) which provides for
periodic cleaning when being used with liquids which might cause clogging. Other gages are usually equipped with a non-removable damp-
ener (H).

* For optional temperature capillary lengths, engine adaptors,sensing bulbs and range combinations, see Murphy bulletinT-8428B.
- 14 -
 9104
- 15 - Revised 03-06
Section 05

Direct Mount Pressure Switch Model PSB

Features
• Limit Switch for Critical Pressure
• Operate Alarms or Shutdown Equipment
• SPDT Snap-Acting Switch
• Fits Most Engine Applications
1

1 Products covered by this bulletin comply with EMC Council directive 89/336/EEC regarding electromagnetic compatibility except as noted.

The PSB switch is a direct mount switch for critical pressure points. It has one limit contact that can be used to activate an
alarm, actuate indicator lights or shutdown equipment.
The construction of this instrument is the same as our time-proven Swichgage® instrument. A precision machined brass
mounting plate and port captures a high quality stamped beryllium copper diaphragm. The single-pole, double-throw
(SPDT) snap-switch is operated directly from the diaphragm for quick acting and positive switching. Trip point is factory
preset according to your specifications.
Housing is weather sealed to prevent entry of moisture, dust, etc. A glass-filled nylon terminal block with quick screw termi-
nal connections gives the PSB switch a real advantage in industrial engine applications. The PSB is ideal when reading is
not desired, but pressure is critical to operational efficiency. Intended for use in general purpose nonclassified areas.
Applications
• Engine Lubrication • Construction Equipment
• Water pumps • Light-duty Mobile Equipment
• Compressors • Marine engines
• Oil field systems • Generators
• Irrigation systems
Features
• Fits all engine applications • Time-proven Swichgage® construction
• SPDT snap-switch • Easy wiring terminal block
• Activates indicator lights, alarms, or shut down equip- • Steel housing specially coated to resist corrosion
ment • Factory preset to your specifications
Specifications
Housing: Plated steel. Maximum Pressure: See Trip Point Chart on reverse side.
Pressure Connection: 1/8-27 NPT, Brass. Temperature Range:
Diaphragm: Formed beryllium copper (heat treated). Ambient= -40°F (-40°C) thru 150°F (66°C).
Pulsation Dampener: Brass (it is removable for cleaning). Process= -40°F (-40°C) thru 250°F (121°C).
Terminal Block: Three #4-40 screws. Factory Trip Point Setting: See Trip Point Chart (on back).
Accuracy: Trip point: ±3% of full scale. Pressure Range: Specify from 0-400 psi (0- 2.76 MPa) [0- 27.58
bar]. See Trip Point Chart on reverse side.
Switch reset differential: ±7% of full scale.
Repeatability: ±1% of full scale. Contact: Operates on rising or falling pressure (specify).
Contact Rating: SPDT 3 A @ 30 VDC inductive. Shipping Weight: 8 oz. (0.25 kgs).
Shipping Dimensions: 3 x 2-3/4 x 2-3/4 in. (76 x 70 x 70 mm).

NOTE: No customer replacement parts.

 - 16 -

Dimensions

Trip Point Chart

Ranges available Factory setting Maximum pressure

psi (kPa/MPa) [bar] psi (kPa) [bar] Falling psi (kPa) [bar]
0-15 (0-103) [0-1.03] 3 (21) [.21] 30 (207) [2.07]
0-30 (0-207) [0-2.07] 7 (48) [.48] 60 (414) [4.14]
0-50 (0-345) [0-3.45] 10 (69) [.69] 100 (0-689) [0-6.89]
0-75 (0-517) [0-5.17] 15 (103) [1.03] 150 (0-1.03) [0-10.34]
0-100 (0-689) [0-6.89] 20 (138) [1.38 200 (0-1.38) [0-13.79]
0-150 (0-1.03) [0-10.34] 30 (207) [2.07] 300 (0-2.07) [0-20.70]
0-200 (0-1.38) [0-13.79] 50 (345) [3.45] 400 (0-2.76) [0-27.60]
0-300 (0-2.07) [0-20.70] 75 (517) [5.17] 500 (3.45) [34.50]
0-400 (0-2.76) [0-27.60] 150 (1.03) [10.34] 500 (3.45) [34.50]

How to Order
 96001
- 17 - Revised 07-27-10
Section 05

Pressure Gage and Swichgage® Instruments

OPL Series 4-1/2 in. (114 mm) Diameter Dial
Features
• Combination Indicating Gage and Critical
Pressure Limit Switches
• High and Low Pressure Limit Contacts Are
Visible and Adjustable
• Panel and Surface Mount Versions
• Indicating-only Murphygage® Available
• Latching Control Relay Versions Available
1 2 †
R

1 Products covered by this bulletin comply with EMC Council directive 89/336/EEC regarding electromagnetic compatibility except as noted.
2 Selected configurations are third party listed. Consult factory for details.

The OPL-series pressure Swichgage instruments are combination pressure indicating gages with adjustable low and high
limit switches. Limit switches can be wired directly to electric pilot circuits to operate alarms, shutdown or start/stop of
engines and electric motors.
Surface mount or panel mount enclosure is available for most versions. All versions feature a 4-1/2 in. (114 mm) dial for
easy viewing. Adjustable limit switches are accessible from front of the Swichgage instrument. Limit contacts have self-
cleaning motion to enhance electrical continuity.
Other versions available (see page 2):
• Gage-only without contacts (Murphygage instrument)
• Swichgage instrument with built-in latching relay for start-stop operations.
Specifications
Case: Die cast aluminum; weatherproof. Lens: Optically clear polycarbonate.
Contacts: See Electrical page 3, for contact ratings. Pointer: High visibility with a pointer calibration hub.
Dial: 4-1/2 in. (114 mm) white on black, dual scaled psi / Process Connection: Available in 1/4 NPT and 1/2 NPT.
kPa. Other dial configurations available. Consult fac- See Table B, page 5.
tory.
Sensing Element: Select from bronze or 316 stainless
Gage Accuracy: ±2% for the first and last quarters of the steel bourdon tube. See Table B, page 5 for bourdon
scale, the middle half is ±1%. tube/socket combinations.
Geared Movement: 302 and 304 stainless steel.

Product Selection Information

WARNING: Selection of the proper gage/Swichgage instrument should include consideration for
the service application, the medium being measured, electrical ratings, hazardous area require-
ments and general operating conditions. Improper selection and/or application may be detrimen-
tal to the gage/Swichgage instrument, could cause failure in the operating system and possibly
personal injury or property damage. If in doubt consult our sales/engineering staff.
 - 18 -

Base Models

OPLC, OPLCE and OPLG

The OPLC is a surface mount, indicating, pressure gage and
switch. Adjustable high and low limit, ungrounded contacts are
used to operate alarm, shutdown or start-stop circuits. Pointer clo-
sure against either of the adjustable contacts completes the pilot-
duty circuit. An SPST toggle switch is provided to override the low
limit contact for equipment startup. Suitable for engines or electric
motors with appropriate Murphy magnetic switch or transformer
relay assembly.
The OPLCE features a panel mount square case. It has all the fea-
tures of the OPLC except the low limit contact lockout.
The OPLG is an indicating-only pressure Murphygage instrument.
Same as the OPLC except without switch (limit) contacts.

1 2 †
OPLC
R

OPLFC and OPLFG

The OPLFC is a panel mounting version of the OPLC. It has all of
the features of the OPLC except the low limit contact lockout. The
lockout must be done externally through the control circuit or with
the optional “SA” lockout. The OPLFC is typically used in control
panels such as for compressors, pumps, etc. This version can be
environmentally sealed with either the “ES” or “OS” options. Con-
tact lead termination is by pigtail wires.
The OPLFG is an indicating-only pressure Murphygage instru-
ment. Same as the OPLFC except without switch (limit) contacts

1 †
OPLFC

OPLBP and OPLBPE

The OPLBP is a specialized version of the OPL series designed
for start-stop operation of engines and electric motors. The pilot-
duty limit switches are connected to an internal latching control
relay for ON/OFF automation. Available for various voltages.
The OPLBPE is the same as the OPLBP except has a panel
mount square case.

† †
R

OPLBP

1 Products covered by this bulletin comply with EMC Council directive 89/336/EEC regarding electromagnetic compatibility except as noted.
2 Selected configurations are third party listed. Consult factory for details.
 - 19 -

Electical Dimensions
 - 20 -

Options and Accessories

P4 and P6 Options
The P4 (was PT147) option provides a remote seal mech-
anism to protect the Swichgage instrument sensing ele-
ment from line pressures of highly viscous and mildly
corrosive fluids. Ranges 100 thru 5,000 psi (689 kPa thru
34.5 MPa) [6.9 thru 344.7 bar]. A sealed stainless steel
capillary tube, with stainless steel armor, transmits the
pressure from the diaphragm seal to the Swichgage instru-
ment. Standard capillary length is 5 ft. (1.5 m). Optional
lengths to 50 ft. (15 m) in 5 ft. (1.5 m) increments are avail-
able. Oil well lead lines and pumps with highly viscous liq-
uids are typical applications. If required, customer should
provide a pulsation dampener.
The P6 (was PT167) option is a diaphragm sealed to a 2
NPT housing which attaches directly to the pressure gage
connection. The gage sensing element and the diaphragm
chamber are filled with a silicone fluid so that pressure
against the diaphragm causes the gage to respond. The
diaphragm housing is plated machined steel. Typical appli-
cation is for oil well lead lines. Ranges 100 thru 1,000 psi
(689 kPa thru 6.8 MPa) [6.89 thru 68.9 bar]. The P4 and
P6 can be ordered as optional features to the Swichgage
or indicating-only Murphygage instrument. See How to
Order on pages 5 and 6.

Tamperproof Contact Accessory Pulsation Dampener

• Eliminate pointer contact flutter on pressure Swichgage
and Murphygage instruments which are subject to pul-
sating pressure from reciprocating pumps or compres-
sors.
• Allow close high-low contact settings for more accurate
pressure indication and equipment control.
• Decrease wear on
internal geared move-
ment and increase the
life of your instrument
by eliminating exces-
sive strain and unnec-
essary pointer
movement.
• Available in brass,
carbon steel and
stainless steel.
• Must be ordered
separately. See bulle-
tin PD-95145B.
 - 21 -

How to Order
- 22 -
 00029
- 23 - Revised 07-27-10
Section 05

Pressure Swichgage® 45APE Series Instrument

Features
• Combination Indicating Gage with Independent
Low and High Snap-Acting Switches
• Field-Adjustable and Highly Visible Low and High
Pressure Trip Point Indicators
• Dual-Sector Geared Movement Allows for Full-
Scale Indication and Set Point Control
• Panel and Surface Mount Versions Available
• Latching Control Relay Versions Available
1

1 Listed for non-hazardous locations Pending for hazardous location.

The 45APE Series Swichgage instrument is a mechanical gage for pressure indication. It includes 2 adjustable SPDT switches. These snap-acting
switches can be used for start and stop, to trip alarms and to shut down equipment. Ranges are available from 30”vac (-100 kPa) [-1 bar] thru 10,000 psi
(138 MPa) [1379 bar], see back page.
Basic Operation
The 45APE Series utilizes a bourdon tube sensing unit with a stainless steel dual-sector geared movement. Each of the sectors drive separate pointers
when pressure is applied to the bourdon tube. The indicating pointer (visible pointer) shows actual pressure reading, including below and beyond the low
and high trip points. The low and high trip points are adjustable independently on the gage front lens. The switch operator pointer (behind the dial) is cali-
brated to follow the indicating pointer. The low and high trip point indicators “arrest” the switch operator pointer, and as pressure decreases or increases,
through “the principal of lost motion” the respective snapswitch is tripped.
Basic Models
45APE Series Swichgage instrument 45APEBP Latching Control Relay Series
Surface mount (square case) version. These models have a latching control relay for automatic ON/OFF control.
They are designed to start and stop electric motor driven equipment.
45APEF Series Swichgage instrument
Panel mount (round case) version. 45APEE and 45APEBPE
These models (square case) have the same features as the 45APE/
45APEBP, but suitable for panel mounting.
Applications
The 45APE Series models are widely used in applications requiring pressure indication and Form “C” low and high pressure switches.
Specifications
Dial: White on black, dual scale, psi and kPa standard, 4-1/2 in. (114 mm) Pressure Relief Disc: Back of case (except EX models).
diameter. Switch Reset Deadband: Approximately 10% FS.
Case: Die cast aluminum, surface or panel mount. Snap-Acting Switches: 2-SPDT; 2 A @ 250 VAC.
Overrange: Do not exceed 10% FS above full range. Dry Relay Contact (“BP” Models): 10 A @ 28 VDC or 10 A @ 120 VAC.
Process Connection: 1/4 NPTM thru 1000 psi; 1/2 NPTM 1500 - 10,000 Wire Connections (Surface Mount): 1/2 NPTFconduit/ terminal block.
psi; back connection optional.
Wire Connections (Panel Mount): Wire leads, 18 AWG (1.0 mm2) x 9 in.
Sensing Element: Bronze or 316 stainless steel bourdon tube. (229 mm) long.
Gage Accuracy: Indicating pointer within switch points with hysteresis of Wire Connections (-ES, -OS): 1/2 NPTM conduit and wire leads, 24
<1%: ±2% for first and last quarters of scale; middle half of scale is AWG (0.22 mm2) x 30 in. (762 mm) long.
±1%.
Item Weight: 5 lbs 6 oz (2.4 kg) approximately.
Indicating pointer above or below trip point: Explosion-proof models: 21 lb. (9.5 kg) approx.
Range Accuracy (+/-) above & below trip point only Item Dimensions: 10 x 9 x 6 in. (254 x 229 x 152 mm) approximately.
< 100 (except 15 psi) 10 Explosion-proof models: 12 x 12 x 9 in (305 x 305 x 229 mm) approxi-
15 15 mately.
100-300 4
400-1500 2 CSA Certified Models: 45APE Series models with pressure range thru
5000 psig (34.4 MPa) [344 bar] are CSA approved for Non-Hazardous
2000 12
locations, except options BC, ES, LC and OS. Explosion-proof “EX” mod-
3000-5000 8
els with pressure range thru 5000 psig (34.4 MPa) [344 bar] are CSA
Reading based on testing performed with switch point at mid scale which approved for Hazardous locations Class I, Groups, C & D. 45APEBP and
represents worst case. Switch accuracy ±1.5%. 45APEBPE models are not CSA certified.
 - 24 -

How to Order
Specify model number. NOTE: No designator is required for Standard configurations. List options in alphabetical order (A to Z). Place a dash (–) between
each option. See example below.
 96107
- 25 - Revised 03-06
Section 05

Lead Line Pressure Swichgage® Instrument

Model PT167EX 4-1/2 in. (114 mm) Diameter Dial
Features
• Designed to Monitor Line Pressures of
Highly Viscous and Mildly Corrosive Fluids
• Combination Indicating Gage and Critical
Pressure Switch
• High and Low Pressure Limit Contacts Are
Visible and Adjustable
• Explosion-proof Enclosure
1 2

1 The PT167EX is CSA listed for ranges 100 to 5000 psi (689 kPa to 34.5 MPa) [6.89 to 344.74 bar].
2 Products covered by this bulletin comply with EMC Council directive 89/336/EEC regarding electromagnetic compatibility as noted.

The Murphy PT167EX is a pressure Swichgage instrument connected to a threaded pressure diaphragm housing. The Swichgage instrument is enclosed
in an explosion-proof case and is CSA rated for Class I, Division 1, Groups C and D.*
A Swichgage instrument is a pressure indicating gage with adjustable low and high pressure limit switches. When the gage pointer touches the low or high
limit switches, an electrical circuit is completed which can operate alarms and/or shut down equipment.
The 2 NPT, sealed-diaphragm housing is attached directly to the Swichgage connection. The diaphragm housing is filled with a silicone fluid so that pres-
sure against the diaphragm causes the Swichgage instrument to respond. The housing seals the Swichgage sensing element from the medium being
measured.
Applications
Applications include highly viscous liquids such as crude oil on lead line applications. Other applications have included asphalt, sludge, abrasive materi-
als, etc.
Specifications
Case: Explosion-proof, sand cast aluminum. Lens is removable. CSA Process Connection: 2 NPT.
Listed for Class I, Division 1, Groups C and D.* Maximum Pressure: 30% overpressure.
Contact Rating: 1 A, 125 V AC. Diaphragm Housing: Plated steel, Ni-Span®; silicon filled.
Dial: 4-1/2 in. (114 mm) white on black, dual scaled psi /kPa. Other dial Diaphragm Fluid: Silicone 200.
configurations available. Consult factory.
Shipping Weight: 16.5 lb (7.5 kg).
Ranges: See How to Order on reverse side. Shipping Dimensions: 12 x 12 x 9 in. (305 x 305 x 229 mm).
Gage Accuracy: ±3% full scale.
Dimensions
 - 26 -

How to Order

Tamperproof Contact Accessory Internal Wiring Typical Installation

The photo at
right shows the
PT167EX
installed in a lead
line. For optimum
effectiveness,
the PT167EX
should be
installed ahead
of all other
devices or
valves; by posi-
tioning it immedi-
ately adjacent to
the well outlet,
the Swichgage instrument monitors the entire lead line, sensing
any blockage whether sludge build-up in the line or an accidental
closed valve. The pressure trans- mitter threads into a 2 NPT tee
on the lead line.
 01041
- 27 - Revised 07-27-10
Section 05

Pressure Transmitters PXT Series

Features

• 4-20 mA Output Signal

• Precision Etched Silicon Sensor
• Corrosion Resistant Construction
• High Stability

C R R

The PXT Series pressure transmitter is a state-of-the-art instruments providing 4 to 20 mA outputs. It features a precision
micro-machined silicon diaphragm with fully welded stainless steel pressure port for greater accuracy, stability and a wide
range of compatibility.
Silicon technology is used to provide a miniature micro-machined diaphragm which is electrostatically bonded to a glass
substrate and is then stitch-bonded within a glass to metal seal assembly to provide exceptional thermal and stress isola-
tion. This technology assures you of high accuracy and stability over a wide range of operating conditions.
The enclosure is made of 316 stainless steel and all wetted parts are 316L stainless steel or HASTELLOY C276.
Applications
The PXT can be used in applications such as Compressors, Engines, Process Control, Liquid Level and Pumps.
Specifications
Accuracy (Full Scale, Best Straight Line): Shock: 1000g 1ms Half sine Pulse in each of 3 mutually perpendicular
±0.25% including non-linearity, hysteresis and repeatability. Long axis will not affect performance.
term stability better than 0.2% FS over twelve (12) months.
Vibration: Effect on output response is less than 0.05% FS/g at 30g Peak
Zero Setting: ±0.5% of full scale (0.25% typical). 10Hz to 2kHz, limited by 0.05 in double amplitude. (MIL STD 810C
Span Setting: ±0.5% of full scale BSL (RSS). Proc. 514.2-2 curve L). PXT Power Requirements: Typically 24 VDC
is required, using the Loop Resistance Graph, 9-30 VDC.
Overpressure/Proof Pressure: 400% for up to 500 psi (3.45 MPa) [34
Bar]. 200% for higher ranges. PXT Series Transmitter Output: 4–20 mA, 2-wire.

Burst Pressure: Ranges 0-1000 psi = 600% of full scale or 4000 psi Insulation: Greater than 10 Mohms @ 500 VDC.
whichever is lower. Ranges 2000 psi 13.79 MPa) [137 Bar]= 20,000 RFI Protection: To the European standards of BS EN 50082-2:1991 in
psi (27.5 MPa) [275 Bar]. accordance with IEC 801 parts 1 to 6 for suspectibility to EMC and to
BS EN 50081-1992 for emissions.
Response Time: Frequency response better than 2 kHz.
Storage Temperature: -65 to 200°F (-54 to 93°C). Voltage Surge/Spike: Protected against a 600 V spike to IEC 60-2.
Reverse polarity protected.
Operating Temperature: -40 to 180°F (-40 to 82°C).
Sealed: Sealed at one atmosphere at sea level for ranges > 1000 psi
Compensated Temperature: -20 to 160°F (-29 to 71°C). (6.89 MPa) [68 Bar].
Total Thermal Effects Over Compensated Range: ±2% FS TEB. Vented: Vented for ranges < = 1000 psi (6.89 MPa) [68 Bar].
Physical: UL Certification: Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D; Class II,
Enclosure: Weather Resistant. Groups E, F and G. Pressure transmitter, Model PXT. Intrinsically
Body: 316 stainless steel. Meets NACE MR01-75. safe when installed per system, Diagram No. 05-08-0754. UL File
Wetted Parts: 316L stainless steel or HASTELLOY C276. #E169675
Process Connection: 1/4 NPT female.
Shipping Weight: 0.90 lb. (408 g).
Electrical Cable: Integral; 60 in. (914 mm); vented. 1/2 in. NPT male
conduit connection Shipping Dimensions: 5 x 5 x 5 inches (127 x 127 x 127 mm).
Environmental Effect:
Humidity: No effect.
Mounting: Position/orientation has negligible effect.
Reverse polarity protected
 - 28 -

Product Dimensions

Loop Resistance Graph

Supply voltage for the PXT must be within range of 9-30 VDC. The Graph below shows the minimum supply voltage (VDC)
required for a given load resistance (RL).
 - 29 -

How to Order
To order, please use the part number designation below. Part number example: PXT-100
____ ñ ____

Model
PXT =

Pressure RangeÜ:
Specify For this range
30V30WC -30î H20 to +30î H20 (-76 cm H20 to +76 cm H20) [+/-0.075 Bar]
30V30 -30î Hg to +30 psig (-76 cm Hg to 207 kPa) [2.07 Bar]
30V100 -30î Hg to +100 psig (-76 cm Hg to 689 kPa) [6.89 Bar]
15 0-15 psi (103.4 kPa) [1.03 Bar]
60 0-60 psi (413.7 kPa) [4.13 Bar]
100 0-100 psi (689 kPa) [6.89 Bar]
200 0-200 psi (1.38 kPa) [13.78 Bar]
300 0-300 psi (2.07 kPa) [20.67 Bar]
400 0-400 psi (2.75 MPa) [27.56 Bar]
600 0-600 psi (4.14 kPa) [41.34 Bar]
1000 0-1,000 psi (6.89 MPa) [68.9 Bar]
2000 0-2,000 psi (13.79 MPa) [137.8 Bar]
3000 0-3,000 psi (20.69 MPa) [206.7 Bar]
5000 0-5,000 psi (34.48 MPa) [344.5 Bar]
6000 0-6,000 psi (41.37 MPa) [413.4 Bar]

ÜNOTE: Conversions are approximate.

 - 30 -

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

 SECTION 10 TEMPERATURE

2” and 2.5” Swichgage® and Murphygage® Instruments

95026 A20 and A25 Series Temperature Swichgage® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
94031 20 and 25 Series Temperature Swichgage®
2 and 2-1/2 in. (51 and 64 mm) Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
9137 Direct Mount Temperature Switch – Model TSB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Accessories for 2” - 2.5” Gages

8428 Sensing Bulb/Scale/Capillary Length Combinations for 20, 25, A20 and
A25 Series Temperature Swichgage® and Murphygage® Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Pyrometers
9011 Exhaust Pyrometers - Models 10705146 and 0705147 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

SDB Series Temperature Swichgage® Instruments

7543 Direct-Mount Temperature Swichgage® Instrument SDB Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

4.5” Swichgage® and Murphygage® Instruments

94117 4.5 in. (114 mm) Dial Temperature Swichgage® SPL and 45TE Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Digital Temperature Swichgage® Instrument

8911 Dual Temperature Swichgage® Model Series MDTM89 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Temperature Scanners
9106 Temperature Scanner/Pyrometer Swichgage® – Model TDX6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
00064 Temperature Scanner/Pyrometer – TDXM Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Temperature Sensors
96084 Thermocouple, RTD, and RTD Transmitter
Assemblies with Thermowell – TC, RTD, and RTDT Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
0610107 Thermocouple, ¼″ Diameter Stainless Steel Tube Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
0910430 Air Temperature Sensor – Model 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

 95026
- 31 - Revised 08-05
Section 10

A20 and A25 Series - Temperature Swichgage®

*
2 and 2-1/2 in. (51 and 64 mm) Dial
• Corrosion Resistant Polycarbonate Case
• Indicating Gage and Limit Switch
• Switch Can Activate Alarms and/or Shut Down
Equipment
• Critical/High Temperature Limit Switch Is
Visible and Adjustable (Most Models)
• Contact(s) Isolated From Ground
* Products covered by this bulletin comply with EMC Council directive 89/336/EEC regarding electromagnetic compatibility except as noted.

The A20 Series (2 inch/51 mm dial) and the A25 Series (2-1/2 inch/64 mm dial) Swichgage models are diaphragm-actuated, temperature-indicating
gages, with built-in electrical switches for tripping alarms and/or shutdown devices.
Ranges are available from 32-120°F (0-45°C) thru 300-440°F (160-220°C).
All models of these rugged, built-to-last instruments are fully sealed from the environment by the unique combination of a polycarbonate case and lens, a
polished stainless steel bezel, and O-ring seals.
These vapor/pressure actuated gages feature a sealed capillary tube and a sensing bulb. When subjected to heat, the liquid in the sensing bulb changes
to vapor creating pressure against a diaphragm mechanism. The diaphragm translates this vapor pressure into a mechanical gage reading.
For series A20T and A25T, the gage pointer acts as a temperature indicator and as one switch pole which completes a circuit when it touches the adjust-
able limit contact. Contact(s) are isolated from ground. They have self-cleaning motion to enhance electrical continuity.
Models A20TE and A25TE have internal snap-acting SPDT switches.
Gage-only models, without contacts (MURPHYGAGE®) are also available.
Applications
Applications for A20 and A25 Series temperature Swichgage instruments include: engines and equipment in Oil Field, Marine, Irrigation, Construction and
Trucking industries. Monitoring Engine Coolant temperature, Crankcase Oil, Transmission Oil.
Base Models
Coolant or Oil Temperature
A20T and A25T Series Swichgage ous areas. Model A25TE-EX is CSA listed for Class I, Division 1, Groups
For these models the gage pointer makes with an adjustable contact to C & D hazardous areas.
complete a pilot-duty circuit. A20TABS and A25TABS Swichgage – Same as 20 and 25T with internal
A20TL and A25TL Swichgage SPDT snapswitch for pre-alarm.
For use on Ford Worldwide engines. Supplied with special sensing bulb.
Cylinder Head Temperature
A20TE and A25TE Swichgage A20TH and A25TH Swichgage – A20TH (was A20TL8133) and A25TH
A20TE (was A20ESR) and A25TE (was A25ESR). Models with internal (was A25TL8133). For use on Air Cooled engines.
SPDT snap-switches, instead of the single pole/pointer contact(s). When
the switch closes on rising temperature, it becomes Set. As temperature
decreases the switch Resets. Model A25TE is CSA listed for non-hazard-
Gage–Only Models
A20TG and A25TG MURPHYGAGE® – Gage without contact(s).

Specifications
Dial: White on black; U.S.A. standard scale is dual scale °F/°C; others case ground. Normally Closed when the high limit is met. Normally
available. Open when pointer is in normal operating range. Contacts are gold
Case: Glass filled/Polycarbonate, corrosion-resistant; steel mounting flashed silver.
clamp included. Bezel: Polished stainless steel, standard; others are Limit Contact Adjustment: by a 1/16 in. hex wrench thru 100% of the
available. scale.
Pointer: Tempered nickel silver; red tip. Wiring: A20T: Number 4 screw terminals; A25T: Number 6 screw ter-
Lens: Polycarbonate, high-impact. minals.
Sensing Element: Beryllium copper diaphragm. Snap-Switch Rating (A20TE and A25TE):
SPDT, 3 A@ 30 VDC inductive; 4 A @ 125 VAC inductive.
Capillary: PVC armored copper; 4 ft. (1.2 m).* Stainless steel armor
optional. Wiring: A20TE: Number 4 screw terminals; A25TE: Number 6 screw
terminals.
Sensing Bulb: Copper.*
Unit Weight: A20 Series: 11.9 oz. (0.370 kg). A25 Series Models: 13.3 oz.
Gage Accuracy: See accuracy chart, on page 2. (0.413 kg).
Maximum Temperature: See Temperature Ranges and Factory Settings Unit Dimensions: A20 Series: 4-3/4 x 4-3/4 x 3 in. (121 x 121 x 76 mm).
table on page 2. A25 Series Models: 4-3/4 x 4-3/4 x 2-3/4 in. (121 x 121 x 70 mm).
Adjustable Limit Contact (A20T and A25T):
SPST contact; pilot-duty only, 2 A @ 30 VAC/VDC; isolated from

* For optional capillary lengths, engine adapters, sensing bulbs and range combinations, see Murphy bulletin T-8428B.
 - 32 -

Dimensions

Temperature Ranges and Factory Settings

NOTES
1. Values in ( ) are mathematical conversions from °F to °C–they do not reflect actual second scale range. U.S.A. standard scale is °F/°C.
2. For models A20TE and A25TE; the switch trip point cannot be set at either the low or high extreme of the scale. The trip point must allow for the reset
differential.
3. For adjustable switch models, the trip point is adjustable only over the upper half of the scale.
Ranges Available Hi/Lo Settings 20TABS and 25TABS Settings
*
Max. Temp. Std. Settings Low High Alarm† Shutdown
Dual Scale Dial Single Scale
°Fahrenheit (°Celsius) °Celsius only °F (°C) °F (°C) °C only °F (°C) °F (°C) °F (°C) °C only °F (°C) °C only
32 – 120 (0 – 49) — 185 (85) 110 (43) — 32 (0) 110 (43) 100 (38) — 110 (43) —
32 – 160 (0-71) 0 – 70 215 (102) 150 (66) 66 32 (0) 150 (66) 140 (60) 60 150 (66) 66
130 – 220 (54 – 104) 45 – 100 260 (127) 210 (99) 85 160 (71) 210 (99) 200 (93) 80 210 (99) 85
130 – 250 (54 – 121) 50 – 120 310 (154) 210 (99) 97 160 (71) 210 (99) 200 (93) 95 210 (99) 100
140 – 300 (60 – 149) 60 – 140 340 (173) 275 (135) 130 200 (93) 275 (135) 265 (129) 125 275 (135) 130
160 – 320 (71 – 160) 70 – 160 370 (192) 300 (149) 150 200 (93) 300 (149) 290 (143) 145 300 (149) 150
180 – 350 (82 – 177) — 400 (209) 330 (166) — 240 (116) 330 (166) 320 (160) — 330 (166) —
300 – 440 (149 – 227) — 500 (260) 400 (204) — 300 (149) 400 (204) 390 (199) — 400 (204) —
* Standard setting for A20T, A25T, A20TE and A25TE models.
† SPDT snap-switch is the alarm switch.

Temperature Accuracy Chart

Temperature Range Lower 1/3 of Scale Middle 1/3 of Scale Upper 1/3 of Scale
32 to 120°F (0 to 49°C) ± 12°F (± 6°C) ± 5°F (± 2.4°C) ± 6°F (± 3°C)
32 to 160°F (0 to 71°C) ± 20°F (± 10°C) ± 8°F (± 4.4°C) ± 7°F (± 4°C)
130 to 220°F (54 to 104°C) ± 6°F (± 3°C) ± 3°F (± 1.6°C) ± 4°F (± 2°C)
130 to 250°F (54 to 121°C) ± 9°F (± 5°C) ± 5°F (± 2.4°C) ± 4°F (± 2°C)
140 to 300°F (60 to 149°C) ± 10°F (± 5.2°C) ± 6°F (± 3°C) ± 5°F (± 2.4°C)
160 to 320°F (71 to 160°C) ± 10°F (± 5.2°C) ± 5°F (± 2.4°C) ± 5°F (± 2.4°C)
180 to 350°F (82 to 177°C) ± 12°F (± 6°C) ± 5°F (± 2.4°C) ± 5°F (± 2.4°C)
300 to 440°F (149 to ± 9°F (± 5°C) ± 5°F (± 2.4°C) ± 4°F (± 2°C)
227°C)

Maximum Temperature
MAXIMUM AMBIENT TEMPERATURE: -40° (-40°) thru 150° (66°)
Range Maximum Process Temperature
≤250° (120°) 120% of Full Scale
300° (140°) 350° (198°)
≥320° (160°) 120% of Full Scale
 - 33 -

Magnetic Switch
INDUCTIVE AND HIGH CURRENT LOADS REQUIRE THE USE OF A MAGNETIC SWITCH. The Swichgage® contacts are for light-duty electrical
switching to operate alarms or control devices. Murphy manufactures the Magnetic Switch for protection of the pilot-duty Swichgage® limit contacts. TAT-
TLETALE® Magnetic Switches show the cause of shutdown for applications that include: capacitor discharge or magneto ignitions, battery systems and
electric motor driven equipment. Typical wiring diagrams are shown below.

Pre-Alarm using A20/A25TABS

The A20TABS and A25TABS features a standard limit contact for equipment shutdown on high temperature. It also has an internal SPDT snap-switch to
signal an alarm before shutting down. When the snap-switch trips (preset point), on rising temperature, the switch completes a circuit to activate an alarm.
If the temperature continues to increase, the face-adjustable pointer contact will make and the shutdown circuit will be completed (see the typical diagram
below for reference). The front contact shutdown limit setting (which is adjustable) and the snap-switch are preset at the factory. Refer to “Temperature
Ranges and Factory Settings” table on opposite page for settings. For alternative alarm before shutdown, see Magnetic Switch model 760A or 761APH.

Typical Internal Wiring Diagrams

Pointer shown in the shelf position. Pointer type contact rating: pilot-duty 2 A @ 30 VAC/VDC resistive. Snap-acting switch rating: 3 A @ 30 VDC induc-
tive. 4 A @ 125 VAC inductive
 - 34 -

How to Order
To order, use the diagram below. List options in ascending alphabetical order (A-Z). Example: A20T-B1-250-4.

Illumination – Order Separately

A20 Series: Clamp Lite Assembly; 12 V= 05702176; 24 V= 05702177
A25 Series: N/A.
 94031
- 35 - Revised 06-06
Section 10

20 and 25 Series Temperature Swichgage®

2 and 2-1/2 in. (51 and 64 mm) Dial
*
Features
• Combination Indicating Gage and
Limit Switch
• Critical/High Temperature Limit
Switch Is Visible and Adjustable (Most
Models)
• Switch Can Activate Alarms and/or
Shut Down Equipment
• Contact Grounds Through Case

* Products covered by this bulletin comply with EMC Council directive 89/336/EEC regarding electromagnetic compatibility as noted.

The 20 Series (2 inch/51 mm dial) and the 25 Series (2-1/2 inch/64 mm dial) Swichgage models are diaphragm-actuated, temperature-
indicating gages, with built-in electrical switches for tripping alarms and/or shutdown devices.
Ranges are available from 32-120°F (0-45°C) thru 300-440°F (160-220°C).
The gage mechanism is enclosed in a steel case coated to resist corrosion. A polycarbonate, break resistant lens and a polished, stain-
less steel bezel help protect this rugged, built-to-last instrument.
These vapor actuated gages feature a sealed capillary tube and a sensing bulb. When subjected to heat, the liquid in the sensing bulb
changes to vapor creating pressure against the diaphragm mechanism. The diaphragm translates this vapor pressure into a mechanical
gage reading.
For series 20T and 25T, the gage pointer acts as a temperature indicator and as one switch pole which completes a circuit when it
touches the adjustable limit contact. Contact(s) are grounded through the Swichgage case. They have self-cleaning motion to enhance
electrical continuity.
Models 20TE and 25TE have internal snap-acting SPDT switches.
Gage-only models, without contacts (Murphygage® instrument) are also available.
Applications
Industrial engines and equipment in Oil Field, Marine, Irrigation, Construction and Trucking industries. Monitoring Engine Coolant, Crank-
case Oil, Transmission Oil.
Specifications
Dial: White on black; U.S.A. standard scale is dual scale °F/°C; Adjustable Limit Contact (20T and 25T): SPST contact; pilot
others available (see How to Order). duty only, 2 A @ 30 VAC/ VDC; Ground path through encase-
Case: Plated steel; mounting clamp included (except for direct ment. Normally Closed (NC) when the high limit is met. Nor-
mounting models). mally Open (NO) when pointer is in normal operating range.
Bezel: Polished stainless steel, standard; others are available Contacts are gold flashed silver.
(see How to Order). Limit Contact Adjustment: by a 1/16 in. hex wrench thru
Pointer: Tempered nickel silver. 100% of the scale.
Lens: Polycarbonate, high-impact. Limit Contact Wire Leads: 18 AWG (1.0 mm2) x 12 in. (305
Sensing Element: Beryllium copper diaphragm. mm).
Capillary: PVC armored copper; 4 ft. (1.2 m).* Stainless steel Snap-Switch Rating (20TE and 25TE):
armor optional. SPDT, 3 A @ 30 VDC inductive; 4 A @ 125 VAC inductive.
Snap-Switch Wire Leads: 20 AWG (0.75 mm2) x 12 in. (305
Sensing Bulb: Copper.* mm).
Gage Accuracy: See accuracy chart, on page 2. Unit Weight: 20 Series: 12.7 oz. (0.39 kg).
Maximum Temperature: See Temperature Ranges and Factory 25 Series Models: 13.8 oz. (0.43 kg).
Settings table on page 2. Unit Dimensions: 20 Series: 4-3/4 x 4-3/4 x 2-3/4 in. (121 x 121 x
70 mm). 25 Series Models: 4-3/4 x 4-3/4 x 3 in. (121 x 121 x
76 mm).

*For optional capillary lengths, engine adaptors, sensing bulbs and range combinations, see Murphy bulletin T-8428B.
 - 36 -

Base Models
Coolant or Oil Temperature
20T and 25T Series Swichgage
For these models the gage pointer makes with an adjustable contact to complete a pilot-duty circuit.
20TL and 25TL Swichgage instrument
For use on Ford Worldwide engines. Supplied with special sensing bulb.
20TO Swichgage instrument
Same as 20T with a special dial for Oil Temperature.
20TE and 25TE Swichgage instrument
20TE (was 20ESR) and 25TE (was 25ESR).
Models with internal SPDT snap-switches, instead of the single pole/pointer contact(s). When the switch closes on rising temperature, it becomes Set. As
temperature decreases the switch Resets.
20TABS and 25TABS Swichgage instrument
Same as 20/25T with internal SPDT snap-switch for pre-alarm.
Cylinder Head Temperature
20TH and 25TH Swichgage instrument
20TH (was 20TL8133) and 25TH (was 25TL8133). For use on Air Cooled engines.
Direct Mount Models
20TD Swichgage instrument
Same as 20T. Available ranges: 220°F (104°C) or 250°F (121°C). Includes 1/4 x 4 in. (6 x 102 mm) sensing bulb.
20SD Swichgage instrument
Same as 20T. Available ranges: 220°F (104°C) or 250°F (121°C). Includes 11/32 x 1-1/2 in. (9 x 38 mm) sensing bulb.
Gage–Only Models
20TG and 25TG Murphygage
Gages without contact(s).
Temperature Ranges and Factory Settings
NOTES
• Values in ( ) are mathematical conversions from °F to °C–they do not reflect actual second scale range.
U.S.A. standard scale is °F/°C.
• For models 20TE and 25TE; the switch trip point cannot be set at either the low or high extreme of the
scale. The trip point must allow for the reset differential.
• For adjustable switch models, the trip point is adjustable only over the upper half of the scale.

Ranges Available Hi/Lo Settings 20TABS and 25TABS Settings

Dual Scale Dial Single Scale Max. Temp. Std. Settings* Low High Alarm† Shutdown
°Celsius
°Fahrenheit (°Celsius) only °F (°C) °F (°C) °C only °F (°C) °F (°C) °F (°C) °C only °F (°C) °C only
32 – 120 (0 – 49) –– 185 (85) 110 (43) –– 32 (0) 110 (43) 100 (38) –– 110 (43) ––
32 – 160 (0 – 71) 0 – 70 215 (102) 150 (66) 66 32 (0) 150 (66) 140 (60) 60 150 (66) 66
130 – 220 (54 – 104) 45 – 100 260 (127) 210 (99) 85 160 (71) 210 (99) 200 (93) 80 210 (99) 85
130 – 250 (54 – 121) 50 – 120 310 (154) 210 (99) 97 160 (71) 210 (99) 200 (93) 95 210 (99) 100
140 – 300 (60 – 149) 60 – 140 340 (172) 275 (135) 130 200 (93) 275 (135) 265 (129) 125 275 (135) 130
160 – 320 (71 – 160) 70 – 160 370 (192) 300 (149) 150 200 (93) 300 (149) 290 (143) 145 300 (149) 150
180 – 350 (82 – 177) –– 400 (209) 330 (166) –– 240 (116) 330 (166) 320 (160) –– 330 (166) ––
300 – 440 (149 – 227) –– 500 (260) 400 (204) –– 300 (149) 400 (204) 390 (199) –– 400 (204) ––
* Standard setting for 20T, 25T, 20TE and 25TE models.
† SPDT snap-switch is the alarm switch.

Temperature Accuracy Chart

Temperature Range Lower 1/3 of Scale Middle 1/3 of Scale Upper 1/3 of Scale
32 to 120°F (0 to 49°C) ± 12°F (± 6°C) ± 5°F (± 2.4°C) ± 6°F (± 3°C)
32 to 160°F (0 to 71°C) ± 20°F (± 10°C) ± 8°F (± 4.4°C) ± 7°F (± 4°C)
130 to 220°F (54 to 104°C) ± 6°F (± 3°C) ± 3°F (± 1.6°C) ± 4°F (± 2°C)
130 to 250°F (54 to 121°C) ± 9°F (± 5°C) ± 5°F (± 2.4°C) ± 4°F (± 2°C)
140 to 300°F (60 to 149°C) ± 10°F (± 5.2°C) ± 6°F (± 3°C) ± 5°F (± 2.4°C)
160 to 320°F (71 to 160°C) ± 10°F (± 5.2°C) ± 5°F (± 2.4°C) ± 5°F (± 2.4°C)
180 to 350°F (82 to 177°C) ± 12°F (± 6°C) ± 5°F (± 2.4°C) ± 5°F (± 2.4°C)
300 to 440°F (149 to 227°C) ± 9°F (± 5°C) ± 5°F (± 2.4°C) ± 4°F (± 2°C)
 - 37 -

Maximum Temperature
MAXIMUM AMBIENT TEMPERATURE: -40° (-40°) thru 150° (66°)

RANGE MAXIMUM PROCESS TEMPERATURE

≤250° (120°) 120% OF FULL SCALE
300° (140°) 350° (198°)
≥320° (160°) 120% OF FULL SCALE

Dimensions
20 Series Models (typical) 25 Series Models (typical)

Magnetic Switch
INDUCTIVE AND HIGH CURRENT LOADS REQUIRE THE USE OF A MAGNETIC SWITCH. The Swichgage contacts are for light-duty electrical switch-
ing to operate alarms or control devices. Murphy manufactures the Magnetic Switch for protection of the light-duty Swichgage limit contacts. Tattletale®
Magnetic Switches show the cause of shutdown for applications that include: capacitor discharge or magneto ignitions, battery systems and electric motor
driven equipment. Typical wiring diagrams are shown below.

Pre-Alarm Using 20/25TABS

The 20TABS and 25TABS feature a standard limit contact for high temperature equipment shutdown. It also has an internal SPDT snap-switch to signal an
alarm before shutting down. When the low side of the snap-switch trips (preset point), on rising temperature, the switch completes a circuit to activate an
alarm. If the temperature continues to increase, the face-adjustable pointer contact will make and the shutdown circuit will be completed (see the typical
diagram below for reference). The front contact shutdown limit setting (which is adjustable) and the snap-switch are preset at the factory. Refer to “Tem-
perature Ranges and Factory Settings” table on opposite page for settings. For alternative alarm before shutdown, see Magnetic Switch model 760A or
761APH.
 - 38 -

Typical Internal Wiring Diagrams

Pointer shown in the shelf position. Pointer type contact rating: pilot duty 2 A @ 30 VAC/VDC.
Snap-acting switch rating: 3 A @ 30 VDC inductive. 4 A @ 125 VAC inductive.

How to Order
To order, use the diagram below. List options in ascending alphabetical order (A-Z). Example: 20T-IP1-250-4.
 9137
- 39 - Revised 04-06
Section 10

Direct Mount Temperature Switch – Model TSB

*
Features
• Limit Switch for Critical Temperature
• Activates Indicator Lights, Alarms or
Shutdown Equipment
• SPDT Snap-Acting Switch
• Fits Most Engine Applications
• Time-Proven Swichgage® Construc-
tion
• Easy Wiring Terminal Block
• Steel Housing Specially Coated to
Resist Corrosion
• Trip Point is Factory Preset to Your
Specifications
* Products covered by this bulletin comply with EMC Council directive 89/336/EEC regarding electromagnetic compatibility except as noted.

The TSB switch is a direct mount switch for temperature sensing. It has one limit contact that can be used to activate an alarm, actuate
indicator lights or shut down equipment.
The construction of this instrument is the same as our time-proven Swichgage®. A precision machined brass mounting plate and port
captures a high quality stamped beryllium copper diaphragm. The single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) snap switch is operated directly from
the diaphragm, for quick acting and positive switching. Trip point is factory preset according to your specifications.
Housing is weather sealed to prevent entry of moisture, dust, etc. A glass-filled nylon terminal block with quick-screw terminal connec-
tions gives the TSB switch a real advantage in industrial engine applications. The TSB is ideal when reading is not desired, but tempera-
ture is critical to operational efficiency.
Intended for use in general purpose nonclassified areas.
Applications
• Engine Coolant • Construction equipment
• Irrigation Systems • Mobile Equipment
• Compressors • Marine Engines
• Oil Field Systems • Generators
• Engine Lubrication • Electric Motors

Dimensions Specifications
Housing: Plated steel.
Connections: Popular NPT and metric (specify).
Diaphragm: Formed beryllium copper (heat treated).
Sensing Bulb: Copper.
Terminal Block: Three # 4-40 screws.
Switch Trip Point Range
Accuracy 150–295°F (66–146°C)
Trip Point ±3°F (1.7°C)
Switch Reset Differential ± 15°F (9°C)
Repeatability ±3°F (1.7°C)
Contact Rating: SPDT 3 A @ 30 VDC inductive.
Maximum Temperature: 325°F (163°C).
Factory Trip Point Setting: 210°F (99°C) Rising. Other trip point setting
must be specified at time of order (see How to Order on reverse
side).
Contact: Operates on rising or falling temperature (specify).
Shipping Weight: 10 oz (0.31 kg).
Shipping Dimensions: 4-3/4 x 4-3/4 x 2-5/8 in. (121 x 121 x 67 mm).

NOTE: No customer replacement parts.

 - 40 -

How to Order
To order the TSB model use the diagram below.
 8428
- 41 - Revised 05-06
Section 10

Sensing Bulb/Scale/Capillary Length Combinations for

20, 25, A20 and A25 Series Temperature Swichgage® and
Murphygage® Instruments
APPLICATION NOTE: Murphy vapor pressure actuated temperature Swichgage and Murphygage instruments indicate the
temperature as measured at the sensing bulb. If the sensing bulb is not fully immersed in the medium being measured, an
inaccurate reading will occur. This is particularly important when applying bulb types “C”, “F” and “H” since the attaching nut
can be positioned at various depths along the length of the sensing bulb. For best results be sure that the sensing bulb is
fully immersed. For further important details see appropriate installation sheet for Murphy temperature devices or contact a
Murphy representative.
NOTE:
• Bulb Type A, B, E & K are provided as standard on T & TE series based on scale and capillary length.
• Bulb Type D is provided as standard on TL & TH series based on scale and capillary length.
• Bulb Type J is provided as standard on TJD series.
• Any bulb used where it is standard, based on model, scale and capillary length, must not be specified in
the Model Number. Any bulbused where it is not standard must be specified in the Model Number.

Adaptor Temperature Ranges

Bulb Nut Thermow- Capillary Tube
Type Bulb Dimensions Group ell Group Length °F °C
130-220,130-250, 54-104, 54-121,
2-30 feet 140-300, 160-320, 60-149, 71-160,
(0.61-9.14 meters) 180-350, 300-440 82-177, 149-227
A 1 I
2-7 feet
Standard bulb 20BTG, 20/25T, A20/25T 10050166 (0.61-2.13 meters) 32-120, 32-160 0-49, 0-71
130-220, 130-250 54-104, 54-121,
31-80 feet 140-300, 160-320, 60-149, 71-160,
(9.45-24.39 meters) 180-350, 300-440 82-177, 149-227
B 2 II
8-23 feet
Standard bulb 20BTG, 20/25T, A20/25T 10010061 (2.43-7.01 meters) 32-120, 32-160 0-49, 0-71
130-220, 130-250, 54-104, 54-121,
2-25 feet 140-300, 160-320, 60-149, 71-160,
(0.61-7.62 meters) 180-350 82-177
C* 3 –
2-4 feet
Optional bulb 10010060 (0.61-1.21 meters) 300-440 149-227
130-220, 130-250, 54-104, 54-121,
2-16 feet 140-300, 160-320, 60-149, 71-160,

D†
(0.61-4.88 meters) 180-350 82-177
4 IV
2-4 feet
Standard bulb 20/25TL, A20/25TL, 20/25TH, A20/25TH 10000286 (0.61-1.21 meters) 300-440 149-227
24-35 feet
(7.32-10.67 meters) 32-120, 32-160 0-49, 0-71

E 2 III
81-110 feet 130-220, 130-250 54-104, 54-121,
(24.69-33.53 140-300, 160-320, 60-149, 71-160,
Standard bulb 20BTG, 20/25T, A20/25T 10010084 meters) 180-350, 300-440 82-177, 149-227

F 3 –
16-25 feet 130-220, 130-250, 54-104, 54-121,
Optional bulb 10000577 (4.88-7.62 meters) 140-300, 160-320 60-149, 71-160

G 4 –
17-25 feet 130-220, 130-250, 54-104, 54-121,
Optional bulb 10000578 (5.18-7.62 meters) 140-300, 160-320 60-149, 71-160
130-220, 130-250, 54-104, 54-121,
2-25 feet 140-300, 160-320, 60-149, 71-160,
H 3 IV (0.61-7.62 meters) 180-350 82-177

2-4 feet
Optional bulb 10002466 (0.61-1.21 meters) 300-440 149-227

3 and
J Part No. –
85030447
2-12 feet
Standard bulb 20/25TJD, A20/25TJD 10051153 (0.61-3.66 meters) 130-250 54-121
 - 42 -

Adaptor Temperature Ranges

Bulb Nut Thermow- Capillary Tube
Type Bulb Dimensions Group ell Group Length °F °C

K 2 – 36-50 feet
(10.97-15.24 32-120 0-49
Standard bulb 20/25T, A20/25T 10004886 meters) 32-160 0-71

* Standard bulb for bearing temperature models (example 20TB).

† Standard bulb for aircooled engine models (example 20TH) and Ford worldwide engines (example 20TL).

Consult factory for non-listed options and combinations.

Optional Adaptor Group

PART NO. DESCRIPTION PART NO. DESCRIPTION
Group 1 Group 2
10050167 1/4-18 NPT 10050103 3/8-18 NPT
10050069 3/8-18 NPT 10050107 1/2-14 NPT
10050284 3/8-19 BSPT 10050827 3/4-14 NPT
10050131 1/2-14 NPT 10050695 7/8-9 UNF
10050330 1/2-14 BSPT 10002447 22 mm x 1.5
10050068 5/8-18 UNF
10050105 3/4-14 NPT Group 3
10050093 7/8-9 UNC 10010052 1/8-27 NPT
10002442 14 mm x 1.5 10010051 10 mm x 1.5
10002444 16 mm x 1.5 10005235 10 mm x 1.0
10002443 18 mm x 1.5
10002446 20 mm x 1.5 Group 4
10002445 22 mm x 1.5 10050912 1/8-27 NPT
10002449 24 mm x 1.5 10002450 10 mm x 1.5
10002451 12 mm x 1.5

Optional Thermowells
PART NO. DESCRIPTION
Group I
10010009 1/2-14 NPT, Carbon Steel, Nickel
Plate
10050128 1/2-14 NPT, 304 Stainless Steel
10050899 1/2-14 NPT, Carbon Steel, Nickel
Plate
10000425 7/8-9 UNC, Carbon Steel, Nickel
Plate

Group II
10050169 1/2-14 NPT, 304 Stainless Steel

Group III
10050900 1/2-14 NPT, Carbon Steel, Nickel
Plate
10050901 1/2-14 NPT, 304 Stainless Steel
 9011
- 43 - Revised 10-05
Section 10

Exhaust Pyrometers
Models 10705146 and 10705147
Features
• Single or Dual Port Reading
• 2% Accuracy
• Sealed Construction
• Temperature Compensation
• Easy to Read Scales

The Single 10705147 (00000956) and Dual 10705146 (00000819) Port Pyrometers monitor exhaust temperatures in all
types of engines. The Dual Port Pyrometer can monitor each bank of a V-type engine, allowing you to compare readings at
all times. Both pyrometers feature an easy-to-read illuminated dial with scales in both Fahrenheit and Celsius. They require
no outside power (except for dial lighting). Spring loaded jewels and alloy pivots increase durability. Murphy offers pyrome-
ter accessories such as thermocouples and wire lead assembly.
Application
Excessive exhaust temperature is a major damaging factor to all engines. The best way to monitor this temperature is with
the use of a pyrometer. Excessive exhaust temperature is caused by an upset fuel/air ratio or more fuel in the engine than
there is air to support it. This condition can occur as a result of over throttling, a dirty air cleaner, different fuels, a malfunc-
tioning fuel system, change of altitude, an out of tune engine and many other causes. But whatever the cause, a pyrometer
indicates this condition before serious damage occurs. Suitable for stationary or mobile engines, power units, agricultural
and construction equipment, as well as marine and trucking.
Features
• Large sweep scales for maximum legibility
• Internal illumination for night use
• Accuracy: 2% full scale
• Sealed housing
• Ambient temperature compensation
• Calibrated permanently at 2/3 scale
• Flush type mounting on any plane
Benefits of Using a Pyrometer
• Longer engine life
• Better fuel economy
• Less lubrication oil dilution
• Lubrication oil stays clean much longer
• Exhaust emissions drop to a minimum
• Malfunctions indicated before excessive damage occurs
Specifications
Dial Scale
Single: 300 to 1300°F (150 to 700°C)* Bezel: Polished stainless steel.†
Dual: 300 to 1200°F (150 to 649°C)* Case: PVC.
Dial Sweep (both models): 100°. Pointer(s): Fire Orange.
Accuracy: Full scale 2%.
Illumination
Internal 12 or 24 VDC.

* Celsius only dials available. † Black bezel available. Special order.

 - 44 -

Dimensions

10705146 (00000819) 10705147 (00000956)

How to Order
Specify part number. Example: 10705146 (00000819)

Pyrometer Accessories (order separately)

10705146 = Dual 00000817 14 ft. (4.27 m) Wire Lead Assembly.
10705147 = Single. 00000818 Thermocouple, grounded, Type K, 3/8 NPT.*
00003488 Thermocouple, ungrounded, Type K, 3/8 NPT.*
* 1/8 NPT, 1/4 NPT and 1/2 NPT adaptors available.

Accessories
Thermocouples 00000818 and 00003488 can mount in the engine mani-
fold or in 2 to 3-1/2 in. (51 to 89 mm) diameter exhaust ports. In turbo- Wire Lead Assembly 00000817 is a 14 ft.
charged engines, a thermocouple mounts between the engine and the (4.27 m) extension with mating plug connec-
turbo. Thermocouple 00000818 is a grounded, type K (Chromel Alumel). tions for the 00000818 and 00003488 ther-
Thermocouple 00003488 is ungrounded type K (Chromel Alumel). mocouples. The wire is PVC covered, non-
Thermocouple Specifications shielded, 18 AWG (1.0 mm2), with heat
Element “K”: type (NiCr/Ni) solid wire shrinkable sleeve provided for insulating ter-
minals after installation. Extension up to 100
Hot Junction: fusion welded.. ft. (30.48 m) can be made with 18 AWG (1.0
Protecting Tube: inconel for no mm2) or larger copper wire at the gage head.
carbon absorption, end
closed by heliarc melt
down.
Wire Insulation: Q-glass with
stainless steel overbraid.
Adaptors:
• 3/8 NPT (00003578) stan-
dard
• 1/8 NPT (00003577)
• 1/4 NPT (00003450)
• 1/2 NPT (00003579)
 7543
- 45 - Revised 12-03-10
Section 10

Direct-Mount Temperature Swichgage® Instrument SDB Series

Features
• Easy to Read Dial
• Bi-Metallic Sensor
• Two Ranges:
100 to 500°F (40 to 260°C)
200 to 1000°F (100 to 500°C)
• Dials Scaled in Degrees
Fahrenheit/Celsius
• CSA Listed Explosion-proof
Model Available
*

* Products covered by this bulletin comply with EMC Council directive 89/336/EEC regarding electromagnetic compatibility except as noted.

The SDB Series are direct-mounting temperature Swichgage devices. They provide an accurate direct-reading gauge with an adjustable
limit switch to activate alarms and/or shutdown. A knob on front of the Swichgage instrument allows you to adjust the limit switch trip
point. Pointer movement is actuated by a bi-metallic sensing element.
Models SDB500, SDB501 and SDB500EX have a temperature range of 100 to 500°F (40 to 260°C). SDB500EX enclosure is explosion-
proof and CSA listed for Class I, Group C and D hazardous locations.
The SDB1000 has a temperature range of 200 to 1000°F (100 to 500°C).
Basic Operation
SDB500, SDB501 and SDB1000: When the indicating pointer on the SDB touches the adjustable contact, a one-wire-to-ground circuit is
completed to shut down the equipment and/or actuate audible or visual alarms. Proper relays or Tattletale® annunciators (magnetic
switches) must be incorporated into the system.
SDB500EX: When the temperature rises to the preset trip point, the pointer engages an internal SPDT snap-switch to close/open cir-
cuits.
Applications
The most common use of the SDB Series is to monitor gas compressor temperatures. Engine exhaust temperature can also be moni-
tored to indicate overloading or lean fuel mixtures; or use the SDB to help coordinate loads on twin-engine installations.
Specifications
Temperature Ranges: Case Material: SDB501: Die-cast aluminum.
SDB500, SDB500EX, and SDB501: 100 to 500°F (40 to SDB500, SDB1000, SDB500EX: Sand-cast aluminum.
260°C). Swichgage Accuracy: ± 3% of full scale.
SDB1000: 200 to 1000°F (100 to 500°C). NOTE: All models are calibrated for use with a thermowell. Spec-
Sensing Bulb Material and Size: 304 stainless steel; 1/2 in. dia. ify when a thermowell is NOT to be used, (see How to Order on
x 4 in. (13 x 102 mm) insertion depth. back page).
Maximum Bulb Pressure: 285 psi (1.97 MPa) [19.7 bar] at 625°F Wire: 18 AWG (1.0 mm2). See Dimensions for lengths, reverse
(329°C). side.
NOTE: use of a thermowell is recommended. Dial: Black print on stainless steel. Dials are scaled in degrees
Process Connection: 1/2 NPTF. 3/4 NPT adapter available. Fahrenheit and Celsius.
Sensing Element: High torque bi-metal element in heliarc welded Shipping Weight:
stainless steel bulb. SDB501: 1 lb. 4 oz. (0.57 kg).
Contact Rating: SDB500 and SDB1000: 2 lb. (1.0 kg).
SDB500, SDB501 and SDB1000: 2 A @ 30 VAC SDB500EX: 2 lb. 5 oz. (1.05 kg).
SDB500EX: 2 A @ 120 VAC Shipping Dimensions:
Limit Contact Adjustment: By knob through full range. SDB501: 8-1/4 x 4-1/4 x 4-1/2 in. (210 x 108 x 114 mm).
Maximum Unit Temperature: SDB500 and SDB1000: 8-1/4 x 4-1/4 x 4-1/2 in. (210 x 108 x
SDB500, SDB500EX, SDB501: 625°F(329°C). 114 mm).
SDB1000: 1250°F (677°C). SDB500EX: 9 x 5-1/2 x 6 in. (229 x 140 x 152 mm).
 - 46 -

Dimensions
SDB500, SDB500EX, and SDB1000

SDB501

Wiring Diagrams
SDB500, SDB501, and SDB1000 SDB500EX
 - 47 -

How to Order
To order the SDB use the model number diagram below. Model number example: SDB500EX-3.
____ ñ ____ ñ ____
Base model
SDB500
SDB500EX
SDB501 Thermowell
Blank = Calibrated with thermowell
SDB1000
1 = Calibrate without thermowell
2 = 1/2 NPT thermowell
3 = 3/4 NPT thermowell
Dial
Blank = Fahrenheit/Celsius

Optional Thermowells
Murphy offers thermowells (separable sockets) to facilitate maintenance of a temperature Swichgage instrument and to
protect the temperature sensing bulb from extreme amounts of system pressure. For system pressures exceeding 285 psi
(1.97 MPa) [19.7 bar] at 625°F (329°C) an optional thermowell is recommended for use with the SDB series. The thermow-
ell protects the SDB bulb from system pressures up to 3000 psi (20.68 MPa) [206.8 bar] at 300°F (149°C). Two thermowell
options are available: 1/2 NPT and 3/4 NPT. Thermowells can be ordered with the SDB Series Swichgage instrument or
ordered separately. See “How to Order” on back page.
To order thermowell separately:
Specify part number 10050025 for 1/2 NPT.
Specify part number 10050311 for 3/4 NPT.
 - 48 -

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

 94117
- 49 - Revised 07-27-10
Section 10

4.5 in. (114 mm) Dial Temperature Swichgage® SPL and 45TE Series
Features
• Combination Indicating Gage and
Critical Temperature Limit
Switches
• High and Low Temperature Limit
Contacts Are Visible and Adjust-
able
• SPDT Snap-Acting Models
• Panel and Wall Mount Versions
• Latching Control Relay Versions
Available
* †

* Products covered by this bulletin comply with EMC Council directive 89/336/EEC regarding electromagnetic compatibility except as noted.
† Selected configurations are third party listed. Call Murphy for details.

The 4-1/2 in. (114 mm) dial size Swichgage® is a mechanical gage for temperature indication. It includes adjustable, electrical contacts that can be used
for start and stop, to trip alarms and to shut down equipment.
Ranges are available from 15° to 250°F (9° to 121°C) thru 260° to 450°F (127° to 232°C).
Basic Operation
This vapor actuated gage features a sealed capillary tube and sensing bulb. When subjected to heat, the liquid in the sensing bulb expands to vapor cre-
ating pressure against a bourdon tube mechanism. The bourdon tube translates this vapor pressure into a mechanical gage reading.
For models SPLC and SPLFC, the gage pointer acts as a pressure indicator and as one switch pole which completes a circuit when it touches the adjust-
able limit contacts. Contacts have self-cleaning motion to ensure electrical continuity. A toggle switch is provided on SPLC models to override the low con-
tact for equipment start-up.
Models 45TE and 45TEF have internal snap-acting SPDT switches.
Applications
Typical applications include:
• Gas Compressors • Heaters and Coolers
• Engine Coolant Temperature • Water Pump Temperature
• Process Temperature
Specifications
Dial: White on black, dual scale, °F and °C standard, 4-1/2 in. (114 mm) diameter. Snap-Acting Switches (45TE and 45TEF): 2-SPDT; 2 A @ 250 VAC.
Case: Die cast aluminum, surface or panel mount. Dry Relay Contact (“BP” Models): 10 A @ 28 VDC or 10 A @ 120 VAC.
Capillary: PVC armored copper tube, 5 ft. long (1.5 m.) standard–see options next Wire Connections: Surface mount models: 1/2 NPT conduit and terminal block.
page. Panel mount models: Wire leads, 18 AWG (1.0 mm2) x 9 in. (229 mm) long.
Sensing Bulb: Copper bulb: 1/2 in. (13 mm) OD; Length: 7 in. (178 mm). “OS” models: 1/2 NPT conduit and wire leads, 18 AWG (1.0 mm2) x 9 in. (229
Minimum bulb insertion– see corresponding chart, on page 2. mm) long.
Pressure Rating: 600 psi (4.1 MPa) [41 bar]. Connection: 1/2 NPT compression Item Weight: 8 lb. (3.6 kg) approximately. Explosion-proof models: 22 lb. (10 kg)
fitting. approx.
Overrange: Do not exceed 10% above full range. Item Dimensions: 16 x 11 x 5-1/2 in. (406 x 279 x 140 mm).
Limit Contacts (SPLC and SPLFC): 1-SPDT, Center off; pilot-duty; 2 A @ 30 V; 1 A Explosion-proof models: 12 x 12 x 9 in. (305 x 305 x 229 mm).
@ 125 VAC. Contacts are gold plated silver.

Basic Models
SPLC Series Swichgage® 45TE Series Snap-Acting Swichgage®
Surface mount version of the Swichgage®. For these models the gage Surface mount version of the Swichgage®. These models offer internal
pointer makes with two adjustable contacts to complete a pilot duty circuit. snap-acting SPDT switches, instead of the single pole contacts.
SPLFC Series Swichgage® 45TEF Series Swichgage®
Panel-mounting (round case) version of the SPLC. This is the panel mounting (round case) version of the 45TE series.
SPLBP Latching Control Relay Swichgage® 45TEBP Snap-Acting and Latching Control Relay Swichgage®
This version of the SPLC Series is designed to start and to stop electric Same as 45TE–includes an internal latching control relay for automatic
motor driven equipment. The pilot duty contacts of the SPLBP are con- ON/OFF control either directly or through a motor starter.
nected to a latching control relay for automatic ON/ OFF control, either Murphy offers square case configurations altered to fit round panel
directly or through a motor starter. openings, see “Dimensions”, next page.
 - 50 -

Dimensions
Surface Mount Models Panel Mount Models

Ranges and Accuracy — Sensing Bulb Insertion

Temperature Ranges Available (dual scale dials) Accuracy (SPL and 45 Series Models) Minimum Sensing Bulb
Fahrenheit Celsius Lower 1/4 Middle 1/2 Upper 1/4 Insertion into Process
15° to 250°F 9° to 121°C ±8°F/±4°C ±2°F/±1°C ±2°F/±1°C 5 in. (127 mm)
130° to 350°F 60° to 180°C ±8°F/±4°C ±2°F/±1°C ±3°F/±1.5°C 2-1/2 in. (64 mm)
260° to 450°F 127° to 232°C ±8°F/±4°C ±2°F/±1°C ±3°F/±1.5°C 2-1/2 in. (64 mm)

Using a Thermowell Start-Up Lockout

Installing a thermowell is The SPLC Swichgage® low limit contact can be bypassed for equip-
recommended for high ment start up. A toggle switch is provided for this purpose. The toggle
pressure applications or switch must be manually reset when temperature rises above the low
corrosive environments. limit.
It also allows sensing
bulbs to be changed or
adjusted without open-
ing the connection to
process. Murphy offer
thermowells for a vari-
ety of applications. For
details see Murphy bul-
letin T-9003B.
 - 51 -

How the SPL Works How the 45TE Works

SPLC and SPLFC Swichgage® temperature indicator gages include 2 The 45TE series Swichgage® incorporates 2 SPDT snap-switches
pilot duty, pointer-type limit contacts (one for high and one for low) that instead of the pointer-type contacts of the SPL. Unlike the SPL that com-
can be used for alarm and/or shutdown. The SPLC and SPLFC models pletes an electrical circuit as soon as the pointer touches the contact,
will complete a circuit when the gage pointer and either limit contact the 45TE trip point indicators will stop the pointer movement slightly
meet. This provides an electrical signal to alert the operator of critical before the switches operate. As temperature continues to increase
temperature conditions or, when required, to shut-down the equipment. (reaching high set point) or to decrease (reaching low set point), the
Both limit contacts (high and low) are field adjustable by simply turning electrical circuit is then made. It provides the ability to set the trip point
the fingertip type knob to the desired point on the scale dial. exactly with the indicator needle—no guessing or equipment calibration
is needed as on blind switches. The 45TE trip points (high and low) can
The graphic below shows details of a typical SPLFC Swichgage®
be easily set using its stacked knob adjustment. See the schematic
model.
below for details.

(BP) Latch Relay Contact Models

Primarily designed to maintain a specific temperature range by turning ON or OFF heaters or coolers having 125 VAC circuitry, the SPLBP and 45TEBP
Swichgage® models are applicable to a variety of situations where temperatures are variable and controlling factors. As the pointer touches a preset high
or low limit contact/snap-switch, the magnetic latching relay sets or resets to latch a heater or cooler ON or OFF. The relay unlatches, (resets) when the
opposite contact operates. Pictured below is a typical application. For applications with higher voltages, a Murphy TR assembly can be used in con-
junction with any 4-1/2 in. (114 mm) dial Swichgage®.
 - 52 -

How to Order
Specify model number. NOTE: No designator is required for Standard configurations.
Also, list options in alphabetical order (A to Z). Place a dash (–) between each option. See example below.
 8911
- 53 - Revised 08-25-10
Section 10

Dual Temperature Swichgage® Model Series MDTM89

Features
• Monitor inputs from two thermocouples
• Adjustable switch trip point for each input
• FET or SCR output
• Power from CD ignition or 120 VAC or 12/24
VDC
• Types “J” or “K” ungrounded thermocouples
• Digital readings in Fahrenheit or Celsius

Approved* Approved†
* When used with approved ignition or 12-24 VDC. Contact Murphy for details.
† Approved for CD ignition, 80–250 VDC.

Murphy's model MDTM89 is an electronic, dual-temperature monitor. It monitors two thermocouples, displays the temperature of the thermocouple
selected, and has adjustable trip points for each input. A toggle switch provides for selection of the thermocouple to be displayed and/or the temperature
trip point to be checked/adjusted. If either trip point is reached, the associated output “turns on” and can be used as a control signal, or to initiate alarms
and/or shutdown.
A “Push to Read” button, located below the selector switch, allows the operator to check the trip point and to see its value as adjustments are made.
Two potentiometers, one on each side of the thermocouple selector switch, are provided for field-adjustment of the trip points.
There are four basic models. Two of the models are powered by capacitor discharge ignition, and have either an FET or an SCR output. One model
operates from 12 or 24 VDC and has an FET output. One model operates from 120 VAC by use of an isolation module and has an FET output. Standard
display is in degrees Fahrenheit; degrees Celsius is optional.
Applications
Applications include the following:
• Compressor suction/discharge temperature • Compressor cylinder temperature
• Engine/compressor jacket water temperature • After cooler temperature
• Engine exhaust temperature • Bearing temperature

Thermocouple Type
Either “J” or “K” type UNGROUNDED THERMOCOUPLE is accepted. Specify type in part number for each MDTM89 unit (see How to Order information
on back page).
Order thermocouples as a separate item.
Automatic Cold Junction Reference
Cold junction reference point compensation is an integral feature of the monitor. The compensator circuit monitors case temperature and automatically
compensates for changes in ambient temperatures. Compensation will allow maximum of 2 degrees change in the temperature reading from 32 to 122°F
(0 to 50°C).
Open Thermocouple Input
An open thermocouple input forces the monitor into upscale overrange. The monitor indicates an overrange by displaying the numeral 1 (one) in the left
most digit of the display. An overrange will turn on the high trip point output.
Trip Point Operation
Monitored trip points are independent of the thermocouple selector switch. Both set points are always active.
When the thermocouple temperature reaches the trip point temperature, the MDTM89 is triggered. After approximately 0.5 seconds the trip point output
“turns on”.
Trip points are set by depressing the “Push to Read” push button while rotating a trip point potentiometer until the desired trip point temperature is dis-
played.
Continuous & Trip Point Display
The selector switch is used to select the thermocouple or trip point temperature to be displayed. The selected temperature is continuously displayed dur-
ing normal operation. Depressing the “Push to Read” push button displays the trip point temperature of the selected thermocouple.
 - 54 -

Specifications
Power Requirements (Operating Voltages): Ambient Cold Junction Compensation Range: 32 to 122°F (1°C from 0 to 50°C).
MDTM89-A: 100 to 350* VDC, CD ignition, negative ground (FET outputs). Operating Temperature: -4 to 158°F (-20 to 70°C).
MDTM89-E: 100 to 350*, CD ignition, negative ground (FET outputs). Storage Temperature: -40 to 300°F (-40 to 150°C).
MDTM89-B: 100 to 350* VDC, CD ignition, negative or positive ground Case: Die cast aluminum.
(SCR outputs). Reset Differential: FET models: Decreases 3 Degrees (°F or °C).
SCR model: turn input power off to reset.
MDTM89-C: 12 to 24† VDC, negative ground, 15 milliwatts (FET outputs).
Measurement Range: Monitor Range 0-1999°F or °C (specify “F” or “C” in part num-
MDTM89-D: 120 VAC (MDTM89-C with 120 V isolation module #IT-1) ber).
(FET outputs.) Model NOT approved by CSA or Factory Mutual.
Accuracy: With J-type thermocouple: from 150-1200°F (66-649°C) ±1.5% of read-
Power Consumption: CD ignition: 350 μa @ 100V; 120 VAC: 0.6 watts; 24 VDC: ing. With K-type thermocouple: from 400-2000°F (204-1076°C) ±1.5% of read-
0.5 watts. ing. At calibration temperature.
Outputs: Model B: output turns on above trip point; output turns off when power is Laboratory Approvals: CSA† and Factory Mutual* approved for Class I, Division 2,
switched off; two (2) isolated SCR outputs, 0.5 amp @ 250 VDC. Group D, hazardous locations).
Models A, C and D: output turns on above trip point; output turns off below trip
point; two (2) isolated FET outputs, 0.5 amp @ 250 VDC. Thermocouple Lead Length: 150 ohm lead resistance affects monitor accuracy
less
Model E: output one turns on above trip point, output turns off below trip point: than 1°.
output 2 turns on below trip point, output turns off above trip point: two (2) iso-
loated FET outputs, 0.5 amp @ 250 VDC. Trip Point Accuracy: ±3°F (±2°C) of reading.
Trip Point Adjustment Range: 0-1999 Degrees.
* Approved for CD ignition, 80–250 VDC. Shipping Weight: 48 ozs (1.4 kg).
† When used with approved ignitions or 12-24 VDC. Contact Murphy for Shipping Dimensions: 10 x 9-1/2 x 6 in. (254 x 241 x 152 mm)
details.

Dimensions How to Order

 9106
- 55 - Revised 12-11
Section 10

Temperature Scanner/Pyrometer Swichgage® – Model TDX6

Features
• Scans 6 Channels
Approved*
• Rated for Class I, Division 2, Group D Haz-
ardous Areas
• Start-up Time Delay
• Easy to Read Digital Display
• Accepts Type “J” or “K” Thermocouples
Grounded‡ or Ungrounded
• Field Adjustable Trip Points
• LCD Display in Either °F or °C (Specify)
• One Thermocouple Maybe Selected for
Continuous Display
• CD Ignition, 24 VDC, or 120 VAC Powered
• No Special Training or Programming
Required
Approved† • Scans All 6 Sensors in 30 Seconds
* When used with approved ignition. Contact Murphy for details.
† When used with power requirements described below.
‡ Using grounded thermocouples introduces the risk of odd currents or voltages being imposed on the thermocouple signal which can affect the accuracy of the
reading. This is an inherent problem of grounded thermocouples, the reason why we prefer ungrounded thermocouples.

Description
The TDX6 is an advanced design 6-point temperature scanner and pyrometer. It continually scans up to six thermo-
couples and sequentially displays the thermocouple number and its reading. Each sensor input has a field settable trip
point for alarm, shutdown or control. A read/scan selector allows the operator to set and view each trip point. With the
selector in the scan mode, a “thermocouple read” push button provides a means to manually toggle through the six
channels and to lock in on a specific channel. Normal scanning will resume approximately three seconds after releas-
ing the push button. All trip points are continually armed and active during the scanning process.
Type “J” or “K”, groundedá or ungrounded thermocouples are accommodated. Other types are available upon request.
The TDX6 can interface with other Murphy SELECTRONIC® TATTLETALE® annunciators and Micro-controllers. It is
rated for Class I, Division 2, Group D, hazardous areas* and is available for operation from CD ignition, 120 VAC, or
24 VDC.
Applications
• Gas Compressor Suction/Discharge Temp. • Generators
• Engine/Compressor Jacket Water Temperature • Pumps
• Process Temperatures • Engine Exhaust Temperature
Specifications
Power Requirements (Operating Voltages): 120 VAC or 80-250 VDC, CD ignition Start-up Time Delay: Unit is locked out for 10 seconds after ignition voltage is
or 24 VDC. sensed.
Outputs: Ambient Cold Junction Compensation Range: 2°F from 32°F to 122°F (1°C from
Models TDX6-A and TDX6-C: Six (6) isolated Silicon Controlled Rectifier 0°C to 50°C).
(S.C.R.) outputs; 0.5 A @ 250 VDC; switches on (applies ground) above Measurement Range: Monitor Range 0-1999°F or °C (specify °F or °C in part num-
trip point and switches off (removes ground) when power is switched off. ber).
Models TDX6-B and TDX6-D: Six (6) isolated Field-Effect Transistor (F.E.T.) Accuracy:
outputs; 0.1 A @ 250 VDC; switches on (applies ground) above trip point With J-type thermocouple: from 50-150°F (10-66°C) +3°F(+2°C), from 150-
and switches off (removes ground) below trip point. 1200°F (66-649°C) ±1.0% of reading.
Operating Temperature: -4 to 158°F (-20 to 70°C). With K-type thermocouple: from 400-2000°F (204-1076°C) ±1.0% of reading.
Storage Temperature: -40 to 300°F (-40 to 150°C). Trip Point Accuracy: ±3°F (±2°C) of reading.
Case: ABS 1/4 DIN (90 x 90 mm). Trip Point Adjustment Range: 0-1999 Degrees.
Scanning Speed: Complete scan in 30 seconds. Open Thermocouple Input: A number 1 appears in the display to the right of the
Reset Differential: F.E.T. models: Decreases 3 Degrees (°F or °C). S.C.R. models: channel number and the trip point operates.
Turn input power off to reset. Shipping Weight: 2 lb. (0.91 kg).
Display Update Time: Updates temperature every 0.3 seconds. Shipping Dimensions: 5-1/2 x 9 x 6 in. (140 x 229 x 152 mm).
 - 56 -

Dimensions Typical Wiring Diagram

TDX6 Interface Capabilities How to Order

Model Power Source Rating To order the TDX6 use the part number designation diagram below.
LCDT CD Ign., 120 VAC, 12/24 VDC Cl.I, Div.1, Gr.D, Haz. areas *

S1501 120 VAC or 12/24 VDC Cl.I, Div.1, Gr.D, Haz. areas*
TTD CD Ignition ( neg. grnd), Cl.I, Div.2, Gr.D, Haz. areas†
12/24 VDC
TATTLETALE® CD Ign., 120 VAC, 12/24 VDC Non-Hazardous areas

* Note: An isolation barrier is needed between the TDX6 and an Annunciator rated
for Class I, Division 1, Group D, Hazardous Areas.
† Note: When used with approved ignition. Contact Murphy for details.
PLC’s, various non-Murphy annunciators–contact factory.
 00064
- 57 - Revised 06-06
Section 10

Temperature Scanner/Pyrometer – TDXM Model

Features
• Scans Up To 24 Channels
• Three (3) Adjustable Trip Points Per Channel
• Accepts Any Combination of “J” or “K” Type
Grounded or Ungrounded Thermocouples
• 2 Separate Groups with Deviation Trip Functions
Selectable
• Powered By 10 to 32 VDC Systems
• RS485 Serial Communications Port
• Uses MConfig™ Configuration and Monitoring
Software
• CSA Certified for Use in Class I, Division 2, Groups
“B, C & D” Hazardous Locations

The innovative new TDXM now gives you a unique configurable temperature scanner/pyrometer with a built-in power supply. A new design features a 7-
character, 7-segment Liquid Crystal Display window with 1/2 inch (13 mm), easy-to-read characters. Also located on the faceplate are membrane keys for
easy configuring.
Highly reliable and versatile, the TDXM accepts up to 24 type “J” or “K” grounded or ungrounded* thermocouples. Each channel has three (3) adjustable
setpoints SP1, SP2 and SP3. The SP1, SP2 and SP3 Setpoints correspond to the SP1, SP2 and SP3 outputs. Additionally it has the selectable feature to
monitor and alarm or shutdown on deviation from an average from up to two groups of temperatures (GRP/DEV; deviation from average). One group
could be exhaust temperatures and another group could be bearing temperatures.
The TDXM is capable of communicating with controllers, PLC’s, computers or SCADA (Supervisory Control & Data Acquisition) systems by a built-in
RS485 serial communications port.
The TDXM-DC is available for 10 - 32 VDC systems.
User Interface (Faceplate)
The User Interface includes a numeric LCD display and a 5-button membrane keypad for readout and channel configuration. Thermocouple types can be
selected and setpoints entered through a series of setup menus, see “Setup Menus” section.
Thermocouple Types
Each of the 24 channels on the TDXM can be configured as either “J” or “K” type thermocouples and temperature units can be selected as °F or °C read-
out for each channel. Unused channels can be set to “Ignore” and will not be seen in the display and will not cause fault trips.
Control Options
Each TDXM model features three outputs: 2 Field Effect Transistor (FET) outputs and 1 Form-C Relay output. Each channel has 3 setpoints, one for each
of the outputs. This allows for greater system flexibility by grouping sets of channels through one output.
Setpoint History
The TDXM stores the last setpoint trip for each output in non-volatile memory. For instance, if SP1of channel 1 was the last SP1 tripped, the LCD display
will read: SP1 1 when the Setpoint History is accessed for SP1.
Sensor Inputs and Terminals
The TDXM accepts up to 24, either “J” or “K” type grounded or ungrounded* thermocouples using 24 pairs of screw type connections. Each pair has a
jumper from the factory. Any tripped setpoint is detected within 2 seconds after the set point is exceeded.
RS485 Serial Port
The RS485 serial port (MODBUS®† RTU slave) on the back of the module is provided for communicating with micro-controllers, PC’s, PLC’s and SCADA
systems (see “Typical Wiring Diagrams”). It is recommended that a termination resistor (customer supplied) be used when the TDXM is the last device
connected in a daisy-chain configuration. The Baud rate, number of stop bits, and slave node number can be set using the keypad. Communication is
half-duplex. Modbus® RTU function codes 3 and 6 are supported.

* We recommend the use of ungrounded thermocouples. Errors in readings with grounded thermocouples can be the result of differences in grounding between different
devices.
† MODBUS® is a registered trademark of AEG Schneider Automation Inc.
 - 58 -

TDXM Module Dimensions

For Outdoor Use, the TDXM should be mounted in a weatherproof enclosure

Specifications
Power Input (Operating Voltages): 10- 32VDC, 750 mW max. Operating, Storage, and Display Temperature: -40 to 85°C (-40 to 185F).
Sensor Inputs: Up to 24 type “J” or “K” grounded or ungrounded‡ thermocouples. Sensor Scan Rate: Scans all channels in 2 seconds.
Outputs: Two (2) Outputs 0.5 A, 350 VDC, FET-sink to ground to trip. One (1) Form Range: Type K: 0 - 1999°F (0 - 1093°C); Type J: 0 - 1538°F (0 - 837°C).
“C” Solid State Relay Output 0.125 A, 350 VDC/240 VAC. Display Type: Custom 7-segment, 7-character, backlit type with temperature units
indication and setpoint trip indication.
NOTE: The form “C” relay output is de-energized for a trip con- Accuracy: Cold junction: Better than ±0.5°C (1.0°F). Type “J” or “K”: ±1°C (2°F); 38 -
dition. The NC terminal is closed and the NO terminal is 1093°C (100 - 1999°F).
open for trip. Cold Junction Compensation: -40 to 85°C (-40 to 185F).
Open Thermocouple Detection: Drives channel reading high.
Communications: RS485 Serial Port, MODBUS® RTU slave. Shipping Weight (all Models): 3 lb. (1.36 kg) approximately.
Shipping Dimensions (all Models): 5-1/2 x 9 x 9-1/2 in. (140 x 229 x 241 mm)
‡ We recommend the use of ungrounded thermocouples. Errors in readings with grounded approximately.
thermocouples can be the result of differences in grounding between different devices

How to Order Your TDXM

Specify the following part number Configuration Software
Head/Module MConfig: TDXM configuration software available.
TDXM-DC: 24-channel model, 10-32 VDC powered. Replacement Parts
TDXM-DC W/SP3 Latch: Same as TDXM-DC but with SP3 latch feature. Plug, kit, TDXM: Terminal Plug replacement kit-P/N 10-00-7848.
 96084
- 59 - Revised 07-04
Section 10

Thermocouple, RTD, and RTD Transmitter

Assemblies With Thermowell – TC, RTD, and RTDT Series
Features
• 304 Stainless Steel Thermowell Protection
• Compatible with Digital Swichgage®
• Types “J” or “K” Ungrounded Thermocouples
• 100 Ohm, 3-Wire RTD Assemblies
• 4-20 mA DC Output RTD Transmitters

Description
Murphy offers a variety of highly reliable thermocouple and RTD (Resistance Temperature Detector) assemblies and 4-20 mA DC output RTD transmit-
ters.
Their innovative features include a 304 stainless steel thermowell that provides protection to the spring loaded element.
The cast aluminum connecting head meets NEMA 4 requirements and includes an RTD transmitter or a thermocouple/ RTD terminal block mounted on
ceramic Steatite and rated NEC Class 2.
The complete assemblies are offered in 2-1/2, 4-1/2, or 7-1/2 in. (63, 114, or 191 mm) thermowell insertion lengths.
Loop Resistance Graph
Supply voltage for RTDT must be within 13-40 VDC. The figure on right shows the minimum supply
voltage (VDC) required for a given load resistance (RL).
Thermocouple Assemblies with Thermowell
Available in types J or K, the thermocouple assemblies have ungrounded elements in a 304 stain-
less steel spring loaded sheath. For product compatibility see back page (replacement parts and
thermocouple extension wire are available).
RTD Assemblies with Thermowell
Resistance temperature detector (RTD) assemblies are available with a 100 ohm platinum ele-
ment, 3- wire leads, and spring loaded 316L stainless steel element sheath.
RTD Transmitter Assemblies with Thermowell
RTDT assemblies transmit process variable temperatures. Available as part of the temperature
sensor assemblies or as a separate units, the RTDT’s accept 2 or 3 wire, 100 ohm RTD’s. The RTD
transmitters are loop powered, they feature linearized 4-20 mA DC outputs and have reversed
polarity protection.
Applications
Murphy’s temperature sensing assemblies fit in a variety of industrial processes and applications. Their ruggedness and characteristics make these
assemblies a popular and price-competitive choice.
Specifications
Thermowell: 304 stainless steel; 7000 psi (48.2 MPa) [482 bar] max. @ 70°F. 4-1/2 in. (114 mm) model: 2 lb. 8oz. (1.24 kg).
Connecting Head: Cast Aluminum; 400°F (204°C) maximum operating tempera- 7-1/2 in. (191 mm) model: 3 lb. 6oz. (1.67 kg).
ture. Shipping Dimensions (listed by insertion length):
Thermocouple: Ungrounded, Magnesium Oxide (MgO) insulated 96% purity; ele- 2-1/2 and 4-1/2 in (63 and 114 mm) models: 12 x 7 x 5-1/2 in. (305 x 178 x 140
ment sheath of 304 stainless steel. mm).
Type “J” operating temp.: 900°F (482°C) max. 7-1/2 in. (191 mm) models: 16 x 11 x 5-1/2 in. (406 x 280 x 144 mm).
Type “K” operating temp.: 1800°F (982°C) max. Optional Thermocouple Extension Wire: (Sold separately–see How to Order sec-
RTD: 100 ohm @ 0°C Platinum element; 3-wire; 400 °F maximum; 0.00385 temper- tion)
ature coefficient; 316L stainless steel element sheath. Individual Conductor Insulation: Extruded PFA.
RTD Transmitter: 100 ohms Platinum RTD; 400 °F maximum; Ranges: 0 to 400°F Duplex Conductor Insulation: Twisted; Extruded PFA Overall.
and -60 to 140°F. Linearized 4-20 mA DC output. Loop powered typically 24 Temperature Rating: Continuous -450 to 500°F (-267 to 260°C).
VDC, when using the Loop Resistance Graph, 13-40 VDC. For use with 100 Abrasion Resistance: Good.
ohms Platinum RTD elements, 0.00385 temperature coefficient. Moisture Resistance: Excellent.
Thermocouple Accuracy (J/K): 0.5%. Shielding: Metallic Shield.
RTD Accuracy: ±0.12%. Gauge: 20 AWG (0.5 mm2).
RTD Transmitter Accuracy: ±0.1%. Ohms per Double Foot Type “J”: 0.357
Terminal block: Ceramic Steatite; thermocouples have: 4 terminals; RTD’s: 6 termi- Ohms per Double Foot Type “K”: 0.586
nals. 28 to 14 AWG wire size, (8-32 SS screws).
Shipping Weights (listed by insertion length):
2-1/2 in. (63 mm) model: 2 lb. (0.907 kg).
 - 60 -

Dimensions

How to Order
To order just specify the model number needed (see chart below). Order replacement parts and thermocouple extension wire separately.
 0610107
- 61 - Revised 01-25-10
Section 10

Thermocouple, 1/4″ Diameter Stainless Steel Tube Type

Features
• ¼″ diameter 316 stainless steel tubing
sheath
• Type K, 6" and 10" probes
• Can be used with 2", 4.5" and 7.5" inser-
tion thermowells
• Can be bent anywhere along its length to a
90° angle
• Tip sensitive to minimize temperature influ-
ence from surrounding environment
Due to the increase in controller and telemetry applications, this
thermocouple product line has been added to the line up of Murphy
temperature monitoring end devices. They are designed to fit as
many applications as possible with the fewest possible parts and the
fewest possible installation caused faults.

Most of the thermocouple failures occur in how the thermocouples

extension wire is installed and connected. This new line incorporates
Type K, 20 AWG stranded extension wire encased in a rugged cable
to meet demanding environments The extension wire lengths are
available in 5′, 15′, 30′, 50′, and 100′ lengths. This will enable a run
from the point of measurement to the nearest conduit entry or to be
installed in a cable tray. The industry standard yellow Teflon allows
easy identification of K type thermocouple wires so they can be sep-
arated from high voltage wires following good installation practices.

Thermowells are available in 2″, 4-1/2″, or 7-1/2″ lengths for insertion depth
and have a ½″ NPT process connection. They are supplied with a standard
stainless steel compression fitting for securing the thermocouple in the ther-
mowell at the appropriate depth. In low pressure applications the thermocou-
ple can be inserted directly into the process through a standard ¼″ SS tubing
compression fitting.
 - 62 -

Product Overview
The thermocouples are encased in a ¼″ diameter 316 stainless steel tubing sheath with stainless steel Bell Spring for strain
relief. The initial offerings are K type thermocouples with 6″ and 10” long ¼″ diameter probes. The thermocouples are
shipped straight, but can be bent with standard tubing benders anywhere along its length to a 90° angle to minimize clear-
ance required and help prevent damage due to personnel working on the unit. The thermocouple is tip sensitive to mini-
mize ambient temperature influence and should be inserted between 25% and 75% of the piping inside diameter or enough
to minimize any skin temperature affect on the tip of the probe when installed in vessels.
Additional features
• Stainless steel transition sealing gland with a stainless steel Bell Spring for strain relief.
• Standard bore through stainless steel compression fitting for securing the thermocouple in the thermowell at the appropri-
ate depth.
• Can be inserted directly into a low-pressure application process through a standard ¼″ SS bore through tubing compres-
sion fitting.
• Enables a run from the point of measurement to the nearest conduit entry, junction box, or all the way to the panel hous-
ing the readout and monitoring instrument. Can also be installed in a cable tray.
• The thermowelll assembly comes with a stainless steel bore through compression fitting and ferrel saving installation
time and money.
How to Order
Item Number Product Name Description

10051331 Thermocouple, Type K, 1/4Dia. Tube x 6″L w/5′ Thermocouple Extension Wire
10051325 Thermocouple, Type K, 1/4Dia. Tube x 6″L w/15′ Thermocouple Extension Wire
10051326 Thermocouple, Type K, 1/4Dia. Tube x 6″L w/30′ Thermocouple Extension Wire
10051327 Thermocouple, Type K, 1/4Dia. Tube x 6″L w/50′ Thermocouple Extension Wire
10051328 Thermocouple, Type K, 1/4Dia. Tube x 6″L w/100′ Thermocouple Extension Wire
10051332 Thermocouple, Type K, 1/4Dia. Tube x 10″L w/5′ Thermocouple Extension Wire
10051323 Thermocouple, Type K, 1/4Dia. Tube x 10″L w/15′ Thermocouple Extension Wire
10051317 Thermocouple, Type K, 1/4Dia. Tube x 10″L w/30′ Thermocouple Extension Wire
10051322 Thermocouple, Type K, 1/4Dia. Tube x 10″L w/50′ Thermocouple Extension Wire
10051321 Thermocouple, Type K, 1/4Dia. Tube x 10″L w/100′ Thermocouple Extension Wire
10707436 Thermowell, ½″NPT, ¼″ T, 2.0″L Assembly 304SS
10707437 Thermowell, ½″NPT, ¼″ T, 4.5″L Assembly 304SS
10707438 Thermowell, ½″NPT, ¼″ T, 7.5″L Assembly 304SS
 0910430
- 63 - Revised 03-12-08
Section 10

Air Temperature Sensor - Model 12

Features
Applications for the probe include the
following:
• Monitor ambient temperature and
signal wind machines to start.
• Monitor and maintain cargo temper-
atures.
The Model 12 Air Temperature Sensor is intended for use in applications that monitor slowly changing temperature. The
unit gives approximately .5 °F (.25 °C) resolution when used with an 8-bit analog input.
Temperature Sensing Range
VDC Out °C °f
0.00 -18 0
0.25 -14.5 5.8
0.50 -11.4 11.5
0.75 -8.2 17.3
1.00 -5 23.0
1.25 -1.8 28.8
1.50 1.4 34.5
1.75 4.6 40.3
2.00 7.8 46.0
2.25 11 51.8
Specifications
2.50 14.2 57.5 Temperature Capability
2.75 17.4 63.3 Useful Operating Temperature Range: 0°F to 115°F (-18°C to 46°C)
Component Temperature Range: -85°F to 300°F (-65°C to 150°C)
3.00 20.6 69.0
Accuracy: 2% of full scale with software offset correction.
3.25 23.8 74.8 Voltage
3.50 27 80.5 Power Input Voltage: 9 to 28 VDC
Current Draw: 1mA
3.75 30.2 86.3
Cable: 2 foot length, 22 AWG, stranded
4.00 33.3 92.0 Clamp: 1/2” ID, provided (P/N 00-03-0392)
4.25 36.6 97.8

How to Order
Air Temperature sensor - Model 12 - P/N 10-70-7483
 - 64 -

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

 SECTION 15 FLUID LEVEL

Level Switch System - Bilge

95107 Bilge Level Switch System BLSK1 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Level Switches - Tank Level

94124 Hydrostatic Head Level Switches DF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Level SwichgageÆ Instruments - Coolant

00072 Level Swichgage® Instrument For Engine Liquids – L150/EL150K1 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Level Maintainers
1010627 Lube Level Maintainer – Model LM500/LM500-TF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
92149 Level Maintainer – LM300 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
00010 Lube Level Maintainer – Model LM2000/LM2000S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
96121 Oil Level Regulators for Lubricators – LR500 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
7225 Maintain Lube Level – Model LR857 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Level SwichgageÆ Instruments - Oil

0710176 Float Actuated Oil Level Swichgage® Instrument
for Small Engines and Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Level SwichgageÆ Instruments - Lube

6572 Lube Level Swichgage® Instrument – L129 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Level Switches - Crankcase

7229 Crankcase Level Switch – L971 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Level Switches - Scrubber

1010629 Liquid Level Switches - MLS Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
0600009 LS200 & L1100 Series Liquid Level Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Level Valves - Scrubber

01069 Dump Valves – DVU Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Level SwichgageÆ Instruments - Tank Level

94122 4-1/2 in. (114 mm) Dial Level Swichgage® Instrument – OPLH / OPLHACS Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

 95107
- 65 - Revised 10-03
Section 15

Bilge Level Switch System BLSK1 Series

Features
• Operates Bilge Pumps or Alarms
• Uses Proven “Air Cell” Actuated System
• Remote Switch and Moving Parts Kept Unaffected by
Corrosion
• Aluminum Body and Cover
• Includes 3 Assemblies:
(1) BLS1 Bilge Level Switch
(2) MACT1 Tube Kit (Sensor Line and Fittings)
(3) MAC1 “Air Cell” (Volume Cell)

The BLSK1 Bilge Level Switch System gives you all items and fittings necessary to install in your bilge. Or, you can have
only the parts you want and you provide brackets, tubing and mounting hardware.
Using the proven “Air Cell” actuating system, all moving parts and switching are remote from bilge liquids and are thus not
affected by corrosion, rust, etc. All wetted parts are of non-corrosive materials.
As bilge level rises a column of air is captured in the MAC1 Air Volume Cell. The rising bilge level compresses the column
of air creating pressure against the large diaphragm in the BLS1 Bilge Level Switch and the switch trips. Switch set point is
adjustable.
The switch resets as the bilge is pumped out. Air cell recharges itself during normal operation.
The BLS1 is constructed of materials not affected by marine atmospheres; Aluminum or Bronze body and cover, Buna-N
diaphragm.
Dimensions Typical Installation and Wiring
 - 66 -

Specifications
BLS1 Bilge Level Switch Snap-Switch SPDT (standard) 15050737 Optional mounting bracket
• 5 A @ 125, 250, or 480 VAC 16 ga., 304 stainless steel (see Dimensions).
• 1/2 A @ 125 VDC, 1/4 A @ 250 VDC MACT1 Tube Kit (fittings included)
NOTE: A pilot relay may be used for higher contact ratings (see Typical 4 ft. (1.21 m) flexible non-corrosive tubing, 1/4 in. (6 mm) dia.
Wiring Diagram). (cut to fit).
MACT1 Weight: 0.5 lb. (0.23 kg).
Case/Lid: Aluminum (std).
MACT1 Dimensions: 6 x 6 x 6 in. (152 x 152 x 152 mm).
Bottom Plate: Glass-filled Nylon.
MAC1 Air Cell (Volume Cell)
Process Connection: 1/4 NPTF.
Max. Pressure: 25 psi (172 kPa) [1.72 bar]. • Made of non-corrosive materials
Conduit Connection (electrical): 1/2 NPT. • (2) 1/4-20 stainless steel hex bolts and nuts.
BLS1 Weight: 3 lb. (1.4 kg). MAC1 Weight: 2 lb. (1 kg).
BLS1 Dimensions: 6-1/4 x 6-1/4 x 6-1/4 in. (159 x 159 x 159 MAC1 Dimensions: 6 x 6 x 6 in. (152 x 152 x 152 mm).
mm).

How to Order
To order use the model number designation diagram below.
____ – ____ – ____
Base model
BLS1 = Bilge level switch
BLSK1 = Bilge level switch kit:
BLS1 (Bilge Level Switch)
MACT1 (Tubing kit)
MAC1 (Air cell)
Switch
Blank = SPDT, 5A
Body (Lid and Case)
Blank = Aluminum

Accessories and Replacement Parts (order separately)

15050737: BLS1 mounting bracket.
15010205: 5 A snap-switch and movement assembly.
15000123: Diaphragm assembly.
15050823: Piston.
15050824: Knob for limit adjustment.
 94124
- 67 - Revised 10-03
Section 15

Hydrostatic Head Level Switches DF Series

Applications
• Salt Water Disposal Systems
• Cooling Towers
• Crude Oil Tanks
• Waterflood Systems
• Diesel Day Tanks
• Sumps
*

* CSA listing applies to DF755EX 20 in. (508 mm) or less water column differential, 5A @ 125, 250, or 480 VAC.
† Products covered by this bulletin comply with EMC Council directive 89/336/EEC regarding electromagnetic compatibility except as noted.

The DF series are diaphragm operated “hydrostatic head pressure” level switches. A pressure sensitive diaphragm oper-
ates a snap-switch that can be wired directly to electric pilot circuits to control pumps at predetermined levels. Typical appli-
cation is to start and stop electric driven pump(s) to maintain tank levels. It is also applicable to engine driven pumps.
The nitrile sensing diaphragm is impervious to most liquids and is sensitive enough to control levels with 1/4 in. (6 mm)
repeatability. See model descriptions for limits of switch trip point adjustability. Materials include aluminum body, nylon bot-
tom plate and a special alloy leaf snapswitch as standard.
This simple level switch is highly reliable and can be worked into almost any new or existing system without major modifica-
tion or special tools.
DF755 and DF757 are suitable for atmospheric tanks in a non-hazardous area. The SPDT snap-switch for the DF755 is
preset for a 4 in. (102 mm) differential in liquid level. The DF757 trip point is adjustable over a 108 in. (2743 mm) differen-
tial.
DF755EX is the same as the DF755 except CSA listed for Class I, Division 1, Groups C and D hazardous areas.
Dimensions

DF755 and DF757 DF755EX

 - 68 -

Applications
• Water Flood Systems • Diesel Day Tanks
• Crude Oil Tanks • Sumps
• Salt Water Disposal Systems • Cooling Towers

Typical Water Flood Control System

The diagram above displays eight DF Series switches installed on a Raw Water tank and a Clear Water tank. When raw
water rises to predetermined level, DF#1 stops the supply pump. As tank level falls below the predetermined level, DF#2
starts the supply pump. If the tank level continues to fall, DF#3 initiates shutdown of the supply pump. DF#4 stops transfer
pump before raw water tank is completely pumped out.
When clear water reaches the predetermined level, DF#5 stops the transfer pump. As tank level falls to predetermined low
level, DF#6 starts the transfer pump. If the tank level continues to fall due to the failure of the filters section, DF#7 initiates
shutdown of the transfer pump. (DF755 located at this level will also operate backwash equipment). DF#8 stops injection
pump before tank pumps completely out.
An OPL Series Pressure SWICHGAGE® stops injection pump when pressure reaches predetermined high or low pressure.

Tank with Low Pressure Gas Blanket Typical Tank Mounting Methods (DF755)
(DF755EX)
The DF level switch (below) is shown installed on a crude
oil tank where a low pressure gas blanket is used to pre-
vent evaporation loss. It is mounted directly to the side of
the tank or on riser pipe 4 to 7 in. (102 to 178 mm) below
level to be controlled. Pump automatically stops or starts
when liquid reaches predetermined high or low level.
 - 69 -

Basic Operation

As the liquid level rises, hydrostatic head pressure is applied to the diaphragm A. The diaphragm is forced upward forcing
the actuator arm B to activate the snap-switch C.
Models DF755 and DF755EX are factory set and operate at approximately 2 in. (51 mm) and 6 in. (152 mm) above the
level at which the diaphragm is mounted. The trip point(s) for Model DF757 are adjustable between 2 in. (51 mm) and
110 in. (2794 mm) for high and low (make/break) operation by knobs, D.
For sealed tanks, model DF755EX has a tube fitting to balance the top of the diaphragm chamber to a tank gas blanket
(see Applications).
Typical Wiring
Starts at Low Level, Stops at High Starts at High Level, Stops at Low
Start motor when predetermined low level is reached and Start motor when predetermined high level is reached and
stop when high level is reached. Keeps tank level within stop when low level is reached. Motor starter equipped with
selected limits. Motor starter equipped with H.O.A. H.O.A.

Dual Magneto Shutdown

Single Magneto Shutdown Shut down dual magneto engines using Murphy MS2120
Shut down single ignition engine when fluid reaches low Magnetic Switch. Diagram below shows hookup for low
level. Simple wiring of magneto to N.O. switch terminal will level shutdown. Simple wiring changes and mounting loca-
shut down engine at predetermined high level, shown tions are necessary for high level shutdowns.
below.
 - 70 -

Accessories
Murphy offers the MAC-1 Volume Air Cell that can be attached
to the DF755 to monitor water levels on a sump. Activates alarms
or start a pump directly. The MAC-1 Volume Air Cell is non-corro-
sive and provides 1/4-20 stainless steel mounting studs.
The MACT-1 Tubing Kit provides 4 ft. (1.2 m) flexible, non-corro-
sive 1/4 in. (6 mm) tubing (cut to fit). The kit includes necessary
fittings to attach tubing.
Volume Cell Operation
As liquid rises around the volume cell, it compresses air inside
the cell and forces it up in the sensor line. As air pressure
increases due to the water level continuing to rise, sufficient pres-
sure will be applied to activate the internal snap-switch, which in
turn starts the pump. As the liquid level is pumped down, pres-
sure decreases and the above procedure is reversed. The pump
is stopped and held in a standby condition. An air purge may be
required in the sensor line. Consult factory.
Specifications
Snap-switch Ratings Case/Lid: Aluminum (standard).
SPDT (standard–all models) Bottom Plate: Glass-filled Nylon.
• 5 A @ 125, 250, or 480 VAC Process Connection: 1 NPT (standard).
• 1/2 A @ 125 VDC, 1/4 A @ 250 VDC Maximum Pressure Rating: 25 psi (172 kPa [1.72 Bar]).
DPDT (optional) Conduit Connection (electrical): 1/2 NPT.
• 10 A @ 28 VDC
• 10 A @ 120, 230 VAC
How to Order
To order the DF series, use the model number designation diagram below. Accessories
The accessories below are sold separately and are available from
Murphy.
Specify
MAC-1: air volume cell
MACT-1: air volume cell tube kit
Shipping Weights
DF755: 3 lb. (1.4 kg)
DF755EX: 6 lb. 9 oz. (3 kg)
DF757: 3 lb. (1.4 kg)
Shipping Dimensions
DF755, DF757, 6-1/4 x 6-1/4 x 6-1/4 in. (159 x 159 x 159
mm)
Service Parts: DF Series
15000123 Diaphragm Repair Kit
Service Parts: DF755 Series
15000121 Snap-switch, and insulator assembly
15000122 Snap-switch, insulator and movement assembly
15000313 Movement and bracket assembly
Service Parts: DF757 Series
15000174 Snap-switch and bracket assembly
 00072
- 71 - Revised 06-06
Section 15

Level Swichgage® Instrument For Engine Liquids

L150/ EL150K1 Series
Features
• Monitors Level of Coolant, Lube Oil,
Diesel Fuel And Hydraulic Fluid.
• Indicating Gauge
• Low Limit Switch
• Float Operated
• Explosion-Proof Model Is Available

* EL150EX Models are CSA

Listed for Class I, Division 1,
Group C & D Hazardous Loca-
tions.

* Products covered by this bulletin comply with EMC Council directive 89/336/EEC regarding electromagnetic compatibility except as noted.

The L150 Series Level Swichgage instrument is a combination liquid level gauge and low limit switch; each unit includes (1)
a chamber with pivotal float, (2) an indicating dial with pointer, and (3) a low level contact. When properly installed and
maintained, the float operates the pointer which, in turn, both indicates level during normal operation, and closes a switch-
ing circuit if the level falls to the low-limit set point.
Applications
The primary use of the L150/EL150K1 is for engine cooling systems, surge or expansion tanks, condenser radiator or
vapor phase systems, pressurized or atmospheric systems. The Level Swichgage instrument can also be used to monitor
lube oil, hydraulic fluid or diesel fuel reservoirs and activates alarms and/or shut-down at a predetermined minimum level.
These instruments are built for low pressure systems with a maximum of 25 psi (172 kPa) [1.72 bar].
Dimensions
L150 EL150EX

EL150K1 Standard Electrical Diagrams

WARNING: This typical wiring diagram is
shown for clarity only. It is not intended
for use as installation instructions.
 - 72 -

Radiator Fittings
Murphy PS, PS Barbed and PS-D fittings allow the installation of the L150/EL150K1 to the radiator when a fitting is not available.
• 15-00-0107 (PS): thin wall, 1/4 in. (6 mm) tube fitting.
• 15-01-0167 (PS-Barbed): thin wall, 1/4 in. (6 mm) tubing or hose.
• 15-01-0202 (PS-D): for diesel or oil, thick wall (to 1/4 in. [6 mm]), accepts 1/2 in. (13 mm) I.D. hose or 1/4 in. (6 mm) O.D. tubing .

Repair Kits Specify Description

L150 15-00-0107 Radiator fitting (PS)
15-01-0202 Radiator fitting (PS-D)
15-00-0138 All parts except case and body
15-01-0167 Radiator fitting (PS Barbed)
15-00-0101 Case/body assembly
EL150K1 Fittings Kits Order Separately
15-00-0139 All parts except case and body 15010235 FM3
15-00-0101 Case/body assembly 15010236 FM4
15-00-0100 Lens/switch assembly 15010237 FM5
EL150EX
15010238 FM12
15-00-0110 Cover and float assembly
15-00-0108 Lid assembly
15010349 CECO
15-00-0109 Switch/terminal assembly
Accessories

Specifications
L150 Specifications EL150K1 Specifications EL150EX Specifications
Case: Die cast aluminum, poly-urethane Case: Die cast aluminum, poly-urethane Case: Sand cast aluminum, painted; approxi-
coated; approximate dimensions; 4-1/2 x coated; approximate dimensions; 5 x 4-3/ mate dimensions; 6-1/2 x 5-3/4 x 5-1/4 in.
4-3/4 x 2-3/4 in. (114 x 121 x 70 mm). 4 x 2-3/4 in. (127 x 121 x 70 mm). (165 x 146 x
Mounting Holes: (2) 9/32 in. (7 mm) diameter Mounting Holes: (2) 9/32 in. (7 mm) diameter 133 mm).
at 4-1/2 in. (114 mm) on center. at 4-1/2 in. (114 mm) on center. Mounting Holes: (2) 5/16 in. (8 mm) diameter
Float: Brass. Float: Brass. at 5-1/2 in. (140 mm) on center.
Lens: Polycarbonate. Lens: Polycarbonate. Float: 304 Stainless steel.
O-rings: Saturated Nitrile, are suitable for O-rings: Saturated Nitrile, are suitable for Lens: Tempered glass.
coolant or hydrocarbons. Maximum tem- coolant or hydrocarbons. Maximum tem- O-rings: Saturated Nitrile, are suitable for
perature 250°F (121°C). perature 250°F (121°C). coolant or hydrocarbons. Maximum tem-
Gasket: Nitrile. Gasket: Nitrile. perature 250°F (121°C).
Vent Tube: 1/4 x 5 in. (6 x 127 mm) copper Vent Tube: 1/4 x 5 in. (6 x 127 mm) copper Gasket: Nitrile.
cane with 1/4 NPT x 1/4 in. (6 mm) tube cane with 1/4 NPT x 1/4 in. (6 mm) tube Vent Tube: 1/4 x 5 in. (6 x 127 mm) copper
fitting. fitting. cane with 1/4 NPT x 1/4 in. (6 mm) tube
Contact Rating: 2 A @ 30 VAC/DC. Snap-Switch: SPDT rated 10 A @ 125 VAC; fitting and 1/2 NPT to 1/4 NPT reducer fit-
Wire: (1) 16 AWG x 26 in. (1.5 mm2 x 660 mm) 0.5 A @ 125 VDC; 10 A 30 VDC. ting.
with terminals. Wire: (3) 18 AWG x 14 in. (1 mm2 x 356 mm). Snap-Switch: SPDT rated 10 A @ 125 VAC;
Shipping Weight: 29 oz. (0.82 kg.). Shipping Weight: 42 oz. (1.2 kg.). 0.5 A @ 125 VDC; 10 A 30 VDC.
Shipping Dimensions: 5-1/4 x 5-1/4 x 5-1/2 Shipping Dimensions: 5-1/4 x 5-1/4 x 5-1/2 Wire: Wired to terminal block.
in. (133 x 133 x 140 mm). in. (133 x 133 x 140 mm). Laboratory Approvals: CSA Listed for Haz-
ardous Locations Class I, Division 1,
Groups C & D.
Shipping Weight: 5 lbs. (2.26 kg.).
Shipping Dimensions: 6-1/2 x 6-3/4 x 6-3/8
in. (165 x 171 x 162 mm).
 1010627
- 73 - Revised 06/09/11
Section 15

Lube Level Maintainer – Model LM500/LM500-TF

Features
• Test Feature (TF) allows test of float and switch
• Direct Mount (DM) capable
• Eliminates under/overfill due to “human error”
• See oil level and condition without shutting down
• Simple installation
• Automatically maintains lube level
• Low level, 3-wire, snap-action switch
• Positive sealing Thumb-Valve™

Not intended for use with fuel

The Murphy LM500-TF Oil Level Maintainer includes a test feature that confirms both the float and switch are operating correctly with a
single press of the test button. The LM500 series maintains the crankcase oil level of an engine, pump or compressor. Adjusted to the
correct running-oil-level, it will replenish oil as it is used. The low-level switch will alarm and/or shutdown the equipment if supply oil is lost
and the equipment continues to use oil.
Application
The LM500 maintains oil level on any size engine. It also supports installations that require a 3-wire, snap-action switch.
Refer to LM500 Series Flow Rate Chart for application data.
Test Feature Specifications
The form C (3-wire) contact allows a controller/annunciator to be Crankcase Balance Vent Connection: 1/2 NPTF (top).
wired as a closed-loop system, resulting in a reliable fault-sensi- Inlet Connection: 1/2 NPTF removable screen (side).
tive circuit. Outlet Connection:
2 x 3/4 NPTF (side)
How the LM500 Maintains Levels 1 x 3/4 NPTF (bottom)
As crankcase oil level drops, the LM500 float also drops and Thumb-Valve™ Material: Viton.
opens the Thumb-Valve™. This allows oil to flow from the supply Snap-switch: SPDT rating 10 A, 125 VAC; 0.5 A, 125 VDC; 10 A,
30 VDC.
tank, through the LM500, and into the crankcase. When proper
level is achieved in the crankcase, the LM500 float rises, causing Wire leads: 18 AWG x 14 in. ± 2 in. (355 mm) length.
the Thumb-Valve™ to close off further oil flow. Conduit Connection: 1/2 inch conduit (female, top).
Case: Die cast aluminum
The simple and unique Thumb-Valve™ is non-clogging and pro-
vides a positive, leak-free seal. Lens: Clear “Frog Eye” non-staining, high impact, high
temperature polycarbonate; UV and heat stabilized.
Thumb-Valve Operation Dial: High visibility white background with solid green band for
normal level indication.
If the clean oil supply is depleted and oil level continues to fall, the Maximum Inlet Pressure: 9.50 psi/25 ft. oil (head pressure).
low level switch will operate an alarm or equipment shutdown. Maximum Case Pressure: 15 psi (103 kPa).
Maximum Differential: 2 in. (51 mm) between running and
stopped.
Maximum Ambient Temperature: 250°F (121°C).
Float: 304 Stainless Steel
Flow Rates: Refer to LM500 Series Flow Rates chart for
application data.
Dimensions: Overall 6-9/16 inch tall x 6-3/16 inch deep x 3-1/2
deep. For exact dimensions, refer to document “00-02-0729
LM500 Installation Instructions”.
LM500/LM500-TF Shipping Dimensions: 9.5 x 7.5 x 11 in.
(241.3 x 190 x 279.4 mm).
LM500/LM500-TF Shipping Weight: 3 lbs. 13.44 oz (1.74 kg)
 - 74 -

LM500 Series Flow Rates

LM500 Series Flow Rates are based on SAE 40 motor oil @ 2 ft. head pressure. Friction losses due to piping are not con-
sidered.

Typical Installations

Pipe Mount
Universal Mount

Direct Mount
Example
 - 75 -

How to Order
To order the LM500 use the model number designation diagram below. (Example for Pipe Mount: LM500-TF-PM)

Mounting Brackets with Hardware

In addition to the direct mounting option, Murphy offers two mounting brackets for the LM500. The Pipe Bracket Kit fits a
7/8 in. (22 mm) diameter pipe (see typical installation below). The Universal Flange Kit allows various mounting methods.
For exact dimensions, refer to document “00-02-0729 LM500 Installation Instructions”.

Accessories (Specify part number) Vent Fitting Kit: 15000954

One Tubing vent
Description Part Number
One 1/4 x 1/2 NPT Connector
Vent Fittings Kit 15000954
Hose Kit 15000355 Hose Kit: 15000355
One 1/2 in. (13 mm) I.D. x 3 ft. (914 mm) long hose
1/2 NPT x 1/2 in. Hose Barbed Fitting 89080801
One 1 in. (25 mm) I.D. x 3 ft. (914 mm) long hose
3/4 NPT x 1 in. Hose Barbed Fitting 89081001
Two 1/2 in. (13 mm) worm gear clamp
Pipe Bracket Kit 15000518
Two 1 in. (25 mm) worm gear clamp
Universal Flange Kit 15000519
Bubble Lens Kit 15000532 Two 1/2 NPT x 1/2 in. (13 mm) barbed fitting
Two 3/4 NPT x 1 in. (25 mm) barbed fitting
Fittings Kit: 15000943
One Tubing vent
One Hose Barb, 1/2 NPT to 1/2 Hose
One Hose Barb, 1” ID HOSE x 3/4 NPT
One Connector, 1/4 x 1/2 NPT
 - 76 -

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

 92149
- 77 - Revised 07-27-10
Section 15

Level Maintainer – LM300 Series

Features
• Maintains proper lube level
• Shutdown on low level, or high and low level
• Low level alarm before shutdown
• Manual float switch test
• High visibility “Frog Eye” lens
• Optional pipe or universal mounting brackets
• Optional inlet orifices for low to high pressure
applications
• Explosion-proof models available
†
LM301-EX *
Patent 5493086
* Pending
† Products covered by this bulletin comply with EMC Council directive 89/336/EEC regarding electromagnetic compatibility except as noted.

The LM300 Series Level Maintainer automatically adds oil to the crankcase as needed to keep the lube level normal. Most models have built-in switches
that will alarm and/or shutdown the equipment if the makeup supply is depleted and engine oil level falls or if overfill conditions exist. LM300 series explo-
sion-proof models are CSA certified† for Class I, Division 1 Hazardous areas.
Applications
• Engines • Pumps
• Compressors • Coolers

Base Models‡
LM300: Level Maintainer only (no switches). LM304: Two switches. Alarm before shutdown on low level and shutdown
LM301: Low switch contacts for low level shutdown or alarm. Four wires, on low-low level. Four wires, DPST, wired N.O. in normal operating
SPDT. ranges.
LM302: Two switches for low and high level shutdown or alarm. Four LM305: Two switches. Alarm before shutdown on low level and shutdown
wires, DPST, wired N.O. in normal operating ranges. on low-low level. Four wires, DPST, wired N.C. in normal operating
ranges.
LM303: Two switches for low and high level shutdown or alarm. Four
wires, DPST, wired N.C. in normal operating ranges.
Specifications
Case/Cover: Die cast aluminum. Flow Rate Test: Using SAE 30 @ 32°F (0°C).
Switch Housing: Aluminum. Orifice Diame-
Approval Rating: LM301 thru LM305: CSA certifiedÜ for non hazardous ter Pressure Flow Rates
locations. Enclosure Type 4 certified. 1/4 in.* (6 mm) 4 ft. oil – 15 ft. oil 4.7 GPH - 31.0 GPH
LM301-EX thru LM305-EX: CSA certifiedÜ for Class I, Groups C and (1.2 m oil – 4.6 m oil) (17.8 LPH - 117.3 LPH)
D; Class II, Groups F and G hazardous locations. Enclosure Type 4 1/8 in. (3 mm) 10 psig – 30 psig 16.9 GPH - 32.1 GPH
certified. (68.9 kPa – 207 kPa) (63.7 LPH - 121.5 LPH)
[.69 – 2.07 bar]
Float: Rigid polyurethane foam. Polyurethane coated.
Max. Ambient Temperature: 250°F (121°C) * Standard
Oil Inlet Connection: Top entry 1/2-14 NPT with built-in filter screen NOTE: Friction losses due to piping NOT considered.
(removable for cleaning).
Outlet Connection: 3/4-14 NPT left side, right side, and bottom.
Inlet Orifices: 1/4 in. (6 mm) standard. 1/8 in. (3 mm) available.
Crankcase Balance Vent Fitting: 1/2-14 NPT.
Wire (switch models): 18 AWG x 13 in. (1.0 mm2 x 330 mm).
Mounting: Accepts Murphy pipe mounting bracket or universal mounting
Max. Inlet Pressure (MIP): 30 psi (207 kPa) [2.07 bar]. with 1/8 in. (3 mm) bracket.
orifice. Lens: Clear “Frog Eye” non-staining, high impact, high temperature nylon;
15 ft oil (4.6 m oil) with 1/4 in. (6 mm) orifice. UV and heat stabilized.
Max. Differential: 2 in. (51 mm) between running and stationary oil level. Dial: High visibility white background with green and white “index” lines for
Max. Case Pressure (MCP): 15 psi (103 kPa) [1.03 bar]. normal level indication.
Orifice SealÜ: Buna-N Thumb-Valve™ Test Knob: Rotate to test switch operation. Turn clockwise for low level
Switch Contact: Silver, SPDT snap acting, rated at 10 A @ 125, 250 test and turn counterclockwise for high level test.
VAC; 10 A @
30 VDC. (1 only for low level; 2 only for high and low; or 2 only for low
level with alarm before shutdown)

† CSA certified with switch contacts rated at 10 A at 250 V AC (standard).

‡ Specify “EX” for explosion-proof enclosure. All models except LM300 are available in an explosion-proof enclosure.
 - 78 -

Dimensions
The dimensions below are for the optional “EX” model enclosure. The standard model enclosure dimensions are the same except the height and width
which are: 7 in. (178 mm) H, 7-7/8 in. (200 mm) W.

Mounting Brackets with Hardware

How to Order
Build a complete model number using the following chart. See example. Shipping Information
See reverse page for standard and optional specifications.
Shipping Weights:
• LM300 Series non-“EX” models: 6 lbs. 6 ozs. (2.89 kg)
• LM300 Series “EX” models: 6 lbs. 12 ozs. (3.06 kg)
Shipping Dimensions (all LM300 Series models):
• 10-5/8 x 8-7/8 x 6-3/4 in. (270 x 225 x 171 mm)
Optional Hose Kit: 15000355
Quantity Description
1 1/2 in. (13 mm) I.D. x 3 ft. (914 mm) long hose
1 1 in. (25 mm) I.D. x 3 ft. (914 mm) long hose
2 1/2 in. (13 mm) worm gear clamp
2 1 in. (25 mm) worm gear clamp
2 1/2 NPT x 1/2 in. (13 mm) barbed fitting
2 3/4 NPT x 1 in. (25 mm) barbed fitting
 00010
- 79 - Revised 08-27-09
Section 15

Lube Level Maintainer – Model LM2000/LM2000S

Features
• Eliminates under/overfill due to “human error”
• See oil level and condition without shutting down
• Simple installation
• Automatically maintains lube level
• Low level, 3-wire, snap-action switch
• Positive sealing Thumb-Valve™

Not intended for use with fuel

Murphy LM2000 model maintains the crankcase oil level of an engine, pump or compressor. Adjusted to the correct run-
ning-oil-level, the LM2000 will replenish oil as it is used. An integral, low-level switch will alarm and/or shutdown the equip-
ment if supply oil is lost and the equipment continues to use oil.
Application
The LM2000 maintains oil level on any size engine, as well as installations that require a 3-wire, snap-action switch. Refer
to Flow Rate for application data.
How the LM2000 Maintains Levels
Specifications
As crankcase oil level drops, the LM2000 float also drops
and opens the Thumb-Valve™. This allows oil to flow from Crankcase Balance Vent Connection: 1/2 NPTF (top).
Inlet Connection: 1/2 NPTF removable screen (side).
the supply tank, through the LM2000, and into the crank- Outlet Connection:
case. When proper level is attained in the crankcase, the LM2000 3/4 NPTF (bottom)
LM2000 float rises, causing the Thumb-Valve™ to close off LM2000S 2 x 3/8 NPTF (side)
further oil flow. 1 x 3/4 NPTF (bottom)
Thumb-Valve™ Material: Viton.
The simple and unique Thumb-Valve™ is nonclogging and Snap-switch: SPDT rating 10 A, 125 VAC; 0.5 A, 125 VDC; 10 A,
provides a positive, leak-free seal. 30 VDC.
Wire leads: 18 AWG x 14 in. ± 2 in. (355 mm) length.
Thumb-Valve Operation Conduit Connection: 1/2 inch conduit (female, top).
Case: Die cast aluminum
If the clean oil supply is depleted and oil level continues to Lens: Clear “Frog Eye” non-staining, high impact, high tempera-
fall, the low level switch will operate an alarm or equipment ture polycarbonate; UV and heat stabilized.
shutdown. Dial: High visibility white background with green and white “index”
lines for normal level indication.
Maximum Inlet Pressure: 9.50 psi/25 ft. oil (head pressure).
Maximum Case Pressure: 15 psi (103 kPa).
Maximum Differential: 2 in. (51 mm) between running and
stopped.
Maximum Ambient Temperature: 250°F (121°C).
Float: Brass
Flow Rates: SAE 40 motor oil @ 32°F (0°C) with 2 ft. head pres-
sure: 0.5 GPH
Dimensions: Overall 4-5/8 inch tall x 2-7/8 inch deep. For exact
dimensions, refer to document “00-02-0423 LM2000 Installation
Instructions”.
LM2000/LM2000S Shipping Dimensions: 9 x 5-1/2 x 6 in.
(229 x 140 x 152 mm).
LM2000/LM2000S Shipping Weight: 3 lbs. 6 oz. (1.5 kg)

NOTE: Friction losses due to piping not considered.

 - 80 -

Mounting Brackets with Hardware

Murphy offers two mounting brackets for the LM2000. The 15000238 Pipe Bracket Kit fits a 7/8 in. (22 mm) diameter pipe
(see typical installation below). The 15010224 universal Flange Kit allows various mounting methods. For exact dimensions, refer
to document “00-02-0423 LM2000 Installation Instructions”.

How to Order
Specify model LM2000 LM2000S

Accessories (Specify part number) Optional Vent Fitting Kit: 15000954

Description Part Number Kit sold separately–includes the following items:
Vent Fittings Kit 15000954
1 Tubing vent (15050202).
Hose Kit 15000355
1 1/4 x 1/2 NPT Connector (85030447).
1/2NPT x 1/2 in. Hose Barbed Fitting 89080801
3/4NPT x 1 in. Hose Barbed Fitting 89081001
Optional Hose Kit: 15000355
1 1/2 in. (13 mm) I.D. x 3 ft. (914 mm) long hose (89020202)
3/8NPTF x 1/2 in. Hose Barbed Fitting 89080601
1 1 in. (25 mm) I.D. x 3 ft. (914 mm) long hose (89020203)
Pipe Bracket Kit 15000238
2 1/2 in. (13 mm) worm gear clamp (00003502)
Universal Flange Kit 15010224
2 1 in. (25 mm) worm gear clamp (00003503)
2 1/2 NPT x 1/2 in. (13 mm) barbed fitting (89080801)
2 3/4 NPT x 1 in. (25 mm) barbed fitting (89081001)
Typical Installation
 96121
- 81 - Revised 08-02
Section 15

Oil Level Regulators for Lubricators – LR500 Series

Features
• Unique Anti-Clog Thumb-Valve™
• Regulate Oil Flow From Reservoir to
Keep Lubricator Full
• Eliminates Manual Oil Check and Refill
Time
• Low-level Shutdown Switch
• Reduce Engine and Pump Repairs
Caused By Low Lube Level

The LR500 Series Level Regulators automatically add oil to a lubricator to maintain the factory recommended level. This
function eliminates the work time necessary for manual checks and refills.
Each model has a low-level shutdown switch to protect equipment when oil supply is lost. If the lubricator oil level drops
below the minimum operations level, the low-level switch will operate an alarm and/or shutdown the equipment.
Model LR579 is for Lincoln lubricators. It features an adjustable low-level shutdown contact.
LR589 is for Lincoln lubricators, and the LR589NC is the normally closed wired version of the LR589.

Dimensions

LR579 LR589 / LR589NC

Shipping Weight: 13 oz. (368 g).

Shipping Dimensions: 4-3/4 x 4-3/4 x 3-1/4
in.
(121 x 121 x 83 mm).
Shipping Weight: 12 oz. (340 g).
Shipping Dimensions: 4-3/4 x 4-3/4 x 2-3/4
in.
(121 x 121 x 70 mm)
 - 82 -

Installation

WARNING
Before beginning installation of this Murphy product:
 Disconnect ALL electrical power to the machine.
 Make sure the machine CANNOT operate during installation.
 Follow all safety warnings of the machine manufacturer.
 Read and follow all installation instructions.

1. Remove the cover on a vacant cell of the lubricator (DO NOT install in bays next to crank arm).
2. Bolt the level regulator in place, using the bolts that held the cover.
3. Connect the flex hose from the oil reservoir to the oil inlet at the level regulator. Oil reservoir must be at least two feet
(0.61 meters) above the level regulator.
4. Wire switch for alarm and/or shutdown. One switch can be used to shut-down all equipment supplied by a common oil
reservoir.
Typical Wiring for LR579 Typical Wiring for LR589

How to Order
Specify model when ordering.
LR579
LR589
LR589NC
 7225
- 83 - Revised 03-05
Section 15

Maintain Lube Level – Model LR857

Features
• Eliminates Under/OverFill Due to
“Human Error”
• Simple Installation
• Automatically Maintains Lube Level
• Low Level Switch
• Models to Fit Varied Applications
• Positive Sealing Thumb-Valve™
*

* Products covered by this bulletin comply with EMC Council directive 89/336/EEC regarding electromagnetic compatibility except as noted.

Murphy LR857 Lube Level Regulator maintains the crankcase oil level of an engine, pump or compressor. Adjusted to the correct running-oil-level, the
LR857 will replenish oil as it is used. An integral, low-level switch will alarm and/or shutdown the equipment if supply oil is lost and the equipment contin-
ues to use oil.
Application
The LR857 maintains oil level on any size engine, but is recommended for small to medium volume applications and installations that require a 3-wire,
snap-action switch.
How the LR857 Maintains Levels
As crankcase oil level drops, the LR857 float also drops and opens the Thumb-Valve™. This allows oil to flow from the supply tank, through the LR857,
and into the crankcase. When proper level is attained in the crankcase, the LR857 float rises, causing the Thumb-Valve to close off further oil flow.
The simple and unique Thumb-Valve is non-clogging and provides a positive, leak-free seal. Flow rate through the 1/8 inch (3 mm) orifice is significant to
allow crankcase refill through the LR857.
Thumb-Valve Operation Dimensions
As the equipment uses oil, the float falls, providing immediate level com-
pensation. At FULL position, the float holds the valve closed. If the clean
oil supply is depleted and oil level continues to fall, the low level switch will
operate an alarm or equipment shutdown.
 - 84 -

Mounting Brackets with Hardware

Murphy offers two mounting brackets for the LR857. The 15000238 Pipe Bracket Kit fits a 7/8 in. (22 mm) diameter pipe (see typical installation below).
The 15010224 universal Flange Kit allows various mounting methods.

LR857 Typical Installation Specifications

Inlet Connection: 5/8 in. (16 mm) I.D. hose
Outlet Connection: 3/8 NPT
Snap-switch: SPDT rating 10 A @ 125 VAC; 0.5 A @ 125 VDC; 10 A @ 30 VDC.
Conduit Connection: 1/2 NPT
Case: Die cast aluminum
Lens: Polycarbonate
Float: Brass
Flow Rates (see chart below): Oil with 0.9 specific gravity @ 70°F (21°C)

Fittings Kit: 15000420

The 15000420 kit is sold separately. It includes the following items.
Quantity Description
1 1/4 in. (6 mm) O.D copper cane tube (vent connection)
1 1/4 in. (6 mm) tube x 1/4 male pipe fitting
1 1/2 in. (13 mm) I.D. hose fitting (outlet connection)

How to Order
Specify model LR857 Lid Assembly 15000161
Float Assembly (Brass-std) 15000941
Accessories (Specify part number)
LR857 Shipping Dimensions: 9 x 5-1/2 x 6 in. (229 x 140 x 152 mm).
Description Part Number
LR857 Shipping Weight: 3 lbs. 6 oz. (1.5 kg).
Fittings Kit 15000420
Pipe Bracket Kit 15000238
Universal Flange Kit 15010224
Replacement Parts (Specify part number)
Inlet Valve Assembly 15000159
Glass and Switch Ass'y 15000100
 0710176
- 85 - Revised 03-07
Section 15

Float Actuated Oil Level Swichgage® Instrument

For Small Engines and Pumps
*
Features
• See Oil Level and Condition Without Shutting Down
• Shutdown or Alarm on Low Lube Level
• Adjustable Limit Switch for Alarm and/or Shutdown
• Save on Reduced Downtime and Repair Costs
• Simple Installation

* Products covered by this bulletin comply with EMC Council directive 89/336/EEC regarding electromagnetic compatibility as noted.

These float actuated Oil Level Swichgage instruments are a combination oil level sight gage and adjustable, low and/or
high limit switch. The limit switches are normally open during operation– yet close if the level drops (or rises) to where the
float contacts the limit screw. The contact completes a circuit to ground a magneto or trip a Murphy magnetic switch. The
magnetic switch can be used to activate alarms and/or shutdown. Models are also available without limit switches.
Application
The level instruments described above can be used on a variety of crankcases, pump gearcases, or oil reservoirs–primarily
on small engines and pumps. The following list displays the model and its typical application:
L100†: Small engines and pumps with non-vented crankcase.
L100W†: Small engines and pumps with vented crankcase.
L120: Machined surface on crankcase such as Witte, National-Oilwell/Garland.
L127: Machined surface on crankcase, specifically, Fairbanks-Morse ZC Series and Bell Engines.
L128: Machined surface on crankcase, specifically, Arrow and Continental Emsco/Climax.
Specifications
Maximum Pressure Rating (all models): 30 psi (207 kPa) [2.07 L120
bar] Case: Cast Aluminum
L100 and L100W Float: Brass
Case: Die cast aluminum Rating: 2 A @ 30 VAC/DC
Float: Brass Mounting Bolts: 1/4-20 UNC–2A (4 req'd)
Rating: 2 A @ 30 VAC/DC L127 and L128
Vent Fitting: 1/4 in. (6 mm) tube x 1/8 NPT Case: TROGAMID® Nylon
Inlet Fitting: Hex Nipple 1/4 NPT Float: Brass
Hardware (shipped loose) Rating: 2 A @ 30 VAC/DC
L100: Wire: 16 AWG x 48 in. (1.5 mm2 x 1.2 m)
• Copper Tubing: 1/4 x 48 in. dia. (6 mm x 1.2 m) Mounting Bolts:
• Reducer Bushing: 1/2 NPT x 1/4 NPT • L127: 1/4-20 NC x 2 in. (4 required)
• Close Nipple: 1/2 NPT • L128: 3/8-16 NC x 3/4 in. (2 require d)
• Tee: 1/2 NPT, black pipe Shipping Weight:
• Wire: 16 AWG x 24 in. (1.5 mm2x 610 mm) • L100: 2 lbs. (0.91 kg)
L100W: • L100W: 2 lbs. (0.91 kg)
• Vent Tube: 1/4 x 3-3/8 in. (6 x 86 mm) • L120: 1 lb 8 oz (0.68 kg)
• Reducer Bushing: 3/4 NPT x 1/4 NPT • L127: 8 oz (0.23 kg)
• Close Nipple: 3/4 NPT • L128: 10 oz (0.36 kg)
• Tee: 3/4 NPT, black pipe Shipping Dimensions
• Wire: 16 AWG x 24 in. (1.5 mm2x 610 mm) • L100: 5-1/4 x 5-1/4 x 5-1/2 in. (133 x 133 x 140 mm)
• L100W: 4-3/4 x 4-3/4 x 3-1/4 in. (121 x 121 x 83 mm)
• L120: 4-3/4 x 4-3/4 x 3-1/4 in. (121 x 121 x 83 mm)
• L127 and L128: 4-3/4 x 4-3/4 x 3-1/4 in. (121 x 121 x 83
mm)

† Models available with high and low options. See How to Order on reverse side
 - 86 -

Typical Wiring Diagram

Below is a typical wiring diagram for a level Swichgage
instrument. A Swichgage instrument can be connected
to a Murphy magnetic switch or magneto. Switch Contact
Rating is 2 A @ 30 VAC/DC resistive.
Dimensions
L100 and L100W L120

L127 and L128

How to Order
Specify base model designator and options in sequence shown. Example: L100-HL
 6572
- 87 - Revised 06-06
Section 15

Lube Level Swichgage® Instrument – L129 Series

Features
• Check Lube Level Without Shutting
Down
• Use On Engines, Pumps, And
Compressors
• Combination Indicating Gage with Low
and High Limit Switch
• Float Operated

* Products covered by this bulletin comply with EMC Council

directive 89/336/EEC regarding electromagnetic compatibil-
ity except as noted.

The L129 Series Lube Level Swichgage instrument is a combination lube level indicating gage and adjustable low and high
limit switches. It provides protection against low oil level or high level caused by overfill or fuel or water seepage into the
crankcase.
A 6-3/4 inch (171 mm) deep sight gauge allows you check the condition and level of your oil without shutting down the
equipment.
Fingertip adjustable limit contacts, thru 4-7/8 inch (122 mm) range, make it simple to set high and low limit contacts. If
the float touches the high or low limit contact, a normally open circuit will be completed which can activate alarms and/or
shutdown the equipment.
There are two models in the L129 Series: L129 and L129CK1. The L129 model is designed for grounded, low voltage
electrical systems. It features a one-wire-to-ground electrical circuit. The L129CK1 was designed for applications requiring
a three-wire, above ground electrical circuit. It features ungrounded contacts and a conduit hub to protect electrical wiring.
Options are available for both models.
A flow restrictor plug is available that restricts oil flow from the crankcase to the L129 Series switch and vice versa. It is typ-
ically used on applications where the engine is not stationary such as marine and mobile equipment.
The L129 Series Lube Level SWICHGAGE®, when properly installed and maintained, can monitor and protect your
engines and pumps from improper lubrication level, which can result in extensive damage.
Applications
The L129 Series is recommended for engines and pumps with larger crankcase capacity. Although designed primarily for
stationary engines, the L129 Series is often used in mobile applications such as marine, rail, and some large off-highway
trucks.
 - 88 -

Dimensions

L129 L129CK1

Wiring Diagrams Repair Kits

These diagrams are shown with the float in the “full” posi- Specify part number.
tion. L129
15000888 Full Repair Kit (less castings and glass
ass’y) for date code T2 and later.
15000480 Bezel, Glass and Gasket Set for date code
W7 and later
15000485 Glass and Gasket Set for all date codes
15050241 Restrictor plug for all date codes
L129CK1
15000480 Bezel, Glass and Gasket Set for date code
W7 and later
15000485 Glass and Gasket Set for all date codes
15050241 Restrictor plug for all date codes

Contact Rating: 2 A @ 30 VAC/DC, pilot duty.

Specifications
Case: Die Cast Aluminum. Shipping Weight:
Lens: Tempered Glass. L129: 3 lb. (1.4 kg).
Maximum Working Pressure: 10 psi (68.9 kPa). L129CK1: 3 lb. 9 oz. (1.6 kg).
Process Connection: 1/2 NPT. Shipping Dimensions (both models):
Float Material: Brass. 12 x 4-1/2 x 4-3/4 in. (305 x 114 x 121 mm).
Contact Rating: 2 A @ 30 VAC/DC, pilot duty.
 7229
- 89 - Revised 02-97
Section 15

Crankcase Level Switch – L971 Series

Features
• Durable Low Level Switch
• Replaces Non-Explosion-proof Switch
on Ingersoll-Rand Compressors
• Adaptable to Other Compressors
• Installs with Minimal Downtime
• Two Year Limited Warranty
*

* Products covered by this bulletin comply with EMC Council directive 89/336/EEC regarding electromagnetic compatibility except as noted.

The Murphy L971 Series Level Switch detects low oil level in a compressor’s crankcase. As oil level in the crankcase
depletes, the float on the L971 switch falls, and if reaches the predetermined limit, will trip the internal snap-switch which in
turn will initiate a shutdown and/or alarm.
The L971 is designed for Ingersoll-Rand Type 30, Type 40 and ESH compressors, yet can be adapted to fit other compres-
sors that have an inspection plate extending below normal operating oil level.
The L971 has a 1/2 NPT process connection and features an explosion-proof enclosure, durable SPDT snap-switch and
rigid polyurethane foam float. A 304 stainless steel float is available on certain configurations (see Specifications).
Dimensions
Dimensions in inches* (see drawing right)
Models A B C D E
L971 2-5/8 (67) 5-7/8 (149) 30 (762) 2-1/2 (64) 2-27/32 (72)
L971-A 2-5/8 (67) 5-7/8 (149) 30 (762) 2-1/2 (64) 2-27/32 (72)
L971-B 4-13/16 (122) 8-1/16 (205) 30 (762) 4-5/8 (117) 2-27/32 (72)
L971-C 2-13/16 (71) 6-1/16 (154) 30 (762) 2-7/8 (73) 3-1/8 (79)
L971-D 3-7/8 (98) 7-1/8 (181) 30 (762) 3-3/4 (95) 2-27/32 (72)
L971-E 4-13/16 (122) 8-1/16 (205) 30 (762) 5-1/8 (130) 2-27/32 (72)
L971-F 2-5/8 (67) 5-7/8 (149) 40 (1016) 2-1/2 (64) 2-27/32 (72)
L971-G 2-5/8 (67) 5-7/8 (149) 40 (1016) 2-1/2 (64) 2-27/32 (72)

* Millimeter dimensions are shown in parenthesis ().

Wiring Diagrams†
Model L971-A All Other Models

† Shown in “shelf” position with no force acting upon float.

 - 90 -

Specifications
Operating Temperature Range: -15 to 275°F (-26 to 135°C). O-Ring Seals: Viton and Buna.
Maximum Working Pressure: 30 psi (206 kPa) [2.06 bar]. Process Connection: 1/2 NPT.
Switch Rating: 4 A @ 250 VAC. Enclosure Rating: UL and CSA listed for Class I, Groups C & D; Class II,
Material Groups F & G, Hazardous Locations.
Case: Aluminum (explosion-proof). Conduit Connection: 1/2 NPT.
Mounting Adaptor: Brass. Wire: 18 AWG (0.75 mm2).
Floats: Rigid polyurethane. 304 stainless steel available on L971-C Shipping Weight: 1 lb. 10 oz. (0.7 kg).
only. Shipping Dimensions: 8-1/4 x 4-1/4 x 4-1/2 in. (210 x 108 x 114 mm).
Other Wetted Parts: 303, 304, and 316 stainless steel.
How to Order
To order the L971 Series Level Switch to fit your application, use the diagram below. Example model number: L971-C
 1010629
- 91 - Revised 11-02-11
Section 15

MLS Series - Liquid Level Switches

Features
• Clean Magnet Design virtually eliminates iron filing accu-
mulation onto the magnet
• Seal-Free Construction
• ANSI/ISA 12.27.01 compliant (Single Seal)
• Operates in 0.50 specific gravity or heavier fluids
• Designed for harsh gas compressor scrubber applications
• 304 cast equivalent SS body and 304 SS float
• Rated for 2000 psi (13.8 MPa) [138 bar] working pressure
• Trip on rising and falling without need to rotate body
• Electric model only available
• All models screw directly into the scrubber or can be
mounted via a Murphy external float chamber
• CSA C/US Class I, Div. 1, Grp. B, C & D locations
• NACE MR0175 compliant
• Canadian Registration Number 0F01476.2

MLS Series Liquid Level Switches are float activated to operate an electrical SPDT reed switch for annunciation/pilot signal
for indication of high level to an annunciator, controller or PLC. The MLS connects directly into the gas scrubber wall and
can be used with a Murphy weld collar or Murphy external float chamber. The MLS Series is available in a 2”NPT model.
Product Dimensions
. Specifications
Process Connection: 2” NPT (MLS-020)
Fluid Density (Sg): 0.50 MIN
Pressure Rating: 2000 psig (13.8 MPa) [138 bar]
Materials:
Body: ASTM A351 CF8 (304 SS)
Cover: ASTM A351 CF8 (304 SS)
Other Wetted Parts: 304 or 316 SS
Meets NACE MR0175 for direct exposure to H2S
Process Temperature: -20 to 300oF (-24 to 149oC).
Electrical: 30VAC/VDC 75mA Form C SPDT
Conductor cross section AWG/kcmil min.: 26
Conductor cross section AWG/kcmil max.: 16
 - 92 -

Accessories
Refer to MLS Installation and Operations manual for additional information.
External Float Chamber 15700799 Weld Collar 15050375
Operating Pressure: 2000psi (13.8MPa)[138 bar] Operating Pressure: 2000psi (13.8MPa)[138 bar]

Operating Temperature: 400oF (204oC) Operating Temperature: 400oF (204oC)

Shipping Weight: 18lbs (8.2kg) Shipping Weight: 6lbs (2.7kg)

Approximate Shipping Weights and Dimensions (all models)

Weight: 5.5 lbs (2.49kg)
Dimensions:14 x 5 x 3.5 in (356 x 127 x 89 mm)

Electrical Wiring Diagram

How to Order
To order the MLS Series Level Switch, please use the product number below:
MLS-020 (2” NPT)
 0600009
- 93 - 07-19-11
Section 15

LS200 & L1100 Series Liquid Level Switches

- 94 -
- 95 -
- 96 -
 01069
- 97 - Revised 10-08
Section 15

Dump Valves DVU Series

Features
• For Separators/Scrubbers to 2000 psi
(13.8 MPa) [138 bar] Working Pressure
• Hex Union Allows Plug and Seat
Replacement Without Piping Removal
• Operates on 30–70 psi (207–483 kPa)
[2.07–4.83 bar] Control Pressure
• Compatible With Murphy Level Controls
• Soft Seat Valve
• Manual Valve Operator

The DVU Series are pneumatically controlled dump valves. The valves open and close automatically by pneumatic control
from a Murphy L1200NDVOR or similar level controller and dump valve operator. Diaphragm actuated, the DVU series
dump valves operate at 30–70 psi (207–483 kPa) [2.07–4.83 bar] and up to 2000 psi (13.8 MPa) [138 bar] vessel pressure
(depending on the model).
A key benefit of this design is a hex union that provides the ability to replace the seat without removing the valve from pip-
ing.
Application
Designed for gas compressor scrubbers, the DVU Series can be used to dump any liquids compatible with its materials of
construction.
Dimensions
Model DVU2120 DVU2115 DVU2105 DVU175 DVU150
A 7.50 (191) 7.50 (191) 7.50 (191) 7.50 (191) 7.50 (191)
B 8.0 (203) 8.0 (203) 8.0 (203) 6.75 (171) 6.75 (171)
C 2.75 (70) 2.75 (70) 2.75 (70) 2.06 (52) 2.06 (52)
D 1.0 (25) 1.0 (25) 1.0 (25) 1.0 (25) 1.0 (25)
E 2-11.5 NPT 2-11.5 NPT 2-11.5 NPT 1-11.5 NPT 1-11.5 NPT
F 1-11.5 NPT 1-11.5 NPT 1-11.5 NPT 3/4-14 NPT 1/2-14 NPT
G 1.03 1.03 1.03 1.03 1.03
NOTE: Dimensions are in inches and (millimeters).
 - 98 -

Specifications
Operating Temperature: -30 to 250°F (-34.4 to +121°C) Body Material: Electroless Nickel Plated 12L14 Carbon Steel.
Valve Operating Pressure: See chart (bottom pg 1). Internal Wetted Parts:
Maximum Working Pressure: Plug Seal: 90 Durometer Urethane.
DVU150 and DVU175: 1800 psi (12.4 MPa) [124 bar]. Other: 303 stainless steel; Electroless Nickel Plated 12L14 Carbon
DVU2105: 500 psi (3.44 MPa) [34 bar]. Steel.
DVU2115: 1500 psi (10.3 MPa) [103 bar].
DVU2120: 2000 psi (13.8 MPa) [138 bar].
Replacement Parts
Typical Seal Kit includes: Nut, Washer (1 to 3), “O” Ring, Plug and Seal, DVU2105
Seat, Crush Washer. 55-00-0245 Seal Kit (includes plug)
Typical Diaphragm Repair Kit includes: Diaphragm, Diaphragm Washer 55-00-0244 Diaphragm Kit
(upper), Diaphragm Nut, Diaphragm Plate (1 or 2 pcs.), Packing, “O” Ring, DVU175
Stem, Seal Washer for Maintenance Bolt. 55-00-0230 Seal Kit (includes plug)
Part No. Description 55-00-0231 Diaphragm Kit
DVU2120 DVU150
55-00-0237 Seal Kit (includes plug) 55-00-0230 Seal Kit (includes plug)
55-00-0236 Diaphragm Kit 55-00-0231 Diaphragm Kit
DVU2115 Shipping Weights
55-00-0241 Seal Kit (includes plug) DVU150 and DVU175: 9 lbs. (4 kg.).
55-00-0240 Diaphragm Kit DVU150SS and DVU175SS: 9 lbs. (4 kg.)
DVU2105, DVU2115, DVU2120: 14 lbs. (6.4 kg.)
Shipping Dimensions
8 x 8 x 12 in. (203 x 203 x 305 mm.).
Scrubber Level Systems (SLS)
(Includes L1200, L1200NDVOR and DVU valve)
SLS02BC: Includes DVU2120 valve
SLS02BB: Includes DVU2115 valve
SLS02BA: Includes DVU2105 valve
SLS02C: Includes DVU175 valve
SLS02A: Includes DVU150 valve
-LR: Less Regulator option
How to Order Specify model number:
Working
Model Inlet Outlet Trim Size Max. Press.
DVU2120 2 NPT 1 NPT 0.436 in. (11 mm) 2000 psi.
DVU2115 2 NPT 1 NPT 0.576 in. (15 mm) 1500 psi.
DVU2105 2 NPT 1 NPT 0.859 in. (22 mm) 500 psi.
DVU175 1 NPT 3/4 NPT 0.359 in. (9 mm) 1800 psi.
DVU175SS 1 NPT 3/4 NPT 0.359 in. (9 mm) 1800 psi.
DVU150 1 NPT 1/2 NPT 0.359 in. (9 mm) 1800 psi.
DVU150SS 1 NPT 1/2 NPT 0.359 in. (9 mm) 1800 psi.
 94122
- 99 - Revised 03-06
Section 15

4-1/2 in. (114 mm) Dial Level Swichgage® Instrument

OPLH / OPLHACS Series
Features
• Combination Level Indicating Gage and Criti-
cal Level Limit Switch
• High and Low Level Limit Contacts Are Visi-
ble and Adjustable
• Designed to Start and Stop Pumps to Main-
tain Specific Levels
• Indication only Murphygage® instrument
Available
• Latching Control Relay Versions Available
Selected configurations are third
party listed. Consult FWMurphy
R
for details.

The OPLHC/OPLHACS Series Level Swichgage instruments are combination level indicating gages with adjustable low
and high limit switches. Limit switches can be wired directly to electric pilot circuits to operate alarms, shutdown or start/
stop pumps to maintain predetermined levels.
Surface mount or panel mount enclosure is available for both model series. All models feature a 4-1/2 in. (114 mm) dial for
easy viewing. Adjustable limit switches are accessible from front of the Swichgage instrument.
Specialized models are available for specific applications involving engines or electric motors.
OPLHC/OPLHACS
Series Swichgage instruments include 2-adjustable, pilot duty, pointer type contacts. Contacts have self-cleaning motion to
enhance electrical continuity. Models are available with a rugged bourdon-tube or 316 stainless steel bellows sensing ele-
ment for greater accuracy and sensitivity in lower ranges. A “freeze-proof” sensor of 316 stainless steel with Buna-N rolling
diaphragm, is available. The “freeze-proof” sensor (OPLHAFP) inserts approx., 2 in. (52 mm) inside a tank.
OPLHBP/OPLHABPS
Internal latching control relays are available to provide ON/OFF automation for electric motor applications.
OPLHC and OPLHACS series are available in indication only Murphygage models (OPLHAGS). See Page 2 to
determine the model for your application.
Applications
• Saltwater Disposal Systems • Diesel Day Tanks
• Waterflood Systems • Oil Storage Tanks
Basic Operation
The OPLHC/OPLHACS series operate from static head pressure. Pressure is transmitted to the pro-
cess connection of the Swichgage instrument. From here the pressure flexes the bourdon tube or oper-
ates the 316 stainless steel bellows (depending on which model you have). The bourdon tube/bellows
operates the stainless steel rotary geared movement which in turn operates the indicating pointer on
the face of the dial. When the pointer (A) closes with the limit contact (B), a control circuit (C) is com-
pleted and signals an alarm and/or shut down or starts/stops a pump.
 - 100 -

Dimensions
Surface / Panel Mount Enclosure (Square Case)

Panel Mount Enclosure (Round Case) Explosion-proof Enclosure (“EX” Option)

Typical Applications
 - 101 -

Specifications

NOTES:
• Options may not be available in combination. Consult factory.
• Over range is not to exceed 10% FS above full range.
• Calibration is for water. Specify for other liquids.
• Add TOTAL height of liquid above the pressure connection to determine correct range (dial scale).
For elevated tanks substract the tank elevation from gage reading to determine actual tank level.

Shipping Dimensions
Item Dimensions:16 x 11 x 5-1/2 in. (406 x 279 x 140 mm).
Explosion-proof models: 12 x 12 x 9 in. (305 x 305 x 229 mm).
Shipping Weights
Item Weight: 8 lb. (3.6 kg) approximately.
Explosion-proof models: 22 lb. (10 kg) approximately.
 - 102 -

Internal Wiring

How to Order
Specify model number. NOTE: No designator is required for Standard configurations. Also, list options in alphabetical
order (A to Z). Place a dash (–) between each option. See example below.

Tamperproof Contact Accessory

 SECTI ON 20 VI BRATI ON, TI M E AND SPEED

Tachometers - Analog
97026 Tachometers and Tach/Hourmeters – AT and ATH Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Tachometers - Digital
9004 Selectronic® Digital Tachometer – MT90 Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
96115 Digital Tachometer and Hourmeter
With Adjustable Overspeed Set Point – Model MTH6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
97050 Digital Tachometer and Hourmeter with Adjustable
Overspeed Trip Point – SHD30 and SHD30-45 Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Speed Switches
97118 Electronic Speed Switches - HD9063 Series, OS77D Series and SS300 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Hourmeters - Electromechanical
97030 Hourmeters – TM Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Timers - Mechanical
96095 Time Switches
Models 5T, 15T, 12T and 24T 12 or 24 Hour and 5 or 15 Minute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Vibration Switches
05062 Electronic Vibration Switch (EVS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
96013 Shock and Vibration Switch – VS2 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
94092 Shock and Vibration Control Switch – VS94 Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALY LEFT BLANK.

 97026
- 103 - 05-03-11
Section 20

Tachometers and Tach/Hourmeters – AT and ATH Series

Features
• 4000 RPM –0 to 100,000 hours
• Sensing from Magnetic Sensor, Battery
Charging Alternator or Ignition Signal
• High Visibility Analog Readout
• Air Core Movement
• Easy Calibration through Dip Switches
• Through Dial Lighting
• Powered by 11-28 VDC Battery Available
*

* Products covered by this bulletin conform with comply with European Council electromagnetic compatibility directive 89/336/EEC, except as noted.

The AT Series tachometers are rugged, transistorized instruments with solid-state circuitry for indication of engine RPM. They are equipped with a bracket
for mounting into a standard 3- 3/8 in. (86 mm) dash mounting hole. A full 270° sweep of the pointer gives an accurate indication on a large easy–to–read
scale and the dial can be illuminated for night reading. The ATH Series models are also equipped with hourmeter to record the elapsed running time of an
engine.
Models available for Alternator, Magnetic Sensor or Ignition signal These instruments are designed to function from pulses generated by an alter-
nator with 4, 8, 12, 14, or 16 poles on the rotor. The pulses can also be obtained from the ring gear of an engine by means of an electromagnetic sensor
(magnetic pickup). Murphy’s magnetic sensor driven models are designed to function with flywheels having anywhere from 50 to 304 teeth. Ignition sig-
nal model available for 4, 6 or 8 cylinder, spark-ignited engines. All models are for negative ground, positive ground or isolated electrical systems and are
protected against reverse polarity hookup.
All models are powered by a 11-28 VDC battery and are reverse polarity protected.
Series Models
ATS Series Magnetic Sensor Signal Tach ATA Series Alternator Signal Tachometer
50-304 flywheel teeth* 11-28 VDC, 2733 Hz to 13.62 kHz @ 4000 RPM 3-32 pulses* 12 VDC, 137 to 1330 Hz @ 4000 RPM
ATHS Series Magnetic Sensor Signal Tachometer/Hourmeter ATHA Series Alternator Signal Tachometer/Hourmeter
50-304 flywheel teeth* 11-28 VDC, 2733 Hz to 13.62 kHz @ 4000 RPM 3-32 pulses* 12 VDC, 137 to 1330 Hz @ 4000 RPM or 193 to 1815 Hz @
4000 RPM
* To determine pulses per engine revolution, work the formulas on the back
page and use the pulses per revolution number to determine if the tachome- ATHI Series Ignition Signal Tachometer/Hourmeter
ter can be used for your application. 4, 6 or 8 cylinder engines @ 4000 RPM

Bezel Styles

Applications
These tachometers are specially designed for use on truck, marine, industrial, or stationary engines.
Dimensions
 - 104 -

Specifications How to Order

Magnetic Sensor Driven Models Order the Tachometer or Tachometer/Hourmeter by model number.
Magnetic Sensor Tachometer 4000 RPM; 50 - 304 flywheel teeth 11-28 VDC
Power Input: 11-28VDC (70mA – 120mA except lamp load) Model # Designation
Backlight: 3.4W T-10 wedge base bulb ATS-40 Bright Stainless Steel Bezel
RPM Input Signal Voltage: 1.5Vrms minimum ATS-40-A Black Stainless Steel Bezel
ATS-40-B SAE Bright Stainless Steel Bezel
Accuracy: Tachometer: +2% full scale ATS-40-C SAE Black Stainless Steel Bezel
Hourmeter: +0.01% hours, +1 count Magnetic Sensor Tach/Hourmeter 4000 RPM; 50-304 flywheel teeth 11-28 VDC
ATHS-40 Bright Stainless Steel Bezel
Temperature Range: -40oC to +82oC (no permanent damage shall occur) ATHS-40-A Black Stainless Steel Bezel
o ATHS-40-B SAE Bright Stainless Steel Bezel
Dial (Face Plate): 270 sweep with white numerals (over black back-
ground) ATHS-40-C SAE Black Stainless Steel Bezel
Bezel: 304 stainless steel for bright and IS 513 E.E.E. CRCA steel for Alternator Signal Tachometer 4000 RPM; 3 - 32 pulses 11-28 VDC
ATA-40 Bright Stainless Steel Bezel
black ATA-40-A Black Stainless Steel Bezel
Scale: 0-4000RPM ATA-40-B SAE Bright Stainless Steel Bezel
Case Material: Plastic Alternator Signal Tach/Hourmeter 4000 RPM; 3 - 32 pulses 11-28 VDC
Hourmeter Range: 99999.9 hours in 0.1 increments. ATHA-40 Bright Stainless Steel Bezel
ATHA-40-A Black Stainless Steel Bezel
ATHA-40-B SAE Bright Stainless Steel Bezel
Alternator Driven and Ignition Driven Models ATHA-40-C SAE Black Stainless Steel Bezel

Power Input: 11-28VDC (70mA-120mA except lamp load)

Backlight: 3.4W T-10 wedge base bulb
RPM Input Signal Voltage: V low: 0.5V max, V high: 8.0V min.
Accuracy: Tachometer: +2% full scale
Hourmeter: +0.01% hours, +1 count
Temperature Range: -40oC to +82oC (no permanent damage shall occur)
Dial (Face Plate): 270o sweep with white numerals (over black back-
ground)
Bezel: 304 stainless steel for bright and IS 513 E.E.E. CRCA steel for
black
Scale: 0-4000RPM
Case Material: Plastic
Hourmeter Range: 99999.9 hours in 0.1 increments.
 9004
- 105 - Revised 07-06
Section 20

Selectronic® Digital Tachometer – MT90 Model

Features
• ±1 RPM Accuracy
• Easy Calibration
• Clear-Read LCD Display
• Back Light for Night Viewing (Battery Powered
models)
• Input Source Can Be a Magnetic Pickup or
Engine Alternator
• Power Supplied by Magnetic Pickup or 12, 24,
or 32 VDC Battery System

The Murphy Selectronic MT90 digital tachometer offers high accuracy and dependability resulting from use of a quartz
crystal time based and digital, solid-state electronics.
Tachometer power is supplied by either a Murphy magnetic pickup, mounted at the flywheel ring-gear of an engine, or by a
12, 24 or 32 volt DC battery system.
RPM data is supplied by either a Murphy magnetic pickup or by the alternator in your battery charging circuit. The MT90
tachometer also has back-lighting for easy readings in low lit areas; this lighting requires a battery power source.
RPM Calibration
The MT90 is calibrated to engine RPM by setting a series of calibration rotary switches on the back of the tachometer. The
proper switch sequence for the engine is determined by (1) the number of ring gear teeth for the magnetic pickup, or (2) by
the ratio of alternator to engine pulley diameter, and the number of poles of the alternator.
Applications
Typical applications include: Generators, Compressors, Industrial Engines, Oil Field Equipment, Marine Vessels, Vehicles,
Farm Equipment, and Construction Equipment.
Dimensions

Magnetic Pickups
Pickup Models Total Length Threaded Length Thread Size
MP3298 * 3 in. (76 mm) 3 in. (76 mm) 5/8-18 UNF

MP7906† 3 in. (76 mm) 3 in. (76 mm) 3/4-16 UNF

MP7905 ‡ 4-1/2 in. (114 mm) 4-1/2 in. (114 mm) 3/4-16 UNF

* Replaces 20-01-0080 and MP100. Lead wire hookup (12 in. [305 mm]).
† Replaces 20-01-0081. Lead wire hookup (12 in. [305 mm]).
‡ Replaces 20-01-0082. Lead wire hookup (12 in. [305 mm]).
 - 106 -

Specifications
Signal Input Voltage:4 to 35 Vrms from a magnetic pickup or alternator.* Case: 1018 polycarbonate/polyester blend.
Pulses per Revolution: 3 to 999. Lens: Polycarbonate.
Power Requirements: Bezel: #430 Stainless Steel.
• Pickup Power: 4-35Vrms*. Display: LCD, 4-digit, seven segment.
• Battery Power:8-40 VDC (12, 24, 32 volt). Operating Temperature: -4 to 158°F (-20 to 70°C).
Current: Storage Temperature: -13 to 185°F (-25 to 85°C).
• Tach back-light Off, 4mA @ 40 VDC. Mounting Hole: 3-7/16in. (87 mm).
• Tach back-light On, 25 mA @ 40 VDC. Shipping Weight: 14 oz. (0.4 kg).
* See “Special Note” for Magnetic Pickup Powered MT90 applications Shipping Dimensions: 5-1/2 x 5-1/2 x 5-1/2in. (140 x 140 x 140 mm)

How to Order
To order a MT90 for your application, use the diagram below.

To order a magnetic pickup, specify model number. Example: MP3298

 96115
- 107 - Revised 02-04
Section 20

Digital Tachometer and Hourmeter

With Adjustable Overspeed Set Point – Model MTH6
Features
• Tachometer and Hourmeter With Over-
speed Shutdown or Alarm Switch
• 3-1/2 Inches (89 mm) Diameter Dial
• Reads RPM Data from a Magnetic
Pickup or Battery Charging Alternator
• Powered by 8 to 40 VDC
• Large 5-Digit LCD Display
• Maintains Hours Count When Power Is
Lost
• Front Panel Programming
• Hours Can Be Reset to Zero

This microprocessor-based digital tachometer and hourmeter with a built-in overspeed switch is highly accurate and
dependable. It measures speed and running hours and can give an alarm or shut down the engine on overspeed.
The MTH6 case is polycarbonate, and its dial measures 3-1/2 in. (89 mm) in diameter.
RPM data for the tachometer and overspeed switch is supplied by a magnetic pickup or battery charging alternator. The
magnetic pickup is installed into the flywheel housing of an internal combustion engine. The starter ring gear acts upon the
magnetic pickup to generate a voltage pulse each time a gear tooth passes the end of the sensor.
Applications
• Industrial Engines • Marine Engines
• Generators • Vehicles
• Compressors • Farm Equipment
• Oil Field Equipment • Construction Equipment
Basic Operation
During normal operation, the MTH6 displays RPM. Its five-digit, liquid crystal display is updated every second. When the
MTH6 is displaying hours and a speed signal is present, the far left digit and decimal point will flash indicating the hourme-
ter is operating.
The overspeed set point and running hours can be viewed by manipulating three membrane switches located on the MTH6
front panel.
When the overspeed set point is met an LED, also located on the front panel, lights.
Specifications
Power Requirements: 8-40 VDC (12, 24 or 32 VDC systems). Pulses per Revolution: 4 to 255.
Maximum Current: Tachometer Range: 0 to 65,535 RPM.
12 VDC: 0.011 A, backlight Off; Tachometer Accuracy: ±1% of the display reading or -2 RPM whichever
0.025 A, backlight On. is greater.
24 VDC: 0.008 A, backlight Off; Input Frequency Range: 25 Hz to 20 kHz.
0. 015 A, backlight On.
Hourmeter Range: 0 to 99999 hrs.
32 VDC: 0.007 A, backlight Off;
0. 010 A, backlight On. Hourmeter Resolution: ±0.1 Hour up to 9999.9; ±1 hour 10,000 and up.
Reset Hourmeter: Apply temporary ground to terminal #5 to reset hours
Operating Temperature: -4°to 158°F (-20°to 70°C).
to zero.
Storage Temperature: -40°to 185°F(-40°to 85°C). Shipping Weight: 14 oz. (435 g).
Case: 1018 Polycarbonate/Polyester blend.
Shipping Dimensions: 5-1/2 x 5-1/2 x 5-1/2 in. (140 x 140 x 140 mm).
Mounting Hole Dim.: 3-3/8 in. (86 mm) Dia.
Speed Input: 4.5 Vrms minimum.
Overspeed Switch Rating: 2 A, 50 VDC.
Overspeed Range: 0 to 9000 RPM.
 - 108 -

Easy-Calibration
The MTH6 calibration is simple. The operator enters the number of pulses per engine revolution and the overspeed set
point value using the membrane-switches located on the front of the MTH6.
Dimensions

Typical Wiring Diagram How to Order

Order by model designation.
 97050
- 109 - Revised 07-04
Section 20

Digital Tachometer and Hourmeter with Adjustable

Overspeed Trip Point – SHD30 and SHD30-45 Models
Features
• Normally Open and Normally Closed Over-
speed Alarm or Shutdown Switch (Standard)
• RPM Data and Power Supplied by Magnetic
Pickup or Capacitor Discharge (CD) Ignition
• Accurate to ±0.5% of Display Reading
• Hours Can Be Preset and Reset to Zero
• Approved for Class I, Division 2, Groups C & D
Hazardous Areas

When installed per Murphy Drawing 20-08-0258

The SHD30 and SHD30-45 are microprocessor based tachometers with hourmeter and an overspeed trip point. The trip point can be connected as either
a form “c” relay output or as a normally open SCR output for alarm or shutdown on overspeed.
The SHD30 features a panel-mounting design, plastic enclosure that is 5-1/16 (129 mm) long and 4-1/4 in. (108 mm) high.
The SHD30-45 has the same enclosure, but it also has a backplate with studs to mount like a SHD-45, OPLFC.
The SHD30 models power and RPM data are supplied by either a magnetic pickup or a capacitor discharge (CD) ignition. The hourmeter is adjustable to
a preset time and resettable to zero. Should power be lost, on-board batteries maintain the run hours display and allow for resetting the overspeed relay
output.
Basic Operation
When a tach signal is present the SHD30 models display rpm. When a tach signal is not present, the display is blank unless the Read Hours membrane
key, on the faceplate is pressed and held.
The five-digit, liquid crystal display is updated every second. The run hours, overspeed set point and current pulses per engine revolution can be dis-
played by manipulating the membrane switches. Run hours can be displayed even after power is lost. The run hours display can be configured to alter-
nate with the RPM display.
Applications
• Gas Compressors • Industrial Engines
• Oil Field Equipment • Generators
Easy-to-Calibrate
The SHD30 models calibration is done by entering the number of pulses per engine revolution using the Pulses per Revolution and Overspeed Setpoint
membrane keys, on the faceplate. The number of pulses is determined by the number of cylinders, cycles and ignition features. It is also determined by
the number of ring gear teeth of the engine’s flywheel on a magnetic pickup system.
Presetting and resetting running hours is done from the back and front of the SHD30 models.
Specifications
Power input: Ignition Frequency Range: 3 to 666 Hz.
CD ignition: 90 to 350 VDC. Magnetic Pickup Frequency Range: 1 to 10 kHz.
150 µA typical @ 90 VDC; Overspeed Output:
300 µA @ 350 VDC.
Connected to S.C.R. (Silicon Controlled Rectifier) terminals:
Magnetic Pickup: 5 to 120 Vrms. 0.5 A, 350 VDC continuous.
325 µA typical @ 5 Vrms, 100 Hz;
450 µA typical @ 5 Vrms, 1 kHz; Connected to Form “C” Relay terminals:
Relay Contact, 0.5 A, 30 VDC, 125 VAC resistive.
1 mA typical @ 5 Vrms, 5 kHz;
2 mA typical @ 5 Vrms, 10 kHz; Tachometer Accuracy: ±0.5% of the display reading or ±1 RPM which-
15 mW max. @ 5 Vrms, 10 kHz; ever is greater.
2.8 W max. @ 120 Vrms, 10 kHz. Hourmeter Range: 0 to 65535 hrs.
Backup Batteries: 2 replaceable, long life Lithium batteries, Panasonic Hourmeter Accuracy: ±15 minutes per year.
CR2032 or equivalent, 3 V, 220 mAh power. Shelf life expectancy 10 Laboratory Approvals: CSA (Canadian Standards Association)
years. approved for Class I, Division 2, Groups C & D hazardous areas.
Operating Temperature: -4° to 158°F (-20° to 70°C). Shipping Weight: 1 lb (0.5 kg).
Storage Temperature: -40° to 300°F (-40° to 150°C). Shipping Dimensions: 9-1/4 x 8-1/4 x 5-1/4 in. (235 x 210 x 133 mm).
Case Material: Plastic.
 - 110 -

Dimensions
SHD-30 SHD-30-45

Typical Wiring Diagram

How to Order
Specify model number:
SHD30 = Tach/hourmeter w/overspeed
SHD30-45 = Tach/hourmeter w/overspeed to mount like SHD45 or
OPLFC
00-00-9389 = Panasonic CR2032 or equivalent backup battery
(2 required)

WARNING: In hazardous areas the overspeed

relay contact is certified for use ONLY with Mur-
phy non-incendive or intrinsically safe products.
In non-hazardous areas overspeed relay contact
may be used to switch electromechanical Tattle-
tale® or Magnetic Switches that do not exceed
the relay contact rating: 1 A, 30 VDC; 0.3 A, 110
VDC; 0.5 A, 125 VAC. However, the preferred out-
put to switch electromechanical Tattletale® or
Magnetic Switches is the N.O. SCR.

Refer to SHD3-97051N for more details.

 97118
- 111 - Revised 10-03
Section 20

Electronic Speed Switches

HD9063 Series, OS77D Series and SS300 Series
Features
• Models for Overspeed, Crank
Termination, or Crank Termination and
Overspeed
• Solid State Construction
• Compact Design
• Field Adjustable Set Points
• High Noise Immunity

Murphy Electronic Speed Switches are available in various configurations to cover a wide variety of applications. These compact devices receive their
input signal from various sources depending upon the particular speed switch model and application. They are available in single or dual switch point
models and the switch point(s) are field adjustable.
Models are available in self-contained enclosures and as PC-board design for inclusion in your control cabinet. All Murphy speed switches are designed
to operate in harsh environments and have high electrical noise immunity.
Series Models Available
SS300 Series: Single set point speed switch with SPDT relay dry contact output.
OS77D Series: Single set point speed sensing module, with a transistor output.
HD9063 Series: Dual set point speed switch in a pc board configuration and relay outputs.
Applications
Murphy speed switches applications include operating alarms, equipment shutdown and modulating control devices. They are ideal for disconnecting
starter cranking on auto start systems or overspeed switching:
• Generators • Pumps
• Compressors • Vehicles
• Industrial Engines • Farm Equipment
Select a Speed Switch
In selecting the best Speed Switch for your application, the following fac- Alternator Output: Most industrial engine alternators have an “auxiliary”
tors should be considered: or “tachometer” tap. This tap can provide the signal source for speed
• Number of Switch Points. switches and tachometers.
How many switch points are needed to perform the speed switching Pulley Ratio x No. of Alternator Poles x RPM Set Point
Set Point Frequency in Hz = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
function you require? 120
• Available Signal Sources.
Ignition Output: This battery ignition signal is commonly used on gaso-
The signal source must provide a minimum frequency and a minimum,
line and natural gas fueled type engines. The tap is usually located either
but less than maximum, voltage as required by the selected speed
on the distributor or on the ignition coil. The ignition can be breaker point
switch.
type or all electronic.
• What Is the Frequency Output of the Signal Source?
For 2-cycle
The following signal sources can be used with most Murphy Electronic
Set Point Frequency in Hz = No.
Speed Switches. of Cylinders x RPM Set Point-
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
60
Note: they may additionally provide the signal and/or power
source for some Murphy Tachometer/TACHSWICH™ instruments. For 4-cycle
Magnetic Sensor: The sensor is usually mounted through the flywheel RPM x No. of Cylinders
--------------------------------------------------------------
housing so that the sensor tip is in close proximity to the ring gear teeth. 2
Set Point Frequency in Hz = --------------------------------------------------------------
60
Output voltage is dependent upon the amount of the gap between the sen-
sor tip and the gear tooth. Signal Generators: Add-on signal generators produce a voltage and fre-
No. Gear Teeth x RPM Set Point quency output. Match this output to the requirements of the speed switch
Set Point Frequency in Hz = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
60 selected.
 - 112 -

SS300 Series
The SS300 Series are single set point speed switches with SPDT relay dry contact output. The trip point is set by a potentiometer. An LED indicates when
the signal source is present. A second LED turns on when the trip point is reached. See Table 1 for available models and requirements. An optional time
delay is on board to delay operation of the relay for 2-6 seconds after the set point has been reached.
The SS300 Series speed switch is intended for installation within a weatherproof enclosure to protect it from rain, dust, etc.
Application
Overspeed shutdown. Shuts down the engine if RPM exceeds the pre-set limit.
Speed sensitive pull-in/drop-out. Engage or disengage PTO’s, 4-wheel drives, other switch points, etc. according to speed of engine being monitored.
Engine and transmission alarms/shutdowns. Oil pressure in some engines and transmissions varies widely between running and idle speeds. The
SS300 Series can select between two pressure switch set points according to speed of the engine or transmission and thus give maximum protection to
the equipment while at operating RPM and eliminate nuisance alarms when at idle.
Adjustable differential model. The (“AD”) can be adjusted to change the speed range over which the pull-in and drop-out differential of the relay will
operate. A typical application is to insure that engine speed is above a minimum RPM before applying a load but allows a drop in speed of several hun-
dred RPM without disconnecting the load
Table 1: Models Available and Input Signal
Voltage
Model Number Distributor Ignition Magnetic Pickup Alternator 12 24
SS300 (std. model)   
SS300-LF (low frequency)    
SS300-AD (adjustable differential)   
SS300-AD-LF (low frq. & Adjst. diff.)    
Specifications
Power Requirements: Reset Differential Magnetic Pickup Signal Models:
12 VDC (9-16 VDC). • “Standard” Models: 2 Hz Differential.
24 VDC (18-30 VDC).
• “AD” Models (Adjustable Differential): 650-8900 Hz Adjustable
Frequency Signal:
Voltage (all models): Reset Differential Alternator Models:
• “LF” Models (Low Frequency): 2 Hz Differential
• Minimum Input Voltage Signal: 4.5 Vrms.
• “AD-LF” Models (Adjustable Differential Low Frequency): 50-1900
• Maximum Input Voltage Signal: 50 Vrms. Hz Adjustable.
Maximum Current 12V 24V Output: Relay contact, SPDT, resistive load, 6 A, 30 VDC.
Pull In 46 mA 46 mA Time Delay: When terminal 7 is grounded, the relay operation is delayed
for 2-6 seconds after rpm set point is reached.
Pickup only 10.5 mA 16 mA
Adjustment: 20–turn potentiometer(s).
Frequency Range in Hz Model Number Temperature Range: -4° to 185°F (-20° to 85°C).
Relative Humidity: 0 to 95% Non-condensing.
25-2000 SS300-LF; SS300-AD-LF
Case: Black, ABS plastic.
625-9000 SS300-AD; SS300

Dimensions How to Order

To order, specify the model number and voltage (see Table 1, above).
Example: SS300-LF-12
Shipping Weight (all models): 0.24 lb. (108 g).
Shipping Dimensions (all models): 8 x 4 x 4-1/2 in. (203 x 102 x
114 mm).
 - 113 -

HD9063 Series
The HD9063 Series is a unitized two set point speed switch with SPDT relay outputs. HD9063 is a PC-board configuration with standoffs for mounting in
a control panel or cabinet.
The HD9063 provides crank disconnect and overspeed functions. Trip points can be field adjusted on all models. LED’s next to the set point potentiome-
ters indicate that the trip point has been reached and the relay(s) have operated. An overspeed test circuit is built-in; it will actuate the output relay at a
point 10% below actual overspeed set point.
Application
Crank disconnect/overspeed model is typically used to disconnect the starter on automatic start engine applications and to shutdown the engine if an
overspeed situation occurs. Re-engagement of the starter is inhibited until RPM returns virtually to zero. Typical applications include: standby generator
sets; pumps and compressors.
Specifications
Power Supply: Voltage: 8-30 VDC. • Overspeed: 1,100-10,000 Hz.
Maximum Current: 150 mA. Reset Differential, Magnetic Pickup Signal Models
Frequency Signal: (Voltage, Magnetic Pickup Signal Models): • HD9063 Model
• Minimum: 0.35 Vrms. • Crank Disconnect: Dropout 160 Hz ± 5%.
• Maximum: 60 Vrms. • Overspeed: 200 Hz Differential.
Maximum Current, Magnetic Pickup Signal Models: 4.8 µA. Output: Relay Contact, SPDT, Resistive Load: (2) 5 A 30 VDC.
Adjustment Range, Magnetic Pickup Signal Models: Adjustment: (2) 270°–turn potentiometer.
• HD9063 Model Temperature Range: 14 to 158°F (-10 to 70°C).
• Crank Disconnect: 250-6,000 Hz.
Mounting Dimensions/Wiring
How to Order
Specify model numbers below:
HD9063: Two set points; PC board mounting; crank disconnect and over-
speed.
Shipping Weight (all models): 2 lbs. (0.90 Kg).
Shipping Dimensions (all models): 10 x 9 x 6 in. (254 x 229 x 152 mm).

OS77D Series
The OS77D Series single set point speed switch is a compact all-electronic speed sensing module. It
can be panel mounted via its trip set point potentiometer. It is field adjustable and gives a transistor out-
put when tripped. Relay models available.
Models are available with Normally Open or Normally Closed circuit and with or without re-crank feature
which inhibits starter re-engagement until the engine speed is near zero RPM.
Application
Overspeed shutdown. Activates engine shutdown circuit on engine overspeed.
Operate PTO's or drive circuits. Engage or disengage engine PTO, 4-wheel drives, or other control
circuits according to RPM monitored.
Disconnect engine cranking when engine starts.
 - 114 -

Specifications
Power Supply: Voltage: 7-28 VDC. Adjustment Range, Magnetic Pickup Signal Models: 1000-10,000 Hz
Maximum Current: 100 mA. Adjustment Range, Distributor Ignition Models: 40-400 Hz
Frequency Signal: Reset Differential, Magnetic Pickup Signal Models
Voltage, Magnetic Pickup Signal Models • Non-recrank model: 10 Hz Differential
• Minimum: 1.2 Vrms
• Recrank model: dropout 54 Hz
• Maximum: 30 Vrms
Reset Differential, Distributor Ignition Models
Voltage, Distributor Ignition Models • Non-recrank model: 10 Hz Differential
• Minimum: 6 Vrms
• Recrank model: Dropout 2.4 Hz
• Maximum: 30 Vrms
Output: Transistor Sink to Ground Resistive Load: 2 A, 28 VDC
Maximum Current, Magnetic Pickup Signal Models: 0.12 mA Adjustment: 270°–turn potentiometer
Maximum Current, Distributor Ignition Models: 0.12 mA
Temperature Range: -13° to 185°F (-25° to 85°C)

Dimensions

How to Order
Specify model numbers below:
OS77D-900NTO: Normally Open; 1000—10,000 Hz, magnetic sensor
input.
OS77I-040NTO: Normally Open; 40—400 Hz, distributor ignition input.
OS77D-900NTC: Normally Closed; 1000—10,000 Hz, magnetic sensor
input.
OS77D-900RTC: Normally Closed; 1000—10,000 Hz, max. with recrank
feature.
NOTE: See “Specifications” for individual model specifications.
Shipping Weight (all models): 1 lb. (0.45 Kg)
Shipping Dimensions (all models): 8 x 4 x 4-1/2 in. (203 x 102 x 114
mm)
 97030
- 115 - Revised 11-01
Section 20

Hourmeters – TM Series
Features
• 2 in. (51 mm) Diameter Dial
• Tamperproof and Environmentally
Sealed
• Mechanical Counter–No Battery Needed
to Maintain Elapsed Time
• Reversed Polarity Protected
• Quartz-Crystal Time Base for Accurate
Long-Term Timekeeping
• Powered by 12 to 24 VDC
*

* Products covered by this bulletin conform with comply with European Council electromagnetic compatibility directive 89/336/EEC, except as noted.
The CE mark does not apply to the TM612 and TM624 models.

The TM Series hourmeters record the operating time of vehicles or powered equipment. They are elec-
tromechanical and have a quartz base time counter that insures accuracy (better than ±0.02% over the
entire range). They can record up to 99,999.9 hours (9,999.9 for TM612/624) and include an automatic
recycle to zero hours feature. The TM Series models have a shock-proof and tamperproof, totally sealed
case made of an engineered plastic. These small, light weight time meters are rugged and durable. They
are the answer to applications requiring a low DC power, reliable hourmeter.
The TM612/624 model includes a 3-hole mounting shock ring for extreme-shock protection.
Basic Models
6-Digits Hourmeters TM4594 SAE Bright Stainless Steel Bezel
Model Bezel Type TM4595 SAE Stainless Steel Black Bezel
TM4592 Bright Stainless Steel Bezel 5-Digits Hourmeter with Shock Ring Mounting
TM4593 Black Stainless Steel Bezel TM612/624 3-Hole Mount, Black Bezel
Applications
These hourmeters can be used on any engine where operating time needs to be recorded. All it requires is a DC power source (refer to
Specifications, below).
Outstanding Features
• Solid-State Electronic Drive Circuit • Sealed Against Moisture and Dirt
• Quartz-Crystal for Accurate Timing • Indicates Operating Time in Hours and Tenths
• Quiet Operation–Permanently Lubricated • No Battery Back Up Required
• High-Impact, Tamperproof Plastic Case • Made in the U.S.A.
Specifications
Power Input: 12 to 24 VDC Bezel: Stainless Steel.
Power Consumption: Less than 0.03 W @ 12 VDC; 0.4 W @ 24 VDC. Terminations: 1/4 in. (6 mm) male blade terminals.
Accuracy: ±0.02% over entire range. TM4592/4595 Shipping Weight: 5 ozs. (140 g).
Temperature Range: -40°F to 185°F (-40°C to +85°C). Shipping Dimensions: 3-1/8 x 3 x 3 in. (79 x 76 x 76 mm) approximately.
Dial (Face Plate): White numerals (over black background). TM612/624 Shipping Weight: 8 ozs. (230 g).
Time Scale: TM612/624 Shipping Dimensions: 5 x 5 x 3-1/4 in. (127 x 127 x 83 mm)
TM4592-95 models: 6-digits 99,999.9 hours; approximately.
TM612/624 models: 5-digits 9,999.9 hours.
Automatic recycle to zero.
Vibration Resistance: Withstands 10 to 75 Hz@ 1 to 8 G’s.
Case Material: Plastic.
 - 116 -

Dimensions

Typical Wiring Diagrams

WARNING: Turn the power source
OFF before wiring.

How to Order
Example: TM4592

Model Designation
Model Description
TM4592 6-digits w/Bright Stainless Steel Bezel
TM4593 6-digits w/Black Stainless Steel Bezel
TM4594 6-digits w/SAE Bright Stainless Steel Bezel
TM4595 6-digits w/SAE Stainless Steel Black Bezel
TM612/624 5-digits w/Shock Ring Mount Black Bezel
00000355 Shock Ring only for TM612/624
 96095
- 117 - Revised 10-03
Section 20

Time Switches
Models 5T, 15T, 12T and 24T 12 or 24 Hour and 5 or 15 Minute
Features
• Two Versions Available:
1. Hour Switch for Setting Run Time
and Shutdown of Equipment
2. Minute Switch for a Short Interrup-
tion of SWICHGAGE® Circuits on
Test or Start-up
• Spring Wound, No Electric Power
Required
• Precision Movement Can Be Set to Zero
at Any Time
• Built-in Stop Prevents Overwinding

Murphy Time Switches can automatically start or stop engines or electrical motors after a predetermined time. These time
switches can be wired for a open or closed circuit when time expires. They require no electrical current to operate and have
an SPDT contact arrangement. These switches feature a precision movement that gives years of reliable service. A built-in
stop prevents overwinding.
The 12T (12 hour) and 24T (24 hour) time switches are enclosed in a NEMA 4 weatherproof enclosure. A hinged, gasketed
cover and 1/2 NPT conduit connection allow for a dust tight installation. The enclosure includes a clasp and eye for padlock
to prevent unauthorized operation. Instructions for popular engine applications are secured inside of the lid.
The 5T (5 minute) and 15T (15 minute) timers mount directly in control panels for short range timing with manual reset.
These switches are perfect for disconnecting shutdown circuits while equipment is being started.
Applications
Murphy Time Switches are designed for use in the oil field, irrigation systems or anywhere equipment must operate or be
controlled for a predetermined time. Mounted on a post or in a panel away from vibration and shock, these time switches
give accurate, long term service.
Dimensions
12T and 24T 5TWP and 15TWP 5T and 15T
 - 118 -

Typical Wiring Diagrams

WARNING Before beginning installation of this Murphy product:
 Disconnect all electrical power to the machine.
 Make sure the machine cannot operate during installation.
 Follow all safety warnings of the machine manufacturer.
 Read and follow all installation instructions.

Specifications How to Order

Range: To order time switches, specify as follows:
12T: 0-12 hours in 15 minute intervals.
24T: 0-24 hours in 30 minute intervals.
5T: 0-5 minutes.
15T: 0-15 minutes.
Contact (all models): SPDT, rated 5 A @ 480 VAC; 10 A @ 250 VAC; 15
A @ 48 VDC.
Shipping Weight: 12T, 24T: 4 lbs. 12 oz. (2.15 kg). 5T and 15T: 6 oz.
(11.66 g).
Shipping Dimensions: 12T, 24T: 9-1/4 x 8-1/4 x 5-1/2 in. (235 x 210 x
140 mm).
5T and 15T: 3 x 2-3/4 x 2-3/4 in. (76 x 70 x 70 mm).
 05062
- 119 - 11-11-11
Section 20

Electronic Vibration Switch (EVS)

Features
• Piezoelectric-crystal internal sensor with built-in
microelectronics for reduced noise sensitivity
• Electronically integrated output signal that
measures and trips on velocity
• Adjustable calibrated set-point controls
• Shutdown set-point measured in velocity
• 4-20 mA output for continuous monitoring
capability
• Solid-state outputs for setpoint trip
• Adjustable time delay to prevent false tripping
on high-vibration start-ups or non-repetitive
transient events
• Self-test and calibration
The Electronic Vibration Switch (EVS) protects against equipment failure by monitoring velocity-based vibration levels
and providing an early warning or shutdown when abnormal vibration is detected.
The EVS product can be connected to Murphy’s TTD™ annunciator, Centurion™ or Millennium™ controllers for increased
functionality. It also complements Murphy’s VS2™ switch, which is designed to detect an abnormal shock or excessive
vibration due to equipment failure and to shutdown other equipment in a system to prevent further damage.

NOTE: For proper operation, refer to document “00-02-0744 - EVS Installation and Operations Manual”.

The EVS product can be used on any equipment where The EVS product can monitor and alert the operator of
abnormal vibration could lead to equipment damage, abnormal vibration caused by a variety of possible factors,
including: including:
• Cooling fans • Imbalance and misalignments
• Engines • Worn sleeve bearings
• Pumps • Broken tie down bolts
• Compressors • Worn ball or roller bearings
• Gear boxes • Gear mesh
• Motors • Blade pass frequencies
• Generator sets • Detonation
• Broken parts

EVS – ____
How to Order EVS Product Table
A=Analog (24VDC external power, switch and 4-20mA Area Classifica-
Model: Model Power Bandwidth Analog Out tion
S output)
= Standard (24VDC external power, switch only)
A = Analog (24VDC external power, switch and 4-20mA output) EVS-A 24 VDC 6-500Hz Yes CL I, Div 2,
S=Standard (24VDC
SB = Internet Battery external
(switch only) power, switch only) Gr B,C,D
S-EX = Standard (24VDC external poser switch only, Div 1 Housing) EVS-S 24 VDC 6-500Hz No CL I, Div 2,
A-EX = Analog (24VDC external power, switch and 4-20mA output, Gr B, C, D
Div 1 Housing)
 - 120 -

Product Dimensions and Sensitivity Axis

Specifications
Environmental LED Outputs
• Operating Temperature:-40°F to 185°F (-40°C and +85°C). Alarm LED output
• Humidity: 0-95% non-condensing • Red LED
• Vibration: 30 g’s (Mechanical stability) • LED strobing for first 5 minutes after entering Alarm mode
Power Requirements • Flashing thereafter until Reset activated
Murphy EVS-A, EVS-S – External DC Power • Strobe rate: 2mSec on, every 0.5 ±0.25 seconds
• External power: 8-32 VDC • Flash rate: 2mSec on, every 6 ±1 seconds
• Input Current: 100mA Max Power LED output
Product Accuracy • Green LED
• ±5% of full scale at 1.5 ips and 21 deg C. • Flash Duration: 2mSec
• ±5% Variation over temperature from 21 deg C, over operating range. Murphy EVS-A and EVS-S
• Integration Stage End-to-End Noise: <0.01 ips RMS • Flash once every 6 ±1 seconds
Murphy EVS-A and EVS-S 4-20mA output (EVS-A only)
• ±5%, at Bandwidth of 6 to 500 Hz from 50Hz calibration point • Power obtained from power supply
• ±3dB at Bandwidth of 3 to 875 Hz, worst case • Loop Resistance: 600 ohms max at 24 V and 20mA.
Trigger Feature • Current loop accuracy ±5% from internal setpoint
• Trigger level between 0.1 and 1.5 inches per second (ips) Peak • 20 ma corresponds to 1.5 ips Peak
• Trigger set with single turn adjustable PC board mount potentiometer • 4 ma corresponds to 0 ips Peak
• PC board marked with 15 marks corresponding to 0.1 to 1.5 in 0.1 Reset
increments • Local reset switch w/momentary contact
Time Delay Feature • External reset: Available via header and will require an external relay or
• Adjustable from 0 to 10 seconds pushbutton contact to ground to activate the reset.
• Set with adjustable single turn PC board mount potentiometer • Activation Period: Reset must be active for 0.5 sec. minimum to reset
• PC board marked with 11 marks corresponding to 0 to 10 seconds in 1 the switch.
second intervals Circuit Functional blocks
Output Charge Amp interface Band-aids Filter Integration
• Normally-Open and Normally-Closed outputs simultaneously available • The input Transducer is an integrated PZT element for measuring
• Open-collector outputs sink to Common Ground acceleration with an internal charge converter.
• 50 mA sink capacity • Maximum G level of 13 g’s at 500hz
• Input voltage: 40 VDC maximum Band-aids Filter
• Switch output is selectable for latched or non-latch configurations. • Frequency response dependent on model number (refer to “Product
Reset accomplished by reset pushbutton or external contact closure Accuracy”)
when in latch mode. Integration
• Shutdown Alarm activated on power loss • Integration to convert from G to IPS peak
Approvals
• EVS-A and EVS-S - Class 1 Div 2 Hazardous Area, Groups B, C, D
 96013
- 121 - Revised 07-11
Section 20

Shock and Vibration Switch – VS2 Series

Features
• Designed to Detect Shock/Vibration in 3-
Planes of Motion
• Fully Adjustable
• Includes Magnetic Latching Feature
• Manual or Electric Reset

*
*Selected Configurations are Third Party Listed

The VS2 Series switches are shock sensitive mechanisms for shutdown of engine or electric motor powered equipment.
These switches use a magnetic latch to ensure reliable operation. Explosion-proof “EX” models for hazardous locations are
available.
Applications
Ideal for use on engines, pumps, compressors, heat exchangers and pumping units, the VS2 Series can be used anywhere
shutdown protection from damaging shock/vibration is desired. Switches are field adjustable to sensitivity required in each
application.
Specifications
VS2 and VS2C Shipping Dimensions: 8-1/4 x 9-1/4 x 5 in. (210 x 235 x 127 mm)
Case: Equal to NEMA 3R. Suitable for non-hazardous areas. VS2EXR
VS2: Base mount
Case: Same as VS2EX.
VS2C: C-clamp mount, includes 45 ft. (13.7 m) 2-conductor cable,
and 5 cable clamps. Certification: CSA, UL.
Contacts: SPDT-double make leaf contacts, 5A @ 480 VAC. Snap-switch: 1-SPDT snap-switch and reset coil; 5A @ 480 VAC;* 2A
Shipping Weight: resistive, 1A inductive, up to 30 VDC.
VS2: 2 lb 8 oz. (1.1 kg) Remote Reset: 115 VAC or 24 VDC (specify).
VS2C: 7 lb (3.2 kg) Shipping Weight: 5 lb 8 oz. (2.2 kg)
Shipping Dimensions: Shipping Dimensions: 8-1/4 x 9-1/4 x 5 in. (210 x 235 x 127 mm)
VS2: 8-1/4 x 9-1/4 x 5 in. (210 x 235 x 127 mm)
VS2C: 12 x 7 x 5-1/2 in. (305 x 178 x 140 mm) VS2EXRB
Case: Explosion-proof aluminum alloy housing; rated Class I, Division 1,
VS2EX Group B hazardous areas.
Case: Base mount, explosion-proof aluminum alloy housing; meets Certification: No third party certification.
NEMA 7/IP54 specifications; Class I, Division 1, Groups C & D; UL
and CSA listed.* Snap-switch: 1-SPDT snap-switch with reset coil (option available for 2-
SPDT switches); 5A @ 480 VAC; 2A resistive, 1A inductive, up to 30
Certification: CSA, UL. VDC.
Snap-switches: 2-SPDT snap-switches; 5A @ 480 VAC;* 2A resistive, 1A Remote Reset: 115 VAC or 24 VDC (specify).
inductive, up to 30 VDC.
Shipping Weight: 17 lb 8 oz. (7.9 kg)
Normal Operating Temperature: -40 to 140°F (-40 to 60°C). Shipping Dimensions: 12 x 12 x 10 in. (305 x 305 x 254 mm)
Shipping Weight: 4 lb 8 oz. (2 kg)
Basic Operation
Pushing the reset button moves the tripping latch into a magnetically held position. A shock/vibration will move the magnet
beyond this holding position, thus freeing the spring loaded tripping latch to transfer the contacts and shutdown the machin-
ery (see dimensional diagrams in the following pages for visual representation of parts).
Remote Reset Option (VS2EXR and VS2EXRB)
The remote reset option includes a built-in electric solenoid which allows reset of tripped unit from a remote location. Avail-
able for 115 VAC or 24 VDC.
 - 122 -

Dimensions
VS2 and VS2C
The VS2 and VS2C are designed for use in non-haz-
ardous locations. They have leaf type SPDT, double
make contacts that can be used for shutdown and/or
alarm. They have a slotted sensitivity adjustment
located on the side of the case (see drawing below).

VS2EX
• NEMA 7/IP54 Specifications
• Snap-switch Contacts
• TATTLETALE® Reset Button
Model VS2EX is housed in an explosion-proof enclosure with
threaded cover. This enclosure is CSA and UL listed for Class I,
Division 1, Groups C & D hazardous locations. In place of the
leaf type contacts, 2-SPDT snap-switches are used in this
model. Sensitivity is externally adjustable and, when tripped,
the VS2EX gives a TATTLTALE® indication on the reset button.
It is constructed to meet NEMA 7 specifications.

R
 - 123 -

VS2EXR
• Remote Reset Feature
• NEMA 7 Specifications
• Snap-switch Contacts
• TATTLETALE® Reset Button
Model VS2EXR features an electric remote reset feature in
addition to the TATTLETALE® reset button. The VS2EXR uses
only one SPDT snap-switch and is CSA and UL listed for Class
I, Division 1, Groups C & D hazardous locations. It is con-
structed to meet NEMA 7 specifications.

VS2EXRB
• For Group B Locations
• Snap-switch Contacts
• DPDT Feature Optional
Model VS2EXRB is constructed for use in Class I, Division
1, Group B, hazardous locations. It has, as standard, a
SPDT snap-switch and an electric remote reset. Option is
available for DPDT snap-switch
 - 124 -

Service Parts How to Order

When ordering service parts, specify both part number and description in To order your VS2 Series model use the diagram below.
listing below. Part number example: VS2EXR-24
PART NO. DESCRIPTION
VS2 and VS2C
20-00-0030 Movement assembly
20-00-0031 Glass and gasket assembly
20-00-0032 Reset push button assembly
20-05-0021 Mounting clamp (VS2C)
20-00-0261 Cable clamp assembly (1 each) (VS2C)
20-05-0465 2-Conductor electrical cable, 45 feet (13.7 meters) (VS2C)
20-00-0137 5 clamps and 45 feet (13.7 meters) of cable (VS2C)
VS2EX
20-01-0091 Movement assembly
20-05-0087 Cover
00-00-0309 Cover gasket
20-01-0090 Snap-switch and insulator kit (1 switch per kit)
prior to September 1, 1995.*
20-00-0288 Snap-switch and insulator kit (1 switch per kit) for models
manufactured on September 1, 1995 or later.*
20-00-0289 C-clamp conversion mounting kit
VS2EXR
20-00-0262 Movement assembly
20-05-0087 Cover
00-00-0309 Cover gasket
20-01-0090 Snap-switch and insulator kit (1 switch per kit)
prior to September 1, 1995.*
20-00-0288 Snap-switch and insulator kit (1 switch per kit) for models
manufactured on September 1, 1995 or later.*
20-00-0049 Reset solenoid assembly (115 VAC)
20-00-0234 Reset solenoid assembly (24 VDC)
20-00-0289 C-clamp conversion mounting kit
VS2EXRB
20-01-0090 Snap-switch and insulator kit (1 switch per kit)
prior to September 1, 1995.*
20-00-0288 Snap-switch and insulator kit (1 switch per kit) for models
manufactured on September 1, 1995 or later.*
20-00-0057 Inside snap-switch and insulator kit (1 switch per kit) for model
VS2EXRB-D
prior to September 1, 1995.*
20-00-0058 Outside snap-switch and insulator kit (1 switch per kit) for
model VS2EXRB-D
prior to September 1, 1995.*
20-00-0287 Outside snap-switch and insulator kit (1 switch per kit)
for model
VS2EXRB-D manufactured on September 1, 1995 or later.*
20-00-0290 Inside snap-switch and insulator kit (1 switch per kit) for
model
VS2EXRB-D manufactured on September 1, 1995 or later.*
20-05-0077 Adjustment shaft
20-00-0262 Movement assembly
20-00-0049 Reset solenoid assembly (115 VAC)
20-00-0234 Reset solenoid assembly (24 VDC)

*Models with date 0895 and before use old switch. Dated 0995 after, use straight snap-switch arm, no rollers.
 94092
- 125 - Revised 03-03
Section 20

Shock and Vibration Control Switch – VS94 Model

Features
• NEMA 4X/IP66 Enclosure (CSA Types 4
& 12)
• Protects Your Equipment from Excessive
Shock or Vibration
• Fine Adjustment to Precisely Select the
Degree of Sensitivity
• Reset from a Remote Location
(Optional)
• Time Delay to Override Trip Operation at
Start-up (Optional)
• Space Heater to Prevent Moisture Con-
densation Inside the Unit (Optional)

VS94 Series is an electro-mechanical device designed to protect equipment from damaging shock or vibration. This sensitive mechanism can detect
excessive shock or vibration and shutdown the equipment before further damage occurs. A set of contacts is held in a latched position through a magnetic
latch mechanism. As the level of shock or vibration increases an inertia mass exerts force against the latch arm and forces it away from the magnetic latch
causing the latch arm to separate and to operate the contacts. Sensitivity is obtained by adjusting the amount of air gap between the magnet and latch
arm plate.
The VS94 Series is housed in a NEMA 4/4X glass filled polyester enclosure and has a base mount. It is for applications in non-hazardous locations.
VS94 models are rated up to 480 VAC. (See the How to Order section on back page for models and options available.)
Applications
Applications for the VS94 include all stationary types of machinery or equipment where excessive shock/vibration can be damaging or poses a threat to
normal operations such as in:
• Cooling fans • Compressors
• Engines • Pumps
• Pump jacks • Rotating and Reciprocating Machinery
Features
• Electromechanical Design • Manual Reset (Standard)
• Detects Shock or Vibration in Three Planes of Motion • Remote Reset (Optional)
• NEMA 4/4X (CSA types 4 and 12) Weather-proof Enclosure • Adjustable Start-up Time Delay (Optional)
• Reliable Magnetic Latch Feature • Space Heater Circuit to Prevent Housing Moisture Condensation
• Micro Fine, Easy-to-Adjust Sensitivity Adjustment (Optional)
• Two (2) versatile SPDT snap-switches rated up to 480 VAC.
Options
Remote Reset
This option of the VS94 includes a built-in electric solenoid which allows reset of tripped unit from a remote location. Available for 115 VAC or 24 VDC.
Time Delay
Overrides trip operation on start-up. The time delay option is field-adjustable from 5 seconds up to 6-1/2 minutes with an easy-to-adjust 20-turn potentiom-
eter. Available for 115 VAC or 24 VDC.
Space Heater
This optional circuit prevents moisture condensation inside the VS94 housing.
 - 126 -

Dimensions
VS94 Series Models

Specifications
Case: Polyester fiberglass reinforced; NEMA type 4X; IP66; CSA types 4 Remote Reset (optional):
and 12. Option Operating Current
Conduit Fitting: 3/4 NPT conduit fitting connection. R15 .17 A @ 115 VAC
R24 .36 A @ 24 VDC
Normal Operating Ambient Temperature: 0 to 140°F (-18 to 60°C).
Snap-switches: 2-SPDT snap acting switches; 5A @ 480 VAC; 2A resis- Time Delay (optional):
Option Operating Current Standby Current
tive, 1A inductive, up to 30 VDC. T15 .360 A @ 115 VAC .01 A @ 115 VAC
Range adjustment: 0 - 7 G’s; 0 - 100 Hz /0.100 in. displacement. T24 1.15 A @ 24 VDC .01 A @ 24 VDC
Space Heater (optional): Time Delay/Remote Reset: Adjustable 20-turn potentiometer from 5 sec-
Option Operating Current onds to 6-1/2 minutes (15 seconds per turn approximately).
H15 .023 A @ 115 VAC Shipping Weight: 4.35 lb. (2 kg.)
H24 .12 A @ 24 VDC
Shipping Dimensions: 9 x 8 x 4-11/16 in. (229 x 203 x 119 mm)
How to Order
To order your VS94 model use the diagram below.
 SECTI ON 25 M AGNETI C SWI TCHES
AND ANNUNCI ATORS

Remote Alarm/Annunciators
95046 SELECTRONIC® TATTLETALE® Remote Alarm Annunciators ST Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Magnetic Switches
78793 TATTLETALE® Annunciators and Magnetic Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

 95046
- 127 - Revised 08-06
Section 25

SELECTRONIC® TATTLETALE®
Remote Alarm Annunciators ST Series
Features
• Provide Audible and Visual Alarm
• Simple and Inexpensive
• Wide Range of Applications
• Gen-Set Models Meet NFPA-99 and
NFPA-110 Requirements

The ST Series SELECTRONIC® TATTLETALE® annunciators are a simple and inexpensive answer to your remote alarm
annunciator needs. Basic models ST5AS and ST10AS are general purpose alarms suitable for a variety of applications.
Model ST8 gives first out annunciation of fault. Model STA16 is designed for generator set applications and can be config-
ured to meet NFPA requirements for standby generators.
These compact TATTLETALE® annunciators tell you by a flashing LED which variable malfunctioned. Many feature a pul-
sating MINI-SIREN® to audibly alert you to the malfunction. The audible alarm is silenced by depressing the Alarm Silence
push button, but the visual signal remains in operation until the fault is corrected and the contacts are cleared.
A test push button allows you to test all alarm LEDs. Because LEDs are solid state, cold light, electronic devices, they don’t
burn out as incandescent light bulbs do.
Basic models accept 8-32 VAC or 8-40 VDC input voltage. Others are available for either 12 VDC or 24 VDC input.
Preprinted peel and stick nameplates for common faults are supplied with each unit. Most of the SELECTRONIC ® TATTLE-
TALE® annunciators accept either normally open (N.O.) or normally closed (N.C.) contacts. You can mix N.O. and N.C.
contacts on the same unit.
Two mounting styles are offered; a recessed panel mounting flange and a freestanding gimbal mounting. (Model STA16
is available only in flange mount).
All models except STA16 have a time delay available to lockout the audible alarm on startup. These unique alarm panels
have wide ranging applications and can be grouped in many configurations. Ask any Murphy sales/engineer for assistance.
Basic Operation
When an alarm sensor trips, the LED flashes and, if equipped, the MINI-SIREN® sounds. At the same time an output circuit
is activated which allows you to connect an external relay to operate a general alarm, operate a shutdown device, etc.
Applications
• Marine • Construction
• Agriculture • Oil Field
• Generator Sets
 - 128 -

BASIC: ST5AS, ST10AS and ST5DAS Series

Murphy Basic ST-SERIES SELECTRONIC® TATTLETALE® annunciators are used wherever a remote alarm and annunci-
ation is required. Typical applications are in marine pilot houses to alert the crew of problems developing in engine, gear,
bilge, auxiliary power plants, etc. Repeater panels can be added for additional locations such as flybridge, on deck, galley
or engineer’s quarters. Each repeater panel can be acknowledged individually or alternate wiring allows for one master
control to silence all repeater panels.
Other applications include power plant control rooms or building maintenance, for remote drilling rigs, construction sites,
agricultural and construction equipment.
When a fault occurs, the contact operation causes the appropriate LED to flash and the audible MINI-SIREN® to pulse. At
the same time an output signal is generated which allows an external relay to be wired to operate a general alarm such as
a bell or horn. Depressing the Alarm Silent button silences the local audible alarm and disconnects the output for the
remote alarm. The flashing LED remains in operation until the fault is corrected and the contacts reset. Alarm Silence/Test
button allows you to test all LEDs.
Preprinted peel and stick nameplates for common faults are supplied with each unit.
5-Points
• ST5ASF (flange mount) and ST5ASG (gimbal mount)
• Provides 5 alarm points and output for remote alarm relay.
• Accepts N.O. and/or N.C. contacts.
• Use individually or gang for multiple applications.
• Input voltage 8-32 VAC or 8-40 VDC.

10-Points
• ST10ASF (flange mount) and ST10ASG (gimbal mount)
• Provides 10 alarm points and output for remote alarm relay.
• Accepts N.O. and/or N.C. contacts.
• Use individually or gang for multiple applications.
• Input voltage 8-32 VAC or 8-40 VDC.

Dual 5-Points
ST5DASF (flange mount) and ST5DASG (gimbal mount)
• Provides two separate sets of 5 alarm points in one package. Each set of 5
points is powered separately from the other, but they share the same nega-
tive of the power source.
• Primary application is on twin engine boats. Since each set of alarm points
is powered separately, if only one engine is running there is no alarm on the
engine not running.
• Accepts N.O. and/or N.C. contacts.
• Input voltage 8-32 VAC or 8-40 VDC.
 - 129 -

FIRST OUT FAULTS: ST8 Series

First out fault TATTLETALE® tells you which monitored variable malfunctioned first. The fault is annunciated and locked in
until reset by the operator. Applications include process monitoring such as compressors, pumps, generators, etc. Pre-
printed peel and stick nameplates for common faults are supplied with each unit.
8 First Out
• ST8F (flange mount) and ST8G (gimbal mount)
• Provides 8-point first out cause of shutdown TATTLE-
TALE®. A flashing LED indicates the cause of shutdown
identified by the nameplate.
• Accepts N.O. and/or N.C. contacts.
• Includes SPDT dry contact output rated 2 A @ 28 VDC.
• Selectable sensor lockout for delay on startup.
• Input voltage 8-32 VAC or 8-40 VDC.

GENERATORS: STA16 Series

The STA16 is a multi-functional visual and audible 16-point alarm typically applied as a remote alarm. Its picture frame
bezel allows for flush mounting into a control panel or customer supplied wall mounted pull box. Preprinted peel and stick
nameplates for all common engine and generator functions allow for generic applications or for NFPA-110 REQUIRE-
MENTS.
16-Points
• STA16 is a 16-point annunciator for generator sets.
• Provides 16 points of visual and audible alarms includ-
ing built-in sensing for low battery voltage and battery
charger malfunction.
• Accepts N.O. switch inputs
• Negative switch input.
 - 130 -

DIMENSIONS

ST5ASF Gimbal Mounting (“G” Option)

ST8F and ST10ASF

STA16
 - 131 -

SPECIFICATIONS

ACCESSORIES and OPTIONS

TDST3-5 and TDST8-10

TDST3-5 and TD8-10 single point time delays inhibit sensor input to ST
Series annunciators for 3-5 or 8-10 seconds. Compensates for momentary
contact operation due to vessel movement, etc.
GIMBAL and FLANGE Mounting Kits
These kits are available for change-over mounting and as service parts.
They fit all “LM” (less mounting) configurations.
25700007 Gimbal mount kit fits ST5ASLM. 25020138
25700008 Flange mount kit fits ST5ASLM. 25020139
25700034 Gimbal mount kit fits ST10ASLM, ST5DASLM and ST8LM.
25020141
25700371 Flange mount fits ST10ASLM, ST5DASLM and ST8LM.
25020142
 - 132 -

HOW TO ORDER

SELECTRONIC® TATTLETALE® Annunciator

Specify model number using diagram below.

Accessories and Options

Specify part number.
Part Number Description
TDST3-5 3–5 second time delay
TDST8-10 8–10 second time delay
25700007 Gimbal mount kit; fits ST5ASLM.
25700008 Flange mount kit; fits ST5ASLM.
25700034 Gimbal mount kit; fits ST10ASLM, ST5DASLM, and ST8LM
25700371 Flange mount fits; ST10ASLM, ST5DASLM, and ST8LM.
 78793
- 133 - 01-29-11
Section 25

TATTLETALE® Annunciators and Magnetic Switches

Nerve Centers for

Murphy SWICHGAGE®
Instrument and
Automation Systems

Tattletale annunciators and magnetic switches are the nerve centers that translate Swichgage contact operations into deci-
sions and operate the alarm or shutdown device. They are the electrical load carrying devices for the alarm or shutdown
device. Tattletale annunciators indicate which monitored function failed leading to the alarm or shutdown whereas
magnetic switches do not. Magnetic switches operate basically as a latching relay.
Application
Magnetic switches and Tattletale annunciators are available for use with engines or electric motors. Various circuits, time
delays and contact configurations are available to match the power source and mode of operation required for alarm only,
alarm before shutdown or shutdown only.
For distributor ignition engines, the magnetic switch opens the distributor coil circuit to cause shutdown. For magneto or
CD ignitions the magnetic switch grounds the ignition output. Some models can also trip fuel valves instead of or in addi-
tion to grounding the ignition. Diesel engines are shut down by either closing off the fuel or air supply. Magnetic switches
and Tattletale annunciators can make or break circuits for these engines.
For electric motor application, various magnetic switches are available to operate the motor starter, holding coil directly or
in conjunction with appropriate Murphy Transformer-Relay assembly.
Features
Magnetic switches and Tattletale annunciators described in this bulletin are electrically tripped relay type devices. Models
are available to operate from battery power, 120 VAC, conventional magnetos and capacitor discharge type ignitions.
Energized to run models allow CLOSED LOOP circuitry. Others draw momentary power to trip. Configurations are avail-
able for contact make or contact break to cause shutdown. Some models have both make and break contacts.
All models have a weather resistant case with screw terminals for ease of customer hookup. Manually reset models have
a face mounted reset push button which also serves as a fault indicator in the Tattletale version. In this application, one or
more Tattletale/magnetic switches are used to advise operating personnel which monitored function caused shutdown.
Only the Tattletale connected to that function sensor trips causing the reset push button to pop out.
Electrically reset models perform the same functions as the manually reset models and are reset by cycling the power sup-
ply off and then on.
Time delay models use reliable solid state time circuits to lockout operated switch contacts for start-up and/or to allow oper-
ation of alarms before shutdown occurs. Specific models allow application of power to a shutdown circuit and automatic
disconnect of power after a given time delay.
- 134 -
- 135 -
- 136 -
 SECTION 30 ENGINE PANELS

Engine Panel Accessories

8904 Selectronic® Flasher Alarm Light and Mini-siren – TL7 and SAH Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Engine Panels - Mechanical and/or Electric
03063 Swichgage® Shutdown Panels for
Irrigation Engines and Pumps – 75160 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
94032 Swichgage® Shutdown Panels
for Mobile Equipment of All Kinds – WAI Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
8198 Swichgage® Kits for Engines – WD100 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
03061 Swichgage® Shutdown Panels with Open Back
for Diesel Engines – WD300 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
04001 Electric Gage Shutdown Panels
for DEUTZ 1011/2011, 912/913 and 914 – WDU Series Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
03062 Swichgage® Shutdown Panels for High Plains
and Other Irrigation Engines – WHB Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
94100 Shutdown Panel Kits for Deutz and Other Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
97077 Swichgage® Diagnostic Panel Kits
for Cummins B and C-Series Engines – W0162 and W0163 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
8426 Swichgage® Shutdown Panel Kit – W0168 and W0241 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
92226 Swichgage® Shutdown Panel Kit – Model W0270 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

MurphyLink® PowerView™ Panels

03114 MurphyLink
® Series M110 Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

03022 MurphyLink
® Series M310 Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

0910438 Automatic Engine Controller - Model AEC101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

 8904
- 137 - 08-06
Section 30

Selectronic® Flasher Alarm Light and Mini-siren

TL7 and SAH Series
Features
• High Visibility Flashing Red Alarm Light
or Audible Alarm
• 12 VDC or 24 VDC
• Panel Mount
• All Electronic Description

The Model TL7 is a panel mounted flashing alarm light and audible alarm driver. The TL7 helps protect the Murphy Swich-
gage contacts from the very high inrush current of the lamp. It is available in 12 or 24 VDC for negative ground systems.
The SAH Mini-siren provides an audible alarm when fault conditions are detected by a Swichgage instrument. It can be
panel mounted and operates on 6–28 VDC.
Application
The TL7 Flasher/Light is used as a warning device on various types of industrial and mobile equipment. The Mini-siren will
give an audible warning when the TL7 operates, or it can be wired directly to the Swichgage contacts for audible only
alarm.
Features: TL7
• Red polycarbonate lens • SAH terminal designed to drive piezo electric audible
• 12 VDC or 24 VDC negative ground (specify voltage) alarm rated 20 mA @ 28 VDC such as Murphy SAH
Series Mini-siren
• Tin plated male push-on type terminals
Specifications: TL7
Power Requirements: Outputs (see replacement lamps):
• Voltage: 12 or 24 VDC, negative ground (specify voltage). Lamp output: 120 mA @ 14.4 VDC
• Current: SAH terminal: 20 mA @ 28 VDC resistive
- Sensor switch < 60 mA Enclosure: Red polycarbonate lens with aluminum retaining nut.
- 12 VDC, 360 mA with lamp on Temperature Range: -40°F to 165°F (-40°C to 74°C).
- 24 VDC, 200 mA with lamp on Terminal Connections: Four tin plated 1/32 x 1/4 inch (0.8 x 6 mm) male
- 12 or 24VDC, 5 mA standby, lamp off push-on type terminal.
Mounting Hole: 1-1/8 in. (29 mm) diameter.
Maximum Panel Thickness: 1/4 in. (6 mm).
Specifications: SAH
Type: PIEZO electric transducer. Current Drain: at 28 VDC, 20 mA MAX.
Operating Voltage: 6–8 VDC. Mounting Hole: 1-1/8 in. (29 mm) diameter.
Output Level: at 28 VDC 1 meter, 90± 5 dB. Maximum Panel Thickness: 1/8 in. (3 mm).
 - 138 -

Dimensions

Typical Wiring Diagram How to Order

When ordering a TL7, voltage and polarity must be specified (see the dia-
WARNING Before beginning installation of gram below):
this Murphy product:
 Disconnect ALL electrical power to the
machine.
 Make sure the machine CANNOT oper-
ate during installation.
 Follow all safety warnings of the
machine manufacturer.
 Read and follow all installation instruc-
tions.

Below is a typical circuit diagram for the TL7 Flasher/Light and SAH Mini-
siren. When the switch closes the lamp will flash and the optional Mini-
siren will pulse at the same frequency.

NOTE: typical wiring with negative ground. Although designed to

be used with Murphy Swichgage, the TL7 can be used with any dry
contact type switch.
 03063
- 139 - Revised 04-06
Section 30

Swichgage® Shutdown Panels for

Irrigation Engines and Pumps – 75160 Series
Features
• Ideal for Irrigation Engines
• Includes Loss of Pump Discharge Pres-
sure and High Coolant Temperature
Swichgage Instruments
• Model With Solenoid Fuel Shutoff Valve

The 75160 series:

This Swichgage panel is specifically configured for irrigation engines and includes loss of pump discharge pressure Swich-
gage instrument. The panel is enclosed on top, bottom, and both ends. Mounting flanges extend on top and bottom. The
back of the panel is open. Access holes are in the bottom.
75160: includes low oil pressure, high coolant temperature, low pump pressure Swichgage instruments, Magnetic Switch,
and emergency stop button.
75160D: includes SV-series solenoid diesel fuel valve (specify voltage). For diesel engines without shut-down solenoid in
the injection pump, add a Murphy SV Series solenoid fuel shut-off valve or RP2300 Series rack pull solenoid.
Panel Kits Include:
• Low Lube Oil Pressure Swichgage instrument • SV Series Solenoid Fuel Shutoff Valve.
• High Coolant/ Temperature Swichgage instrument • PB128S Emergency stop push button.
• 518PH Magnetic Switch.
Specifications
Low Lube Oil Pressure Swichgage instrument: High Coolant Swichgage instrument:
• 0-100 psi (0-689 kPa) [0-6.89 bar] • 130-250°F (54-121°C)
• 1/8 NPT process connection • 48 in. (1.2 m) capillary
Low Pump Pressure Swichgage instrument: • 1/2 NPT process connection
• 0-150 psi (1.03 MPa) [10.34 bar] 518PH Magnetic Switch: 12 or 24 volt (specify)
• 1/8 NPT process connection SV Series Solenoid Fuel Shutoff Valve: 12 or 24 volt (specify)
Shipping Weight: 8 lbs. 8 ozs. (3.9 kgs.)
Shipping Dimensions: 15.5 x 16 x 10.5 in. (394 x 406 x 267 mm).
Dimensions (all Models)
 - 140 -

How to Order
NOTES:
1. * = Standard Component or Range and is not required for ordering, see section notes if section has two
parts to specify.
2. If requirements are outside of the matrix, order panel with free formed text and use the ‘3050xxxx’ product
number of the base model.
 94032
- 141 - Revised 05-06
Section 30

Swichgage® Shutdown Panels

for Mobile Equipment of All Kinds – WAI Series
Features
• Get the Same Original
Equipment Specified by
Major OEM’s
• Swichgage Instruments
Include Built-in Light Pipe
Illumination
• Prewired and Ready to
Install
• Alarm Only Model Saves
Money on Applications Not
Requiring Shutdown
• Available for 12 or 24 Volts

WAI Series Murphy panels offer engine protection for on and off road mobile equipment.
You get accurate engine readings and time-delayed automatic shutdowns. Flashing light and mini-siren signal a warning
before the shutdown. Alarm-only panels (without shutdown capabilities) are also available.
WAI panels are easy to install and function test without the need for expensive auxiliary equipment. Each is a cost compet-
itive and effective system for engine protection.
The WAI Series Panels are complete diagnostic, engine-protection systems. Any vehicle or engine can be monitored and in
case of potentially damaging conditions an alarm will operate before the engine is shut down. WAI Panels feature direct-
reading, mechanical Swichgage instruments (gauge and limit switch in one) and Selectronic relays and alarms. Swichgage
instruments are internally lighted for night illumination.
Models Available
WAI-2: Completely enclosed and with convenient under-dash mounting provides Swichgage instruments for low oil pres-
sure and high coolant temperature; visual and audible alarms before automatic shutdown. Includes a 270° pivoting, mount-
ing bracket.
WAI-3: Same as WAI-2 panel with a 3rd Swichgage instrument for block coolant pressure (0-15 psi).
WAI-4: Same as WAI-2 panel with a 3rd Swichgage instrument for transmission temperature (140-300°F).
WAI-7: Open style panel same as WAI-2.
WAI-8: Open style panel provides Swichgage instruments for low oil pressure, coolant pressure and high coolant tempera-
ture; visual and audible alarms before automatic shutdown.
WAI-9: Open style panel same as WAI-8 with transmission temperature Swichgage instrument instead of coolant pressure.
WAI-271: Open style panel similar to WAI-7 but for alarm-only.
Application
Trucks, buses, fork lifts, loaders, earth-movers–any engine powered mobile unit, such as delivery vans, farm and construc-
tion equipment, street sweepers.
 - 142 -

WAI-2
• Enclosed Panel
• Oil Pressure Swichgage instrument
• Coolant Temperature* Swichgage instrument
• Mini-siren
• FL3/TL2 flasher and light
• 760AF Magnetic Switch with 30 second time delay for
alarm before shutdown; 12 VDC, (optional 24 V)
WAI-3 / WAI-4
• Enclosed Panels
• Oil Pressure Swichgage instrument
• Coolant Temperature* Swichgage instrument
• Block Coolant Pressure* Swichgage instrument (WAI-3
only 0-15psi)
• Transmission Temp.* Swichgage instrument (WAI-4 only
140-300°F)
• Mini-siren
• FL3/TL2 flasher and light
• 760AF Magnetic Switch with 30 second time delay for
alarm before shutdown; 12 VDC, (optional 24 V)
WAI-7
• Open Style Panel
• Oil Pressure Swichgage instrument
• Coolant Temperature* Swichgage instrument
• Mini-siren
• TL7, Flasher Alarm Light
• 760AF Magnetic Switch with 30 second time delay for
alarm before shutdown; 12 VDC, (optional 24 V)
WAI-8 / WAI-9
• Open Style Panel
• Oil Pressure Swichgage instrument
• Coolant Pressure* Swichgage instrument (WAI-8 only 0-
15psi)
• Transmission Temp.* Swichgage instrument (WAI-9 only
140-300°F)
• Coolant Temperature* Swichgage instrument
• Mini-siren
• TL7, Flasher Alarm Light
• 760AF Magnetic Switch with 30 second time delay for
alarm before shutdown; 12 VDC, (optional 24 V)

* Temperature capillary length is standard 6 ft. (1.8 m). Specify longer lengths.
 - 143 -

WAI-271
• Alarm-Only, Open Style Panel
• Oil Pressure Swichgage instrument
• Coolant Temperature* Swichgage instrument
• Mini-siren
• TL7, Flasher Alarm Light
• Available for 12 VDC or 24 VDC
Typical Dimensions

WAI-2 WAI-7

WAI-8 / WAI-9

WAI-3 / WAI-4

* Temperature capillary length is standard 6 ft. (1.8 m). Specify longer lengths.
 - 144 -

Typical Dimensions—(continued)

WAI-271

How to Order
Order by using the model number (also see the quick reference guide below):
WAI-2
WAI-3
WAI-4
WAI-7
WAI-8
WAI-9
WAI-271
STANDARD PANEL ASSEMBLIES AND KITS ~ QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE
 8198
- 145 - Revised 03-06
Section 30

Swichgage® Kits for Engines – WD100 Series

Features
• Universal Mounting Panel
• Guard against low oil pressure or high
running temperature
• For farm or construction equipment

The WD100 Series Swichgage kits provide engine monitoring that shuts down farm, construction, or other engine powered equipment, when dangerous
pressures or temperatures occur. The control center for each of these kits is the compact and adjustable, Universal Mounting Panel. This panel holds two
Swichgage(s) and a Tattletale® magnetic switch, and shut down device where appropriate.
Specifications
• Murphy Swichgage products are two-instruments-in-one: (1) an accu- • Temperature capillary tubes are 6 ft. (1.8 m) standard, but can be
rate indicating gauge with (2) a built-in, adjustable, limit switch. ordered in any length.
• 518PH Tattletale magnetic switch is designed to shut down engines; • Standard Swichgage ranges*:
operates as a circuit breaker to interrupt the ignition circuit to a distribu- Pressure: 0-100 psi (0-689 kPa) [0-6.89 bar]
tor or to close a solenoid fuel valve on diesels. Temperature: 130-250°F (54-121°C)
* Other ranges are available on request.

WD100 Series Kits

Depending upon the kit selected, the following components are supplied:
C. Universal Mounting Panel which consists of:
• 20P, oil pressure Swichgage instrument
• 20T, temperature Swichgage instrument with 6 ft. (1.8 m) capillary, or 20TH, temperature Swichgage instrument for WD175 kit.
• 518PH Tattletale magnetic switch
D. Bracket mounting bolts, washers and nuts.
E. CKV2336, fuel reverse flow/check valve.
F. PRV50, fuel pressure relief valve
G. SV-Series, fuel shut-off solenoid valve (1/4 NPT X 1/4 NPT) Specify 12VDC or 24VDC.
Kit Combinations
These kits are available for virtually any engine application, any engine type, or can be custom ordered to
meet a specific use.
Kit WD100 includes: A, and B
Suitable for use on distributor ignition engines or on diesels having a shutdown solenoid in the fuel pump.
Shipping Weight: 4.75 lbs (2.2 kg)
Shipping Dimensions: 9-3/4 in. x 9-1/4 in. x 5-3/4 in. (248 mm x 235 mm x 146 mm)
Kit WD150 includes: A, B, C, and E
Suitable for most liquid cooled diesel engines.
Shipping Weight: 6.15 lbs (2.8 kgs.)
Shipping Dimensions: 9-3/4 in. x 9-1/4 in. x 5-3/4 in. (248 mm x 235 mm x 146 mm)
Kit WD175 includes: A, B, C, and E
Suitable for air cooled diesel engines; 10 mm 1.5 adaptor and special head temperature bulb. Includes
SV-Series fuel valve.
Shipping Weight: 6.15 lbs (2.8 kgs.)
Shipping Dimensions: 9-3/4 in. x 9-1/4 in. x 5-3/4 in. (248 mm x 235 mm x 146 mm)
Kit WD185 includes: A, B, C, D, and E
Suitable for engines with gear driven transfer pump. (SV-Series is not required on engines with built-in
shutdown in the injector pump.)
Shipping Weight: 6.20 lbs (2.8 kgs.) —Especially designed for adaptation to a
Shipping Dimensions: 9-3/4 in. x 9-1/4 in. x 5-3/4 in. (248 mm x 235 mm x 146 mm)
 - 146 -

Typical Wiring to Diesel Engine

Special Notes:
• Murphy Pressure Relief Valve; model PRV50 is factory set to start opening at 25 psi (172 kPa) [1.72 bar].
This is done to protect the fuel filter canister from bursting due to high pressure.
• Install the Murphy Check Relief Valve, model CKV2336, as close as possible to the injection pump.
When the CKV2336 is installed properly it should prevent the injection pump from siphoning fuel thus not
allowing continued operation after the SV valve closes.
• Install the SV-Series fuel valve as close as possible to the injection pump inlet port.
• All fittings must be air tight.

Dimensions Rotating/Tilting Panel

It is the ability of this panel to mount in many different positions (Swich-
gage instruments can be rotated, the panel tilted) that allows for instru-
ment visibility without a difficult installation or interference with other
engine equipment.

How to Order
To determine the kit that will suit your application, refer to the Kit Combinations on the reverse side. When you have decided on a kit, the model number
and voltage must be specified when ordering. Example: WD100, 12 Volt
Approximate Shipping Weights and Dimensions for each kit are specified on the reverse side of this bulletin, under Kit Combinations. Order oil line
assembly separately.
 03061
- 147 - Revised 04-06
Section 30

Swichgage® Shutdown Panels with Open Back

for Diesel Engines – WD300 Series
Features
• Universal Design Ideal for Diesel
Engines Without Fuel Solenoid Built Into
the Injection Pump
• Swichgage Instruments for Low Oil Pres-
sure, High Coolant Temperature
• Includes Fuel Solenoid Shutdown Valve

WD300 Series
The universally applicable WD300 Series panels are the ideal control solution for a wide variety of diesel engines without
shutdown solenoid in the injection pump.
The standard WD300 Series panel includes basic engine protection for low oil pressure and high coolant temperature. It
also includes Murphy’s SV Series solenoid fuel shut-off valve, (see bulletin SV-99026B).
WD300LV Models
For engines that have the fuel shut-off solenoid built into the injection pump. This model also applicable to battery ignition
engines.
Panel Kits Include:
• Low Lube Oil Pressure Swichgage instrument. • SV Series Solenoid Fuel Shutoff Valve.
• High Coolant/ Temperature Swichgage instrument. • PB128S Emergency Stop Push Button.
• 117PH Magnetic Switch.
Specifications
Low Lube Oil Pressure SWICHGAGE®: • 1/2 NPT process connection
• 0-100 psi (0-689 kPa) [0-6.89 bar] 117PH Magnetic Switch SV Series Solenoid Fuel Shutoff Valve: 12 or
• 1/8 NPT process connection 24 volt (specify)
High Coolant SWICHGAGE®: Shipping Weight: 8 lbs. 8 ozs. (3.9 kgs.)
• 130-250°F (54-121°C) Shipping Dimensions: 8.5 x 5.25 x 5.5 in. (216 x 133 x 140 mm).
• 48 in. (1.2 m) capillary
Dimensions (all Models)
 - 148 -

How to order
Notes:
* = Standard Component or Range and is not required for ordering, see section notes if section has two parts to specify.
• WD300LV: Does not include a SV Fuel Valve.
• WD300: Includes an SV Fuel Valve, (WD300-12 = 12 volt valve and WD300-24 = 24 volt valve)
If requirements are outside of the matrix, order panel with free formed text and use the ‘3050xxxx' product number of the base model.
 04001
- 149 - Revised 02-04
Section 30

Electric Gage Shutdown Panels

for DEUTZ 1011/2011, 912/913 and 914 – WDU Series Panels
Features
• Environmentally Sealed Electric Gages
with LED Illumination Provide Accurate
Readouts
• Reliable Shutdown Protection On Low
Oil Pressure and High Engine Tempera-
ture
• Includes “Plug and Go” Package for
Quick and Easy Installation to 1011/
2011, 912/913 and 914 DEUTZ Engines
• Recessed Front Panel Design Houses
Components and Utilizes a Hinged Front
Cover for Easy Access to Internal Com-
ponents
• Features Engine Preheat Circuit

Deutz engines that come factory equipped with electric-switched oil pressure and temperature senders can now be outfitted with a standard line of electric
gage “Plug and Go” panels that take the work and time out of the installation process. Two bolts mount the panel to the engine’s bell housing and the
included wiring allows for fast “Plug and Go” assembly. Simply remove two screws and the front hinged panel drops down allowing access to all the inter-
nal components. These panels are offered in three versions to accommodate all wiring and mounting requirements for DEUTZ 1011/2011, 912/913 & 914
Engines.
The panels are designed to compliment Deutz engines supplied with pre-installed factory-set “electric switched senders.” Protection against low oil pres-
sure and high engine temperature is achieved with the Murphy 760A Time Delayed Magnetic Switch. A panel mounted 10 amp fuse protects the sensitive
instrumentation from any over-current situation and stops the engine if blown. The Deutz pre-installed “electric switched senders” supply all shut-down
signals directly to the Murphy 760A providing reliable and proven engine protection in harsh environments.
Critical engine information is provided with Murphy’s environmentally sealed; LED illuminated EG Series electric gages. Known for their reliable perfor-
mance and constructed of corrosion resistive materials, these rugged gages exceed SAE J1810 standards for use in tough off-road and industrial power
unit applications. A unique spin-on gage clamp keeps the gages tight even in high vibration applications. Murphy’s alternator driven ATHA 4000 RPM
tachometer provides accurate display of engine speed with its back-lit dial, while the digital hour meter records the elapsed engine run time. The heavy
duty key switch constructed of corrosion resistant materials and heavy gauge wiring exceed the current requirements of the starter and engine pre-heat
circuit. A red lamp mounted on the front panel indicates when the pre-heat circuit is active.
All components are assembled into a robust black powder-coated enclosure with text indicating key position. The “Plug and Go” external wire harness
connects to the rear of the panel and has all the engine side connections pre-wired. The panel mounting bracket comes pre-assembled to the enclosure
with three vibration isolators, making installation fast and simple.
Features
• Oil Pressure Gage: 0-80 PSI (0-500 kPa) • Engine Preheat with Red Indicator Lamp
• Engine Temperature Gage: 140-300 °F (60-150 °C) • Murphy 760A Safety Shutdown (Automatic Time Delayed for Start-up)
• Volt Meter (8-18 VDC) • Panel Mount Fuse
• Tachometer/Hourmeter (0-4000 RPM) • Recessed and Protected Front Panel
• Key Switch (Heavy Duty) • Durable Powder Coat Finished Enclosure and Mounting Bracket
Labor Saving Installation Features
• Pre-wired External Harness (Includes all connectors and terminals) • Simple Bolt-on/Plug-in Installation
• Mating connectors match Deutz Engine wiring for fast “Plug and Go”
connection
• Pre-assembled: Enclosure, Rubber Isolation Mounts and Mounting
Bracket
 - 150 -

WDU0814 Dimensions Includes Enclosure, Mounting Bracket and Shock Mounts

Wiring
 - 151 -

WDU0815 Dimensions Includes Enclosure, Mounting Bracket and Shock Mounts

Wiring
 - 152 -

WDU0816 Dimensions Includes Enclosure, Mounting Bracket and Shock Mounts

Wiring
 - 153 -

WDU0865 Wiring for Deutz 914 Tier 3 Engine Wiring

 - 154 -

Specifications:
Voltage: 12 VDC.
Shipping Weight: 16 lb. (7.3 kg).
Shipping Dimensions: 14 x 15-3/4 x 9-1/2in. (356 x 400 x 242 mm).

How to Order (Order your WDU panel using the model number)
WDU0814 Panel Number 30-70-0814 used on DEUTZ 1011/2011 Engine
• Includes Attached Wire Harness Pigtail with engine connector, battery (+), starter, pre-heat and ground wires.
• Mounting bracket has an additional plate to accommodate specific engine mount location
WDU0815 Panel Number 30-70-0815 used on DEUTZ 912/913 Engine
• Includes Loose External Wire Harness that plugs into back of panel, starter and pre-heat wires.
• Deutz supplied engine harness also plugs into back of panel
WDU0816 Panel Number 30-70-0816 used on DEUTZ 914 Engine
• Includes a relay housed internal to the panel for the fuel solenoid
• Includes Loose External Wire Harness that plugs into back of panel, starter and pre-heat wires.
• Deutz supplied engine harness also plugs into back of panel
WDU865 Panel Number 30-70-0865 used on Deutz 914 TIER 3 engines.
• Includes a relay housed internal to the panel for the fuel solenoid
• Includes Loose External Wire Harness that plugs into back of panel, starter and pre-heat wires.
• Deutz supplied engine harness also plugs into back of panel
 03062
- 155 - Revised 04-06
Section 30

Swichgage® Shutdown Panels for High Plains

and Other Irrigation Engines – WHB Series
Features
• Ideal for High Plains Irrigation Engines
• Mounts Directly to Engine Flywheel
Housing
• Swichgage Instruments for Low Oil Pres-
sure, High Coolant Temperature and
Ammeter
• Provision for Additional Instruments

The WHB Series open type panels are the industry standard for High Plains irrigation engines. These panels bolt directly to
the engine flywheel housing. They include Swichgage protection for low engine oil pressure and high coolant or high oil
temperature, and have provision to add an additional Swichgage instruments, such as pump discharge pressure, voltage
regulator, throttle cable, and start button or switch.
For diesel engines without shut-down solenoid in the injection pump, add a Murphy SV Series solenoid fuel shut-off valve
or RP2300 series rack puller solenoid (for details see bulletins SV-99026B and RP- 95028B).
Swichgage products is two-instruments-in one: (1) an accurate indicating gage with (2) a built-in, adjustable limit
switch.
Panel Kits Include:
• Low Lube Oil Pressure Swichgage instrument
• High Coolant/ Temperature Swichgage instrument
• 117PH Magnetic Switch.
• PB128S Emergency Stop Push Button.
• Ammeter 60-0-60.
• Provisions for additional Swichgage controls, such as irrigation pump pressure or engine oil temperature.
Specifications
Low Lube Oil Pressure Swichgage instrument:
• 0-100 psi (0-689 kPa) [0-6.89 bar]
• 1/8 NPT process connection
High Coolant/Oil Temperature Swichgage instrument:
• 130-250°F (54-121°C)
• 48 in. (1.2 m) capillary
• 1/2 NPT process connection
117PH
Ammeter: 60-0-60
Shipping Weight: 8 lbs. 8 ozs. (3.9 kgs.)
Shipping Dimensions: 9.5 x 9 x 5 in. (241 x 229 x 127
mm)
 - 156 -

Dimensions

NOTE: This is an standard schematic. if non-standard components are specified, this schematic my not
exactly reflect your panel.
How to Order

NOTES:
• * = Standard Component or Range and is not required for ordering, see section notes if section has two
parts to specify.
• If requirements are outside of the matrix, order panel with free formed text and use the‘ 3050xxxx’ product
number of the base model.
 94100
- 157 - Revised 04-06
Section 30

Shutdown Panel Kits for Deutz and Other Engines -

W0156 and W0169 Series
Features
• Protection Against Dangerously Low Oil
Pressure or High Temperature
• Closed-loop Circuitry Ensures Proper
Operation at All Times
• Weatherproof and Shock-Mounted
• Complete Kit Ready for Easy Installation
• Fits Deutz FL912 and FL913 Series and
Other Engines Description

The W0156 and W0169 panel kits were developed specifically for air-cooled and liquid-cooled engines where a weather proof engine panel is required.
Both kits features Swichgage® protection for low engine oil pressure and high cylinder head or high oil temperature. Shock-mounted panel bolts directly to
the flywheel housing or bracket of your design.
These kits were originally designed for Deutz FL912 and FL913 series engines, but can be used on a variety of engines. Internal wiring mates with stan-
dard Deutz circuit.
Panel kits include:
• Low Lube Oil Pressure Swichgage instrument • Ignition key switch.
• Cylinder Head/Oil Temperature Swichgage instrument • Provisions for additional Swichgage instruments such as irrigation
• 518PH Magnetic Switch. pump pressure or voltmeter/ammeter etc.
• Alternator failure light. • Provisions for tachometer.
Swichgage products are two instruments in one: (1) an accurate indicating gage with (2) a built-in, adjustable limit switch.
A 518PH Magnetic Switch provides a Closed-loop circuit to ensure proper operation at all times. The 518PH allows the system to be sensitive to open
circuits, broken wires, false grounds, corrosion, loss of power and other factors which could otherwise prevent the protective controls from operating.
The mounting panel is enclosed. Panel Kits are prewired and ready to install and are available for 12 or 24 VDC systems.*
Specifications
Low Lube Pressure Swichgage: • Oil Temperature (W0169): 130-250°F (54-121°C), 1/2NPT process con-
• 0-100 psi (0-689 kPa) [0-6.89 bar]. nection (see Murphy General Catalog for optional sizes).
• 1/8 NPT process connection. • 48 in. (1.2 m) capillary.
Temperature Swichgage: 518PH Magnetic Switch: 12 or 24 volt (specify).
• Cylinder Head Temperature (W0156): 160-320°F (71-160°C), M10 x 1.5 Shipping Weight: 14lb. (6.4 kgs.).
process connection.
Shipping Dimensions: 14-7/8 x 14-7/8 x 6-3/4 in. (378 x 378 x 171 mm).
How to Order
Specify part number.
W0156: For air-cooled engines.
W0169: For liquid-cooled engines.
*NOTE: 12 volt kit is standard. If you require 24 volt kit-specify when ordering.

CAUTION: Certain danger to human and to equipment such as applied in a mobile or marine application
may occur if some equipment is stopped without pre-warning. It is therefore, recommended that moni-
tored functions be limited to alarm only or to alarm before shutdown in such applications.
 - 158 -

Dimensions
Dimensions are for both Panel Kits.

Typical Wiring Diagram for Deutz

 97077
- 159 - Revised 05-08
Section 30

Swichgage® Diagnostic Panel Kits

For Cummins B and C-Series Engines W0162 and W0163
Features
• Includes Swichgage Instruments for Critical Engine
Protection
• Complete and Ready to Install
• Provision for Throttle Cable
• Fits B and C-Series Open or Closed Power Units

Designed specifically for Cummins B and C-Series engines, these kits are complete with all components ready for installa-
tion. The kit will mount directly to Cummins supplied mounting bracket part no. EG-9907 (4B/T/TA3.9-P) or EG-9904 (6B/T/
TA5.9-P). See p-2. These kits include our exclusive SWICHGAGE®s for basic engine protection. A Closed-loop protective
circuit is provided by Murphy 518PH magnetic switch to ensure proper operation at all times.
Features
• Unitized kit with all components • Provision for additional Swichgage instruments, such as
• Shock mounted panel fully assembled irrigation pump pressure

• Closed-loop circuit • Provision for tachometer and throttle cable

• Complete wiring harness allows easy installation
Kit Includes
• Oil pressure Swichgage instruments • Key or push button start (specify)
• Coolant temperature Swichgage instruments • Face mounted fuse
• Voltmeter • Starter auxiliary solenoid kit (complete)
• Hourmeter • Necessary bolts, nuts, etc. for complete kit mounting
• Emergency stop push button
 - 160 -

Dimensions (Dimensions below are for both kits)

FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING: BEFORE BEGINNING INSTALLATION OF THIS MURPHY PRODUCT
 Disconnect all electrical power to the machine.
 Make sure the machine cannot operate during installation.
 Follow all safety warnings of the machine manufacturer.
 Read and follow all installation instructions.
Open Power Unit
1. Remove battery ground and secure to prevent unintentional contact.
2. Attach oil line to pressure Swichgage. Use sealant tape or pipe 8. Connect wire 7A to hot terminal of fuel solenoid.
dope. 9. Connect wire 8A to engine block (ground).
10. Mount starter solenoid (auxiliary magnetic switch) to bracket
CAUTION: Do not allow sealant to plug 30050670 and mount assembly to engine below starter.
pressure Swichgage orifice. 11. Connect wire 11B to starter terminal “S”
12. Connect wires 6A, 9B, and 10B to starter terminal “Batt”
3. Feed wire harness through bottom 2 in. (51 mm) dia. hole in 13. Connect wire 10A to either of the large terminals on starter
bracket EG-9907/EG-9904. solenoid (auxiliary magnetic switch). Connect wire 11A to
4. Feed oil line through upper 2 in (51 mm) dia. hole in bracket other large starter solenoid terminal.
EG-9907/EG-9904. 14. Connect wire 5A to either of the small terminals on the starter
5. Install panel onto mounting bracket and secure. solenoid. Connect wire 13A to the other small terminal.
6. Install oil line into engine oil galley. Use sealant tape or pipe 15. Connect plug (wires 1A, 4A, and 12A) to alternator.
dope. 16. Connect wire 9A and 12B to battery terminal on alternator.
7. Install temperature sensing bulb into water jacket. 17. Be sure all connections are tight and reconnect battery ground
cable.
18. Service engine according to manufacturer’s instructions.
CAUTION: Be sure capillary tube is routed
away from exhaust manifold. 19. To start engine, depress and hold red reset button on panel
face (518PH magnetic switch) while cranking. Observe that oil
pressure has been established and release reset button. If
 - 161 -

Closed Power Unit 3. Attach oil line to pressure Swichgage. Use sealant tape or pipe
1. Remove battery ground and secure to prevent unintentional dope.
contact.
2. Enlarge panel cutout on engine enclosure to fit hole pattern on CAUTION: Do not allow sealant to plug
panel face and expose full panel face. pressure Swichgage orifice.

4. Attach Swichgage panel assembly to rear side of cutout.

5. Follow steps 7 through 19 for open power units.

Typical Wiring Diagram (all models)

How to Order: Order by model number.

W0162: Includes an ignition key start
W0163: Includes push button start.
(Optional) DHK: Deluxe oil pressure line assembly
 - 162 -

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

 8426
- 163 - Revised 04-06
Section 30

Swichgage® Shutdown Panel Kit – W0168 and W0241

Features
• Protection Against Dangerously Low Oil
Pressure or High Temperature
• Closed-loop Circuitry Ensures Proper
Operation at All Times
• Operates on 12 or 24 VDC Systems*
• Complete Kit Ready for Easy Installation
• Universal Mounting Panel Description

W0168

The W0168 and W0241 panel kits are universal-fit instrument panels for most industrial engines. They include Swichgage
protection for low engine oil pressure and high coolant or high oil temperature. These Panel Kits are similar–the W0168 has
a start/stop key switch and the W0241 has a start push button.
Panel kits include:
• Low Lube Oil Pressure Swichgage instrument. • Push button for start (W0241).
• High Coolant/Oil Temperature Swichgage. • Ammeter 60-0-60.
• 518PH Magnetic Switch. • Provisions for additional Swichgage controls, such as irri-
• Emergency stop push button. gation pump pressure or engine oil temperature.

• Ignition key switch for start/stop (W0168). • Provisions for tachometer and throttle cable.

Swichgage product is two-instruments-in one: (1) an accurate indicating gage with (2) a built-in, adjustable limit switch.
A 518PH Magnetic Switch provides a Closed-loop circuit to ensure proper operation at all times. The 518PH allows the
system to be sensitive to open circuits, broken wires, false grounds, corrosion, loss of power and other factors which could
otherwise prevent the protective controls from operating.
The universal mounting panel is enclosed on all 4 sides with open back. An optional back cover (model no. 30050800) is
available for both kits. Panel Kits are prewired and ready to install and are available for 12 or 24 VDC systems.*
Specifications
Low Lube Oil Pressure Swichgage Instrument: 518PH Magnetic Switch:
• 0-100 psi (0-689 kPa) [0-6.89 bar] 12 or 24 volt (specify)
• 1/8 NPT process connection Ammeter: 60-0-60
High Coolant/Oil Temperature Swichgage Instrument: Shipping Weight: 8 lbs. 8 ozs. (3.9 kgs.)
• 130-250°F (54-121°C) Shipping Dimensions:
• 48 in. (1.2 m) capillary 16 x 11 x 5-1/2 in. (406 x 279 x 140 mm)
• 1/2 NPT process connection
How to Order
To order a Shutdown Panel Kit for your application, specify model number.
W0168
W0168B (back cover)
W0241

* NOTE: 12 volt kit is standard. If you require 24 volt kit–specify when ordering.
 - 164 -

Dimensions
Dimensions below are for both Panel Kits.

Typical Wiring Diagram

 92226
- 165 - Revised 04-06
Section 30

Swichgage® Shutdown Panel Kit Model W0270

Features
• Fits Caterpillar, Perkins and Detroit Die-
sel 4 and 6 Cylinder Engines
• Complete Kit Ready for Easy Installation
• Includes Wiring Harness
• Mount Either Side of Engine, or On Top
• Enclosed and Shock-Mounted
• Easily Expandable
The W0270 is a compact, low profile Swichgage shutdown panel kit. It is designed to fit the following power units:
• Caterpillar 3054 and 3056
• Perkins 1004 and 1006
• Detroit Diesel 1000 Series.
A universal shock-mounted bracket allows mounting on either side of the engine, or on top, for your power unit configura-
tions. The kit is ready for quick, easy installation with provision for installing customer supplied ignition/start key switch. All
wiring is included in the panel.
This panel kit is ideal for all types of power unit applications–irrigation pumps, grain dryers, compressors, generators, etc.
Standard Features
• Engine oil pressure monitoring Swichgage instrument • Provision for customer supplied key switch (loom is
(20P-F) prewired–mount and plug-in)
• Coolant temperature monitoring Swichgage instrument • Provision for optional tachometer or hourmeter (loom is
(20T-F) prewired)
• Voltmeter (VM12/VM24) • Provision for one additional Swichgage instrument such
• Closed-loop 518PH Magnetic Switch as irrigation pump discharge pressure monitoring

• Emergency stop button (PB128S) • All items prewired including tachometer or hourmeter

• Provision for throttle cable • Complete external wiring harness including wiring for
pre-heat and shutdown solenoid
How to Order
Specify model number and voltage when ordering.
W0270 – ____

12: 12 VDC
24: 24VDC

Order oil line assembly separately.

 - 166 -

Dimensions

FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW

BOTTOM VIEW
 03114
- 167 - Revised 07-28-10
Section 30

MurphyLink® Series M110 Panels

Features
• Standard panel designed for modern electronic
engines and equipment applications using
SAE J1939 Controller Area Network (CAN)
• PowerView displays over 30 standard SAE
J1939 parameters broadcast by major engine
and transmission manufacturer’s ECU’s
• Display active faults and ECU-stored faults
with text description on most common faults for
diagnosing equipment malfunctions
• Standard harnesses available for most major
engine manufacturers ECU’s
• Enclosed design or flat panel option
• Deutsch connectors
Introducing the new M110 Series panels using the new PowerView System. It is available in an enclosure or stand-alone flat panel option that can be
dropped into a dash. The PowerView is a powerful new display in a line of components manufactured as part of its J1939 MurphyLink® Family. These
products have been developed to meet the needs for instrumentation and control on electronically controlled engines communicating using the SAE
J1939 Controller Area Network (CAN).
The PowerView is a multifunction tool that enables equipment operators to view many different engine or transmission parameters and service codes. The
panels provide a window into modern electronic engines. The PowerView includes a graphical backlighted LCD screen. It has excellent contrast and view-
ing from all angles. The display can show either a single parameter or a quadrant display for viewing four parameters simultaneously. Diagnostic capabili-
ties include fault codes with text translation for the most common fault conditions.
The PowerView has four buttons using touch-sensitive technology, which eliminates the concern for push button wear and failure. In addition operators
can navigate the display with ease. Enhanced alarm indication uses ultra bright alarm and shutdown LED’s (amber and red). The PowerView has a wide
operating temperature range of -40 to +85°C (-40 to185°F), display viewing -29 to +75°C (-20 to 167°F), and environmental sealing to +/- 5 PSI.
This basic panel contains a key switch, increment/decrement throttle and the PowerView. This standard panel can be ordered with or without an enclo-
sure, since all of the components are assembled to a stand-a-lone flat panel. Optional mounting kits are offered for the enclosure, which provide packag-
ers and operators numerous mounting solutions to meet multiple applications. Panel designs are offered to meet the needs of specific engine models. In
addition, FWMurphy offers standard harnesses for quick Plug and Go operation that interface with all the 2nd Generation MurphyLink® PowerView
panels.
Display Parameters
The following are some of the engine and transmission parameters displayed by the PowerView in English or Metric units (when applicable), consult
engine or transmission manufacturer for SAE J1939 supported parameters.
• Engine RPM • Engine Manifold Air Temperature
• Engine Hours • Current Fuel Consumption
• Machine Hours • Transmission Gear Oil Pressure
• System Voltage • Transmission Gear Oil Temperature
• % Engine Load at the Current RPM • Transmission Gear Position
• Coolant Temperature • Active Service Codes
• Oil Pressure • Stored Service Codes from the Engine
• Fuel Economy • Set Units for Display (English or Metric)
• Throttle Position • View Engine Configuration Parameters
 - 168 -

Dimensions Flat Panel (only) Includes Shock Mounts

Dimensions in Enclosure Includes Shock Mounts

Surface Mount Dimension (optional) Kit P/N 32-00-0033

 - 169 -

Recessed Mount Dimension (optional) Kit P/N 32-00-0035

NOTE: It is the user’s responsibility to verify that the electronic control module (ECM) has been programmed
to support these control features, and that the appropriate external wire harness or other interconnecting wir-
ing has been installed from the panel to the ECM.

How to Order
To order, use the model number designation diagram below.
M-LINK M110 Panel Model Number Order Matrix for CUMMINS, CATERPILLAR, PERKINS,
DETROIT DIESEL Engines
 - 170 -

M-LINK M010 External Harnesses Model Number Order Matrix For M110 Panels CUMMINS,
CATERPILLAR, PERKINS, DETROIT DIESEL Engines
 03022
- 171 - Revised 07-28-10
Section 30

MurphyLink® Series M310 Panels

Features
• Standard panel designed for modern electronic
engines and equipment applications using
SAE J1939 Controller Area Network (CAN)
• PowerView displays over 30 standard SAE
J1939 parameters broadcast by major engine
and transmission manufacturer’s ECU’s
• Display active faults and ECU-stored faults
with text description on most common faults for
diagnosing equipment malfunctions
• Standard harnesses available for most major
engine manufacturers ECU’s
• Enclosed design or flat panel option
• Deutsch connectors

The M310 Series Panels include the PowerView and the Mlink™ PowerView Analog Gages. They are part of the J1939 MurphyLink® Family developed
to meet the needs for instrumentation and control on electronically controlled engines communicating using the SAE J1939 Controller Area Network
(CAN).
The PowerView is a multifunction tool that enables equipment operators to view many different engine or transmission parameters and service codes.
The panels provide a window into modern electronic engines. The PowerView includes a graphical backlighted LCD screen. It has excellent contrast and
viewing from all angles. The display can show either a single parameter or a quadrant display for viewing four parameters simultaneously. Diagnostic
capabilities include fault codes with text translation for the most common fault conditions.
The PowerView has four buttons using touch-sensitive technology, which eliminates the concern for push button wear and failure. In addition operators
can navigate the display with ease. Enhanced alarm indication uses ultra bright alarm and shutdown LED’s (amber and red). The PowerView has a wide
operating temperature range of -40 to +85°C (-40 to185°F), display viewing -29 to +75°C (-20 to 167°F), and environmental sealing to +/- 5 PSI.
Other components in the panels are microprocessor-based M-Link™ PowerView Analog Gages for displaying critical engine data broadcast by an elec-
tronic engine: engine RPM, oil pressure, coolant temperature, system voltage, etc. and an optional audible alarm and relay unit for warning and shutdown
annunciation.
The M310 Series panels are available in an enclosure or stand-alone flat panel option that can be dropped into a dash or console. This standard panel can
be ordered with or without an enclosure, since all of the components are assembled to a stand-a-lone flat panel. Optional mounting kits are offered for the
enclosure, which provide packagers and operators numerous mounting solutions to meet multiple applications. Panel designs are offered to meet the
needs of specific engine models. In addition, FWMurphy offers standard harnesses for quick Plug and Go operation that interface with all the
MurphyLink® PowerView panels.
Display Parameters
The following are some of the engine and transmission parameters displayed by the PowerView in English or Metric units (when applicable), consult
engine or transmission manufacturer for SAE J1939 supported parameters.
• Engine RPM • Engine Manifold Air Temperature
• Engine Hours • Current Fuel Consumption
• Machine Hours • Transmission Gear Oil Pressure
• System Voltage • Transmission Gear Oil Temperature
• % Engine Load at the Current RPM • Transmission Gear Position
• Coolant Temperature • Active Service Codes
• Oil Pressure • Stored Service Codes from the Engine
• Fuel Economy • Set Units for Display (English or Metric)
• Throttle Position • View Engine Configuration Parameters
 - 172 -

Dimensions
Dimensions Flat Panel (only) Dimensions in Enclosure
Includes Shock Mounts Includes Shock Mounts

NOTE 1: Flat Panel has approximately 8 inch leads on connectors.

Typical application shown, features vary per engine application.
NOTE 2: Allow 4.50 in.(114 mm) minimum mounting depth for versions
with Morse throttle. For all other version allow 3.25 in. (83 mm) mini-
mum depth.

Surface Mount Dimension Recessed Mount Dimension

(optional) Kit P/N 32-00-0033 (optional) Kit P/N 32-00-0035

NOTE: It is the user’s responsibility to verify that the electronic control module (ECM) has been programmed
to support these control features, and that the appropriate external wire harness or other interconnecting wir-
ing has been installed from the panel to the ECM.
 - 173 -

How to Order
To order, use the model number designation diagram below.
M-LINK M310 Panel Model Number Configurator for CUMMINS Engines

M-LINK External Harnesses for CUMMINS Engines

 - 174 -

How to Order, continued

To order, use the model number designation diagram below.
M-LINK M310 Panel Model Number Configurator for CATERPILLAR Engines or Perkins 1100D

M-LINK External Harnesses for CATERPILLAR and Perkins 1100 Series Engines
 - 175 -

How to Order, continued

To order, use the model number designation diagram below.
M-LINK M310 Panel Model Number Configurator for
PERKINS Engines–1100C Series or CATERPILLAR–3000E Series (ADEM4 ECM)

M-LINK External Harnesses for

PERKINS–1100C Series or CATERPILLAR–3000E Series (ADEM4 ECM)
 - 176 -

How to Order, continued

To order, use the model number designation diagram below.
M-LINK M310 Panel Model Number Configurator for
PERKINS Engines–1300 Series and 2000 Series or DETROIT DIESEL–Series 40

M-LINK External Harnesses for PERKINS 1300 Series or DETROIT DIESEL–Series 40 Engines
 - 177 -

How to Order, continued

To order, use the model number designation diagram below.
M-LINK M310 Panel Model Number Configurator for
DETROIT DIESEL Engines–Series 50/60 and Series 2000

M-LINK External Harnesses for DETROIT DIESEL–Series 50/60 and Series 2000
 - 178 -

How to Order, continued

M-LINK M310 Panel Model Number Configurator for FORD Engines

M-LINK External Harnesses for FORD Engines

 - 179 -

How or Order - continued

M-LINK M310 Panel Model Number Configurator for IVECO Engines

M-LINK External Harnesses for IVECO Engines

 - 180 -

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

 0910438
- 181 - 11-28-08
Section 30

Automatic Engine Controller - Model AEC101

- 182 -
- 183 -
 - 184 -

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

 SECTION 40 ENGINE AND MOTOR CONTROLS

Engine and Generator Controls

0810288 Keystart 9620 Series – Engine and Generator Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
0810330 CANstart 9630 Series – Engine and Generator Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Auto Start Controllers
94012 Automatic Engine Controller ASM150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
03021 ASM170 Auto Start Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
97079 MURPHYMATIC® Engine Micro-Controller A91 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
05195 Auto-Start/Stop Controller – Cascade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Digital Engine Controller
1010554 EMS PRO Engine Monitoring Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
1110770 EMS PRO LITE - Engine Monitoring System Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
0910364 EMS467 Monitoring System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
92199 Electronic Monitoring Systems – EMS447 / EMS448 Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
95122 Electronic Monitoring System/Controller – Model EMS547 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Rack Pullers
00092 Pull/Push DC Solenoids for Diesel Engines – RP2900 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
95028 Rack Puller for Diesel Engines – Model RP75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Throttle Controller
04052 MURPHYMATIC® Engine Throttle Controller – Model AT03069 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Clutch Controller
01035 Electric Motor Driven Clutch Operator for Engine Automation Systems – Model CO3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Electric Motor Controllers
0910462 Transformer Relay Assemblies TR Series by MURPHYMATIC® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Murphy Power Ignition Controls
0910474 MPI-8/16/32 Ignition Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
0910517 MPI Ignition Control Systems (Murphy Power Ignition) – MPI 601 Series CD Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
0910515 MPI Detonation Sensing Interface System – Model DSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
0910514 Power Supply (Murphy Power Ignition) – MPI Brushless Alternators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
0910513 MPI Ignition Control Systems (Murphy Power Ignition) – MPI Ignition Coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Air-Fuel Ratio Controls - Compliance Controls
0910476 AFR-1R – Rich Burn Air-Fuel Ratio Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
0910477 AFR-9R – Multipoint Air-Fuel Ratio Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
0910475 AFR-64R – Rich-Burn Air-Fuel Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
0910491 AFR-64L – Lean-Burn Air-Fuel Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
0910478 AFR-FI – Air-Fuel Ratio Controller for Fuel Injected Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
1010670 EICS – Engine Integrated Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

 0810288
- 185 - 01-29-10
Section 40&75

Keystart 9620 Series - Engine and Generator Controls

- 186 -
 0810330
- 187 - 01-29-10
Section 40 & 75

CANstart™ 9630 Series

Engine and Generator Controls
- 188 -
 94012
- 189 - Revised 01-04
Section 40

Automatic Engine Controller ASM150

Features
• Ideal for Generators
• Solid-state Construction
• Compatible with Most New or Existing Murphy
SWICHGAGE® Monitoring Systems
• Advanced, Rugged, Reliable Microprocessor
Based Design
• Built-in Crank Disconnect and Overspeed Switch
• First-out Shutdown LED Description

The ASM150 is a user friendly, solid-state, automatic engine controller. It provides basic automatic start/stop capabilities
plus other features found on more sophisticated and expensive controllers.
The ASM150 operates from 12 or 24 volt battery. It includes features such as selectable crank and rest cycles, sensing cir-
cuit for crank disconnect and overspeed, overcrank, and re- crank protection on false starts. Four LEDs indicate first-out
shutdown for: low pressure, high temperature, overcrank and overspeed. A fifth LED indicates engine running.
Advanced microprocessor circuitry gives the ASM150 high reliability and flexibility.
The ASM150 is compact and housed in a corrosion-resistant case. It mounts flush in a panel and requires very little room.
Ideal for small generator or engine panels.
Features
• Compact design • Two (2) Element Adjustable Speed Switch
• Optically Isolated Noise Resistant Inputs • Outputs for Cranking and Fuel Valve
• Re-Cranks Engine on False Starts • Outputs for Fault Annunciation
• Adjustable Lockout Time Delay During Startup • Lamp Test Terminal
Specifications
Power Input: 12 or 24 VDC. Crank/Rest Cycle Timing: 4 to 25 seconds (adjustable).
Operating Temperature: -40 to 185°F (-40 to +85°C). Lockout Time Delay: 1 to 25 seconds (adjustable). Locks
Inputs: Ground or positive inputs for high temperature or out low oil and high temperature on start-up.
low pressure sensors. Crank Disconnect Speed Setting: From 30 to 8500 Hz.
Outputs: Overspeed Trip Point Setting: From 30 to 8500 Hz.
• 5 A relay for cranking and fuel valve. Magnetic Pickup Input: Requires 2V rms minimum.
• 300 mA transistor for fault annunciation. Shipping Weight: 1 lb. 2 oz. (0.51 kg.).
Cycle Crank Timer: Up to 8 attempts. Re-Cranks on false Shipping Dimensions: 5 x 4-3/4 x 2-3/4 in. (127 x 121 x
starts (fixed 30 seconds). 70 mm).
 - 190 -

Dimensions

Typical Wiring Diagram

How to Order
Specify ASM150-14.

CAUTION: Certain danger to human and to equipment such as applied in a mobile or

marine application may occur if some equipment is stopped without pre-warning. It
is therefore, recommended that monitored functions be limited to alarm only or to
alarm before shutdown in such applications.
 03021
- 191 - Revised 01-15-10
Section 40

ASM170 Auto Start Module

Features
• Ideal for all basic auto-start/stop
• Programmable Multifunction Output
• Extended Operating Temperature Range
• Excellent Low Voltage Performance
• Compact Size Retrofits Existing ASM150
Installations
• Built-In Manual-Off-Auto Toggle Switch
• Smart FET Outputs Description

The ASM170 is a compact yet powerful engine auto-start module. It offers flexibility and features normally found in much
larger and more expensive units. Its high density MOLEX plug makes it ideal for panel builders. It can also be easily
replaced in the field if problems should arise.
With the on-board Manual-Off-Automatic switch, Panel wiring is greatly simplified.
Its unique design also allows it to draw virtually no current in standby mode, yet be able to auto-start based on a sustained
or momentary contact closure.
Features
The ASM170 is typically used in generator applications but can be applied anywhere a basic auto-start operation is
required. Basic functions include engine crank/rest, crank disconnect, overspeed, low oil pressure, high engine tempera-
ture, low levels and spare shutdowns. The start signal to the controller can be momentary or sustained.
It also has a multifunction output that can be selected to perform one of the following functions:
• Glowplug • Cooldown
• Warmup/Cooldown • Choke
• Warmup • Air Damper Shutoff
Specifications
Power Input: 6 to 28 VDC. Crank/Rest Cycle Timing: Field adjustable 1 to 30 sec-
Power Consumption Standby: <1 mA. onds.
Operating Temperature: -40 to 185°F (-40 to +85°C). Multifunction Output: Field programmable to one of the
Inputs: Ground or positive inputs for high temperature, low following options: Glowplug, Cooldown, Warmup/
oil pressure, High/Low Level, Auxiliary/Remote Stop Cooldown, Warmup, Air gate – Overspeed Only, Air
sensors. gate – Always, Choke, or Auxiliary Run output.
Lamp Test: When unit is powered up in Manual or Auto, Shutdown Lockout Time Delay: Field adjustable 1 to 300
the LED’s light for 1 second as a test. seconds. Locks out low oil pressure, high temperature,
and loss of speed shutdowns on start-up.
Outputs: 5A smart FET for cranking and multifunction out-
put. 10A smart FET for Fuel Valve (Energized to Run) Crank Disconnect Speed Setting: From 13 to 2500 Hz.
output. All 3 supply battery “+” 125 mA transistor for Overspeed Trip Point Setting: From 13 to 8500 Hz.
common failure, engine run, and auxiliary output. (Sink Speed Sensing Input: 1.5VAC RMS to 140 VAC RMS.
to battery “-”) Shipping Weight: 1 lb. (.45 kg.)
Crank Attempts: Selectable for 3, 5, 10, or 255. Shipping Dimensions: 6.25 x 6.25 x 4.5 in. (159 x 159 x
114 mm).
 - 192 -

CAUTION: Certain danger to human and to equipment such as applied in a mobile or

marine application may occur if some equipment is stopped without pre-warning. It
is therefore, recommended that monitored functions be limited to alarm only or to
alarm before shutdown in such applications.

How to Order:

ASM170 00009126 ASM170 Standard with Toggle Switch

ASM170-LT 00009347 ASM170 without Toggle Switch
ASM170-LT160 40700252 ASM160 Replacement Kit
INCLUDES: 40000168 Drilling Template with terminal block and wire harness
00009347 ASM170 without Toggle Switch

NOTE: P/N 40000138 connector and 4 ft. wire harness must be ordered separately if
required.
 97079
- 193 - Revised 07-99
Section 40

MURPHYMATIC® Engine Micro-Controller A91 Series

Features
• Microprocessor Based Automatic
Controller
• Field Programmable Trip Points
• Five LED Signal Indicators
• Startup Lockout Timer
• Interfaces With Other Existing Murphy
Products
• NEMA 3R “Weatherproof” Enclosure
Description

A completely unattended startup/shutdown and run controller for engine driven equipment. This user friendly, compact, state-of-the-art microprocessor
based controller, covers all basic start stop operations plus other features only found on more sophisticated and expensive controllers.
The A91 is designed to operate from a 12 or 24 volt battery, and requires a magnetic sensor (pickup) for speed detection. It includes features, such as
crank and rest cycles, time delay lockouts, sensing circuit for crank disconnect and over-speed, time delays before start and stop. Warmup and cool down
are connected only on the WC model. Four LED’s indicate shutdown for: low lube oil, high temperature, over crank and over- speed, and are reset by turn-
ing the power off. A fifth LED for engine running indicates when crank disconnect occurs.
The micro-controller is available in several configurations and is factory programmed. Certain parameters can be field adjusted without altering the basic
control program. Custom programming of the microchip is available to OEM’s and quantity orders.
The A91 is housed in a NEMA 3R enclosure with a hinged and gasketed dead front door. This weatherproof enclosure includes two 1/2 in. conduit holes,
[7/8 in. (22 mm) diameter] in the bottom for input and output wiring.
All of the electrical components are installed on a “box” shaped, hinged front sub panel assembly. This working assembly can be purchased and installed
in the user’s choice of enclosures.
Applications
A variety of applications can be covered with the micro-controller such as:
• Air/Gas Compressors • Booster/Transfer Pumps
• Standby Generator Sets • Municipal Fresh/Waste Water Treatment
• Fire/Pipeline/Emergency Flood Pumps • Sewage Lift Stations
Models Available
A91: For less than 5 amp current draw up to 24 VDC electric run output* A91-WC: Same as A91–with a warmup/cooldown relay.
A91-S: For 10 amp current draw up to 240 VDC electric run output* A91-S-WC: Same as A91-S–with a warmup/cooldown relay.
Any Model -LC: Less weatherproof enclosure.
* Run output is the voltage and current required for an ignition system, fuel
valve, or solenoid actuator that allows the engine to run.

Features
The A91 Series combines the advantages of solid state microprocessor control logic with the dependability of Murphy’s experience in Engine Automation
Systems. This engine controller eliminates the need for most electromechanical logic and control relays, while providing built-in design features:
• Applicable to All Types of Engines • Quality 16 point Terminal Block
• Built-in Speed Sensing Circuit with: • Either start from remote contact close to start, open to stop, or N.O.
• Adjustable Crank Disconnect RPM contacts close to start, close to stop.
• Adjustable Over speed RPM • Relays are plug-in type with LED indicator for fast service and mainte-
nance.
• Three-position Selector Switch allows for “Automatic” “Off” or “Test”
mode. Optional Features
• Engine Running LED indicator -S: Includes a relay to isolate magneto and capacitor discharge igni-
• Four First-Out Shutdown LED indicators for: tion systems.
• Low Lube Oil -WC: Includes a relay for loading and unloading driven equipment for
• High Temperature engine warmup and cooldown.
• Overcrank
• Overspeed
 - 194 -

Specifications
Power Input: 12 or 24 VDC nominal (specify). • Auto: Automatic start/stop sequencing is initiated by external
Standby Power Consumption: <50mA. switches and signals.
Magnetic Pickup Input: Requires 2 V rms minimum. Cycle Crank Timer: 5 crank attempts 7 seconds each; 4 rest periods 15
Sensor Input Polarity: Negative (-). seconds each, before overcrank.
Overspeed Trip Point Setting: From 2500-9000 Hz.
Outputs: Five (5) open collector transistor 500 mA sink.
Two (2) relay, 5 Amp maximum at 12 or 24 VDC (sourcing). Crank Disconnect Speed Setting: From 400-2500 Hz.
Reverse Polarity Protection: 200 volt peak reverse voltage. Shutdown Time Delay: 15 seconds after engine start; locks out low lube
oil and high temperature.
On-board Memory: 8k PROM (programmable, read only memory); data
retention 10 years. Engine Run LED: Turns “on” when crank disconnect occurs.
Operating Temperature Range: -20 to 140?F (-25 to 60°C). Shutdown Output: Removes DC output or operates dry relay contacts for
Operating Humidity Range: 0-95% Non-Condensing engine shutdown (depending on model used).
Start/Stop: SPDT momentary; or SPST maintained switches.
User Trip point Adjustments: Five (5) on-board potentiometers (320°
turn). Warmup Time Delay: Field adjustable from 0-300 seconds to load the
engine after warmup (model -WC only).
Test-Off-Automatic Toggle Switch: Three position switch for:
Cooldown Time Delay: Field adjustable from 0-300 seconds (model -WC
• Test: Starts engine in automatic mode and runs until switched “off” only).
or emergency shutdown occurs.
Enclosure: Weatherproof NEMA 3R.
• Off: Disconnects all power to control circuits, Stop/disables engine
from starting and resets shutdown indicators. Enclosure Coating: Red enamel.

Dimensions

How to Order
NOTE: Run output is 5 amp @ 12 or 24 VDC. Run output is the
voltage required for an ignition system, fuel valve, or solenoid actu-
ator that allows the engine to run.

Accessories
MP3298: Magnetic pickup.
00002062: 12 V auxiliary starter solenoid.
00002063: 24 V auxiliary starter solenoid.
AT67207: Throttle controller.
CO3: Clutch actuator.
 05195
- 195 - Revised 03-15-11
Section 40 & 75

Auto-Start/Stop Controller — Cascade

Features
• Durable encapsulated protection against
dirt, water, and dust – rated NEMA4 and
IP65
• Operates during low battery blackouts
• Compatible with Electronic and
Mechanical engines – ECU, MPU,
AC Frequency
• J1939 Ready – Works directly with
MurphyLink J1939 PowerView gages

The Cascade controller offers automatic start and stop control with easy configuration for a broad number of applications.
This auto-start controller is designed to fit any engine-driven application requiring a simple and robust automatic start and
stop sequence. Pumps, Compressors, Grinders, Power Units and Generators are just few of the industrial applications for
the controller.
The Cascade controller is fully compatible with all major engine types. Whether you are running mechanical or J1939
engines, the controller will work with your application.
Here are some of the unique features of the Cascade that only Murphy can offer at our competitive price.
• Durability: Encapsulated to protect it against dirt, water and dust, along with a compression gasket to fully seal it to the
panel. Cascade is rated NEMA4 and IP65.
• Low Battery Blackouts: Operates in total blackout for a minimum of two seconds.
• Compatibility: Accept MPU, AC Frequency and ECU speed signals and can operate with standard and J1939 engines.
• Inputs and Outputs: The Cascade Inputs and Outputs are ruggedly protected and fault tolerant.
• J1939 Ready: Works directly with Murphy’s J1939-ready PowerView gages, just plug and go, no sender is required.
• CD101 Cascade Configuration Tool: Allows quick setup and loading of parameters into a Murphy standard Cascade
via a PC software tool.
Specifications
Power input: 9-35VDC continuous - operates during total black- Outputs: 7 – 4 auxiliary, configurable (1A DC protected). 3 dedi-
out for 2 seconds minimum. cated outputs for Crank, Fuel/ECU, Alternator excitation.
Power consumption: Sleep Mode (Manual): 1mA typical; Sleep Crank attempts: 3, 5, 10, Continuous.
Mode (Automatic): 4mA typical. Running Mode (Manual): Crank Rest: 5-60 seconds, adjustable.
20mA typical; Running Mode (Automatic): 24mA typical. Shutdown lockout time delay: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 seconds.
Operating/Storage temperature: -40 to 85°C; (-40 to 185°F). Crank disconnect speed setting: Field settable 0-9999 RPM
Humidity: 0-100%, non-condensing. (16-60Hz AC freq input).
Housing: UV stabilized black polycarbonate and epoxy encapsu- Overspeed/underspeed trip point setting: ±5 to 50% of nomi-
lation. Weather tight and includes sealing gasket to keep nal.
moisture and debris out of enclosure. Properly mounted con- Speed sensing inputs: Magnetic pickup (5-120VAC RMS / 0-10
troller will maintain NEMA4 / IP65 rating of enclosure. kHz) & AC frequency (30-600VAC RMS / 16-80 Hz).
Vibration: Rated to 6G. CANbus interface: Directly reads engine speed, & engine status
Impact: Rated to 10G. data* from SAE-J1939 enabled engines.
Inputs: Dedicated digital inputs for low oil pressure, high engine MODbus interface: In J1939 applications drives PVA series
temperature, remote start, DC charge fail/Alternator fail. Two analog gages.
aux inputs are configurable for multiple functions.

*Engine status data limited to low oil pressure, high engine temperature, “Wait to start” status, Warning & Fault lamp information, and communication
error.
 - 196 -

Cascade Auto-Start Controller Dimensions

Front View Back View

How to Order
To Order specify: CD101 P/N 40700259
Shipping Weight: 1 lb. (453 g) approximately.
Shipping Dimensions: 5.1 x 6.7 x 1.6 inch (130 x 170 x 41 mm) approx.

Accessories
CD101 Cascade Configuration Kit P/N:40090045
 1010554
- 197 - 05-31-11
Section 40

EMS PRO - Engine Monitoring System Controller

Shown with
optional clear door. Features
• Supports Mechanical and J1939 Electronic Engines
• Automatic Start/Stop
• Backlit Graphical Display
• Shutdown History File
• First-Out Shutdowns and/or Alarm Indicating LEDs
• Field Adjustable Parameters
• Supports TSC1 Throttle Messaging
* • Wide Operating Temperature Range
• IP66 Rated
• Internet Ready Utilizing Modbus® RTU with Auxiliary
Equipment
• Real Time Clock in 24 Hour Format
*Approved by CSA for Non-hazardous locations (Group Safety
Publication IEC 61010-1) • NEMA 4X Enclosure with Optional Clear Door
The EMS PRO is a flexible all-in-one customizable unit that meets the needs of engine-driven pumping equipment applica-
tions. The EMS PRO is a dedicated microprocessor-based, single engine controller. It offers field-adjustable operating
parameters that can be changed without the need for a computer. It is also able to support both mechanical and J1939
electronic engines.
The EMS PRO has selectable auto start/stop features with several throttling options. The auto start/stop options (Single
Contact, Floats, Momentary, Transducer and Clock) are available at the touch of a button. The Transducer start/stop option
includes three settings; pressure, level and temperature. In addition, there are many performance-enhancing features, all
of which are available through an operator interface that is easy to learn and use. The EMS PRO is ideal for use with a
remote modem or in a SCADA system offering Modbus RTU protocol on either the RS232 or RS485 port.
The EMS PRO has the ability to withstand a wide ambient temperature range and comes standard in a NEMA 4X rated
enclosure secured by four rubber shock mounts. Inside is a backlit graphical display visible day or night and under all kinds
of conditions.
Communications
The EMS PRO has RS485, RS232 and J1939 CAN communication ports. The standard unit uses RS485 or RS232 for
Modbus RTU. At the same time, the CAN port allows J1939 communication with the engine ECU to display engine param-
eters and control the throttle via TSC1 if supported by the engine.
How to Order
P/N 40-70-0301 EMS PRO
P/N 40-70-0302 EMS PRO with Optional Clear Door
NOTE: Care should be taken when selecting the optional clear door when used in applications involving direct sunlight exposure. Direct sunlight can cause premature
component failure by allowing the sealed enclosure temperature to exceed the rated 80oC/175oF.

Accessories
The EMS PRO has (2) Deutsch HDP connectors, 21 pin and 31 pin, for easy field wiring.
Harness Options:
• P/N 40-00-0479 EMS PRO 21-pin & 31-pin Connector Kit
• P/N 40-00-0480 EMS PRO 10’ 21-pin & 31-pin Harness Kit
• P/N 40-00-0481 EMS PRO 10’ 31-pin I/O Harness
• MEH Adapter Harness: Please contact Industrial Panel Sales for application specific adapter harness.
• MEH Harness: Please contact Industrial Panel Sales for application specific MEH harness.
 - 198 -

Specifications
Operating Voltage (12 and 24 systems): Inputs:
• 8 VDC minimum to 32 VDC maximum Analog Inputs: (12) designated via program; sender/ground
Environmental digital, 4 -20mA, 0-5 VDC.
Operating Temperature: -40° to 80°C (-40° to 176°F) Digital Inputs: (8) high/low
NOTE: Care should be taken when selecting the option clear Frequency: 1 optically-isolated input for speed reference,
door when used in applications involving sunlight exposure.
Direct sunlight can cause premature component failure by
magnetic pick-up. (2VAC-50VAC RMS)
allowing the sealed enclosure temperature to exceed the Fuel Sender Input: 33 Ohm full, 240 Ohm empty
rated 80oC/175oF. Outputs:
Storage Temperature: -40° to 80°C (-40° to 176°F) Digital Outputs: (3) FET B+ (rated at 1A)
Relays: 1 SPDT and 8 SPST 5 Amp pilot relays (maximum
Environmental Sealing: IP66
NOTE: Meets IP66 when the door is closed AND latched. relay ground current limited to 23 amps).
Relative Humidity: 95%RH @ 60°C User Interface: (8) button membrane switch
Standby Current: Connectors: 21pin and 31pin Deutsch HDP20 Series
• (@ 12VDC) 220mA Mounting: 4 isolated .75 inch rubber shock mounts
• (@ 24VDC) 255mA Shipping Weight: 11 Lb. (5 kg.)
CAN Bus: SAE J1939 compliant Shipping Dimensions (all models):
Enclosure: Polycarbonate NEMA 4X (UL Certified) • 15 x 15 x 11 in. (381 x 381 x 279.4 mm)

Product Dimensions
 1110770
- 199 - 01-16-12
Section 40

EMS PRO LITE Engine Monitoring System Controller

Features
• Supports Mechanical and J1939 Electronic Engines
• Automatic Start/Stop
• Backlit Graphical Display
• Shutdown History File
• First-out Shutdown and/or Alarm Indicating LEDs
• Field Adjustable Parameters
• Supports TSC1 Throttle Messaging
• Wide Operating Temperature Range
• IP65 Rated
• Internet-ready utilizing Modbus® RTU with Auxiliary
Equipment

The EMS PRO LITE is a customizable pump-controller designed specifically with dewatering and irrigation applications
in mind. This versatile unit supports both Mechanical and J1939 Electronic engines, thus eliminating the need to stock
multiple controllers. A step ahead, the EMS PRO LITE is Tier 4 & Stage IIIB/IV ready.

The operator interface is a responsive 8-button membrane keypad and backlit graphical display mounted directly to the
front of a rugged NEMA 4 enclosure.

A microprocessor-based controller, the EMS PRO LITE operating parameters are field-adjustable without the need for
a computer. However, the EMS PRO LITE can be modified for use with a remote modem or in a SCADA system with
MODBus® RTU protocols on either an RS232 or RS485 port.

EMS PRO LITE offers Auto Start/Stop with 2-Float and Transducer settings (pressure and level). Throttle to Level,
Pressure, or maximum RPM (desired RPM) is offered.

The robust EMS PRO LITE is engineered for 12 VDC systems (8 VDC minimum to 14.4 VDC maximum) and a wide
operating temperature. Connectors are industry-standard Deutsch for superior sealing and quick disconnect.

Communications
The EMS PRO LITE has RS485, RS232 and J1939 CAN communication ports. The standard unit uses RS485 or
RS232 for Modbus RTU. At the same time, the CAN port allows J1939 communication with the engine ECU to display
engine parameters and control the throttle via TSC1, if supported by the engine.

How to Order
Part # Description
40700305 EMS PRO LITE
Accessories
40000521 21-pin and 9-pin, 10 ft (3.048m) Whip Harness Kit for Mechanical Engines
40000522 9-pin, 10 ft (3.048m) Whip Harness for I/O
40000523 9-pin Connector Kit for I/O with terminals
40000524 21-pin and 9-pin Connector Kit with terminals
MEH Adapter Harness: Please contact Industrial Panel Sales for application specific adapter harness.
MEH Harness: Please contact Industrial Panel Sales for application specific MEH harness.
 - 200 -

Specifications
Operating Voltage: 8 VDC Minimum to 14.4 VDC Maximum Operating Temperature: -40° to 80°C (-40° to 176°F)
Relative Humidity: 95%RH @ 60°F (140°C) Storage Temperature: -40° to 80°C (-40° to 176°F)
Enclosure: Polycarbonate NEMA 4 (UL/cUL listed) Environmental Sealing: IP65
Shipping Weight: 7 lb. (3.2 hg)
Shipping Dimensions: 12” x 12” x 10” (304.8 x 304.8 x 254 mm)

Analog Inputs: 6 Analog Inputs designed via program; sender/ground digital 4-20mA, 0-5 VDC.
Digital Inputs: 4 Digital Inputs High/Low (Both Battery+ and ground are detected as active inputs. An inactive input
floats at approximately 1/2 B.
Frequency: 1 optically isolated input for speed reference, magnetic pick-up, (2VAC-50VAC RMS, 30-10kHz)
Fuel Sender Input: 33 Ohm full, 240 Ohm empty
Analog Output: 4-20mA or 0.4 to 4.2VDC (used for 0.4 – 4.2V throttling)
Digital Outputs: 6 Digital Outputs; 3 FET B+ (rated at 1A), 3 Open Collector sink-to-ground 100 mA (one of these is
used to pilot a relay).
Communications: RS485, RS232, CAN J1939, CAN 2.0B ports

Product Dimensions
 0910364
- 201 - Revised 03-02-10
Section 40

EMS467 Monitoring System

Features
• Internet Ready
• Field Adjustable Parameters
• First-Out Shutdowns and/or Alarms
• Shutdown History File
• Service Reminders
• Four Communications Ports
• Back Lit Alphanumeric Display
• Flash Programmable
• Approved for Class I, Division 2 Groups A, B, C, D Hazard-
ous locations.

The EMS467 Electronic Monitoring System/Controller is micro-processor based for monitoring and control of equipment functions. It is
especially suited to tasks requiring remote modem or SCADA communications. The four built-in communication ports provide a variety of
communications capabilities.
Basic programs provide selectable auto or manual start/stop and first-out shutdown for engine functions such as pressure, temperature,
level and overspeed. Time delays for lock out during start up are included. The EMS467 can be applied as an RTU to interface between
SCADA applications and other control platforms.
With an inexpensive wireless data modem attached, the EMS467 can be used for remote monitoring and control through the internet.
The unit can send emails, serve web pages, and transmit data to remote servers.
An external PC card reader can be used with the EMS467 to log data from flow meters, pressure transmitters, electric gauge senders,
and other sensing devices. This is a popular application in the flood control market.
Operating data is displayed on a 32 character back-lit alpha-numeric liquid crystal display. An on-board real-time clock keeps a log of
equipment running hours and alerts you when to change oil, filters and perform other routine service.
The EMS467 operating parameters are configured through a simple three-button interface. Access to the system memory is controlled
by entry codes.
A password-protected program uses a built-in memory to display the alarm/shutdown history, including a display of the last ten shut-
downs, when and why they occurred, and displays all of the engine operating conditions at the time of the last shutdown.

Communications
The EMS467 has one RS485, one RS232, and two J1939 CAN communication ports. By using these ports and the necessary software,
you can monitor and control your equipment from a remote location.
With the CAN ports, you can communicate to an electronic engine and display engine operation information on the display.

Sensor Inputs
Digital Inputs (DI) - Number of devices: 8
Device types: discrete input, optically isolated, normally open (N/O) or normally closed (N/C), bi-polar (active high positive voltage/active
low negative voltage), non-incendive.

Analog Inputs (AI) - Number of devices: 8

Device types: analog input (7-field selectable, 1-dedicated for battery voltage), accepts 4/20mA, 0-5 VDC, or Murphy (or equivalent)
resistance type senders (two-wire type senders is recommended). 10 bit hardware.

Frequency Pickup - Number of devices: 1

Device types: magnetic pickup (MPU), 5 to 120 Vrms, 30 to 10k Hz. - Optically Isolated

Digital Outputs (DO) - Number of devices: 7

Device types: discrete output, normally open (N/O) or normally closed (N/C) 200mA sinking (DC-). Outputs 4 and 5 have flashback
diodes and include software interrupts for high speed throttling. (i.e. Murphy AT03069)

Analog Outputs (AO) - Number of devices: 1

Device types: analog output, 0.5-4.2 VDC, 8 bit hardware
 - 202 -

Specifications
Environmental Digital Outputs: 7† Transistor digital: 200 mA sinking.
Operating Temperature: -4 to 149°F (-20 to 65°C). Analog Output: 1 optically-isolated 0.5-4.2 VDC into a
Storage Temperature: -4 to 149°F (-20 to 65°C). 500 Ohm load
Relative Humidity: 95%RH @ 140°F (60°C). Communications: RS485 port, RS232 port, two CAN 2.0B ports,
Weight: 2-1/4 lb (1 kg). standard.
Dimensions: 9-1/4 x 8-1/4 x 5-1/4 in. (235 x 210 x 133 mm). User Interface: 3-button keypad, alphanumeric display, back lit;
consists of 2 lines each with 16 characters (32 character total).
Enclosure: Aluminum case 1/4 DIN type.
Realtime Clock
Installation: The EMS467 should be mounted in a location that is
accessible to the operator. The controller requires a rectangular S449 Output boards: (optional)
mounting hole and sufficient rear clearance for wiring connec- S449-1: (EMS447/467)
tions. 7 Dry Relays: 5 SPST, 5A @ 30 VDC, 250 VAC, 1/10 hp @ 120
VAC;
Device 2 DPDT, 2A @ 220 VDC, 250 VAC.
Input Voltage: 10 to 28 VDC.
Digital Inputs: 8* optically-isolated inputs. S449-3: (EMS447/467)
Analog inputs: Up to 8 inputs (7-field selectable, 1-dedicated bat- 2 Transistor digital: 125 mA sinking.
tery 5 Dry Relays: 3 SPST, 5A @ 30 VDC, 250 VAC, 1/10 hp @ 120
voltage) VAC;
Frequency: 1 optically-isolated input for speed reference. 2 DPDT, 2A @ 220 VDC,250 VAC.

Accessories
The EMS467 comes in an extruded aluminum enclosure suitable for panel mounting. Wiring is via optional wiring harness.
Relay boards are available for additional relay contact capability, see listings below:
EMS25RM: Rail mount DIN type terminal block.
EMS25CAR2: Ribbon cable with 2 male D-sub connectors.
EMS25TBCAR2: Ribbon cable with 1 male and 1 female D-sub connector.
S449-1: Seven (7) Dry Relay Outputs board for EMS467 models.
S449-3: Five (5) Dry Relay Outputs and two (2) Transistor Outputs board for EMS467 models
 92199
- 203 - Revised 05-03
Section 40

Electronic Monitoring Systems EMS447 / EMS448 Controllers

Features
• Full Equipment Protection1
• Field Adjustable Parameters1
• First-Out Shutdowns and/or Alarms1
• Shutdown History File1
Approved for C1, I,
Div-2, Grps, C&D • Service Reminders1
areas on EMS447 (all
transistor outputs) and • Back Lit LCD or VFD Alphanumeric Display Patent
EMS448 (board only)
• 1/4 DIN or NEMA 4X Enclosed Models

1 Program specific

The EMS447 and EMS448 Electronic Monitoring Systems/Controllers are micro-processor based for monitoring and control of equipment functions. The
basic EMS system is programmed for a typical industrial engine power unit. Custom programming is available to adapt the EMS to a wide variety of
engine and equipment requirements.
Basic programs provide auto-start/manual start and first-out shutdown for engine functions such as pressure, temperature, level and overspeed. Neces-
sary time delays for start up lockout are included.
Operating data is displayed on a 32 character back lit alphanumeric liquid crystal display.
The EMS operating parameters are configured through a simple three-button interface. Access to the system memory is controlled by entry codes.
A password-protected program uses built-in memory to display the alarm/shutdown history, including a display of the last ten shutdowns, when and why
they occurred and displays all of the engine operating conditions at time of last shutdown.
Basic Program Features
An on-board hourmeter keeps a log of equipment running hours and alerts you when to change oil, filters and perform other routine service.
Ramp Oil Pressure monitoring protects equipment at both high rated speed and low idle speed. For instance, based on engine manufacturer’s require-
ment, shutdown could occur at 30 lb. (207 kPa) pressure at 1800 RPM or at 5 lb. (34 kPa) at 600 RPM or any shutdown point in between.
Basic Models
EMS447 has an extruded aluminum enclosure suitable for panel mounting. Wiring is via optional wiring harness. Relay boards are available for additional
relay contact capability. Refer to “Accessories” on the back page.
EMS448 has a NEMA 4X type enclosure. Wiring is connected directly to the relay board terminal block located within the enclosure. Relay board for addi-
tional relay contact capability is available. See “Optional Accessories” on reverse side.
Applications
• Industrial Engines • Trucks
• Compressors • Construction Equipment
• Generators • Pumps
Specifications
Input Voltage: 10 to 28 VDC. EMS447 Outputs:
Operating Temperature: -4 to 149°F (-20 to 65°C). • 3-Transistor digital: 125 mA sinking.5
Storage Temperature: -4 to 149°F (-20 to 65°C). • 3-Relay: SPST 3A @ 30VDC N.O. connected to battery positive4.
Display: Alphanumeric: 2-line, 32 character backlit LCD (standard); VFD • S449-4 Relay Board (optional)4: 2-Transistor digital: 125 mA
optional. sinking.
Relative Humidity: 95%RH @ 140°F (60°C). 5-Relay: 3-SPST, 5A @ 30 VDC, 250 VAC, 1/10 hp @ 120 VAC; 5
2-DPDT, 2A @ 220 VDC,250 VAC. 6
Communications: RS485 port, standard.
• S449-2 Relay Board (optional)4: 7-Dry Relay: 5 SPST, 5A @ 30
Sensor Inputs: VDC, 250 VAC, 1/10 hp @ 120 VAC; 5
• Digital: 3-optically-isolated inputs, (positive voltage or ground) 2 DPDT, 2A @ 220 VDC, 250 VAC. 6
such as from Murphy SWICHGAGE® instruments.2 3
EMS448 Outputs:
• Analog: Up to 8 inputs–accepts a variety of resistive sending • 2-Transistor digital: 125 mA sinking.
units, such as from Murphy electric gage senders.
• 5-Relay: 3-SPST, 5A @ 30 VDC, 250 VAC4, 1/10 hp @ 120 VAC; 5
NOTE: When resistive sending units are used, one input will be designated for 2-DPDT, 2A @ 220 VDC,250 VAC. 5
battery voltage sensing. The use of 2-wire type senders is strongly recommended. • S449-1 Relay Board (optional)4: 6-Dry Relay: 4 SPST, 5A @ 30
Special order analog inputs available (4-20 mA or 0-5 VDC). VDC, 250 VAC, 1/10 hp @ 120 VAC; 5
• Frequency: 1 optically-isolated input for speed reference, such as 2 DPDT, 2A @ 220 VDC, 250 VAC.6
MP3298 magnetic sensor. Shipping Weights and Dimensions
EMS447: 2-1/4 lb (1 kg); 9-1/4 x 8-1/4 x 5-1/4 in. (235 x 210 x 133 mm).
EMS448: 3-1/2 lb (1.5 kg); 12-1/4 x 7-1/4 x 5-3/4 in. (311 x 184 x 146 mm).
2 One additional input can be ordered and traded for one transistor output. 4 Not Class I, Division 2 approved.
3 Isolates the internal circuitry of the Murphy EMS from the sensor input circuitry to help avoid 5 One additional output can be ordered and traded for one digital input.
electrical noise and damage. 6 One DPDT pole has common connected to battery+. N.O. available fused and unfused.
 - 204 -

EMS447 Model EMS448 Model

EMS447 Optional Wiring Harness and Relay Boards

How to Order Accessories Required to complete the installation

To order the EMS use the model number designation diagram below. EMS25TB = Plug-in terminal block assembly
EMS25RM = Rail mount DIN type terminal block
7EMS25CAR2 = Ribbon cable with 2 male D-subminiature connectors
7
EMS25CAS = Male connector with 9 ft. (2.74 m) long color coded cable
EMS25MS = Solder type male D-subminiature connector
S449-1 = Relay board instead of S449-3 relay board.
S449-2 = Relay board (EMS447 only)
S449-4 = Relay board (EMS447 only)

7 Standard length ribbon cable is 2 ft. (610 mm). Specify in feet for other
lengths.
Example: EMS25CAR4 (for 4 feet long).
 95122
- 205 - Revised 05-03
Section 40

Electronic Monitoring System/Controller – Model EMS547

Features
• Field Adjustable Parameters
• First-Out Shutdowns and/or Alarms
• Shutdown History File
• Service Reminders
• Four Communication Ports
• External PC Card Reader and Modem
Ready
• Back Lit LCD or VFD Alphanumeric Dis-
play

C R R

Approved for Class I, Division 2, Groups C & D areas.

The EMS547 Electronic Monitoring System/Controller is micro-processor based for monitoring and control of equipment functions. It is especially suited to
tasks requiring remote modem or SCADA communications. Four built-in communication ports provide a variety of communications capabilities. Basic pro-
grams provide selectable auto or manual start/stop and first-out shutdown for engine functions such as pressure, temperature, level and overspeed. Time
delays for lockout during start up are included.
The EMS547 can be applied as an RTU to interface between SCADA applications and other control platforms. It can also be used, in conjunction with a
Hayes compatible modem (9600 Baud), for remote communications.
An external PC Card reader can be used with the EMS547 to log data from flow meters, pressure transmitters, electric gage senders, and other sensing
devices. This is a popular application in the flood control market.
Operating data is displayed on a 32 character back lit alphanumeric liquid crystal display. An on-board real-time clock keeps a log of equipment running
hours and alerts you when to change oil, filters and perform other routine service.
The EMS547 operating parameters are configured through a simple three-button interface. Access to the system memory is controlled by entry codes.
A password-protected program uses built-in memory to display the alarm/shutdown history, including a display of the last ten shutdowns, when and why
they occurred, and displays all of the engine operating conditions at time of last shutdown.
Because of the flexibility of this product, please call one of our application specialists to see how best to apply the EMS547. We have a growing library of
standard programs or we can write a program to your specific needs.
Applications
• Industrial Engines • Compressors
• Electric Motors • Trucks
• Generators • Pumps
• Construction Equipment • SCADA
• Remote Cellular Sites
Specifications
Input Voltage: 10 to 28 VDC. Outputs:
Operating Temperature: -4 to 149°F (-20 to 65°C). Transistor: 7 digital; 125 mA sinking.
Storage Temperature: -4 to 149°F (-20 to 65°C). S449-1 Relay Board (Optional)*: 7 Dry Relay: 5 SPST, 5A @ 30
Relative Humidity: 95%RH @ 60°C (140°F). VDC, 250 VAC, 1/10 hp @ 120 VAC; 2 DPDT, 2A @ 220 VDC,
250 VAC†.
Display: Alphanumeric: 2-line, 32 character backlit LCD (standard); VFD
optional. S449-3 Relay Board (Optional)*: 2 Transistor digital: 125 mA sink-
ing. 4 Relay:
Communications: 2–S485, 2–S232 ports. 3 SPST, 5A @ 30 VDC, 250 VAC, 1/10 hp @ 120 VAC; 2 DPDT,
Sensor Inputs: 2A @ 220 VDC,250 VAC†.
Digital: 4 optically-isolated inputs, (positive voltage or ground) such Shipping Weight: 2-1/4 lb. (1 kg.).
as from Murphy SWICHGAGE® instruments.
Shipping Dimensions: 9-1/4 x 8-1/4 x 5-1/4 in. (235 x 210 x 133 mm).
Analog: Up to 8 inputs–will accept a variety of resistive sending
units, such as from Murphy electric gage senders. (When resis-
tive sending units are used, one input will be designated for bat-
tery voltage sensing.)
Optional: Special order analog inputs available, including end of line
4-20 mA and 0-5 VDC.
Frequency: 1 optically-isolated input for speed reference, such as
MP3298 magnetic sensor. * Not Class I, Division 2 approved.
† One DPDT pole has common connected to battery+. N.O. available fused and unfused.
 - 206 -

Dimensions

EMS547 and Optional Accessories

How to Order Accessories Required to complete the installation

Specify the model number using the following example: Specify model number, example: EMS25RM
EMS25RM = Rail mount DIN type terminal block
‡EMS25CAR2 = Ribbon cable with 2 male D-subminiature connectors
‡EMS25TBCAR2 = Ribbon cable with 1 male and 1 female D-subminia-
ture connectors
EMS25CAS = Male connector with 9 ft. (2.74 m) long color coded cable
EMS25MS = Solder type male D-subminiature connector
S449-1 = Relay board instead of S449-3 relay board.
S449-3 = Relay board

‡ Standard length ribbon cable is 2 ft. (610 mm). Specify in feet for other
lengths.
Example: EMS25CAR4 (for 4 feet long).
 00092
- 207 - Revised 11-03
Section 40

Pull/Push DC Solenoids for Diesel Engines – RP Series

Features
• One Solenoid For Pull/Push Operation
• No Internal Switches
• Reduce Coil Burnout
• Boost Reliability
• Reduce Adjustments
• High Force–Small Size
• Can Be Used With Most Engines Start
Systems
• SD85 Solenoid Drive Time Delay Avail-
able To Greatly Reduce Possibility Of
Coil Burnout And Facilitate Low Current
Piloted Operation.

Murphy push/pull DC Solenoids provide single unit versatility for engine applications, such as shutdown.
A choice of two models and two voltages is available. All models come complete with return spring and rubber seal boot.
See the next page for specifications and options.
Basic Models
Models RP2307B and RP2308B give a full one inch (25 mm) stroke at 11 pounds (49 N) and hold up to 23 pounds (102 N)
at full voltage, continuous duty.
They will operate at any stroke less than maximum; refer to the chart shown on page 2.
Models RP2309B and RP2310B can pull 14 pounds (62 N) with a one-and-a-half inch (38 mm) stroke. They hold up to 34
pounds (151 N) at full voltage, continuous duty. See the chart on page 2 for holding force at any stroke less than maximum.
SD85 Solenoid Drive Time Delay
Using the SD85 ensures the energize coil is only powered for 1-2 seconds with each operation. If the plunger does not
seat in that time, it is highly unlikely it will seat. The hold coil is energized as long as the signal to the SD85 is active. This
insures long life of the RP solenoid.
MODEL & PART NUM- SHIPPING
BERS: DC SOLENOIDS & ACCESSORIES WEIGHT
Model No. Description ozs (kg)
RP2307B 12 VDC, 1 in. (25 mm) stroke, 11 lbf (49 N) pull, 23 lbf (102 N) hold 24 ozs (0.7 kg)
RP2308B 24 VDC, 1 in. (25 mm) stroke, 11 lbf (49 N) pull, 23 lbf (102 N) hold 24 ozs (0.7 kg)
RP2309B 12 VDC, 1-1/2 in. (38 mm) stroke, 14 lbf (62 N) pull, 34 lbf (151 N) hold 48 ozs (1.4 kg)
RP2310B 24VDC, 1-1/2 in. (38 mm) stroke, 14 lbf (62 N) pull, 34 lbf (151 N) hold 48 ozs (1.4 kg)
65-01-0108 Clevis yoke assembly 1 ozs (.03 kg)
65-01-0110 Clevis yoke chain assembly 2 ozs (.04 kg)
40-05-0315 Threaded rod (1-1/2 in.) .05 ozs (.001 kg)
00-00-2457 RPS in-line ball joint .05 ozs (.001 kg)
00-00-2458 RPS 90° ball joint 1 ozs (.03 kg)
 - 208 -

Watts Power/Cold Force in Pounds at 100% Voltage/Inches Stroke

Force* in Pounds [Kilograms] at 100% Voltage†
Power in Watts Stroke in Inches (Millimeters)
Solenoid Maximum
Model Stroke Hold
Number In. (mm) Seated Inrush Continuous 1/8 (3) 1/4 (6) 1/2 (13) 3/4 (19) 1 (25) 1-1/4 (32) 1-1/2 (38)
RP2307B 1 (25) 18 624 25 [11.34] 22 [9.98] <12> 21 [9.53] <11> 17 [7.71] 14 [6.35] 10 [4.54] — —
<13> [5.90] [5.44] [4.99] <10> [4.54] <8> [3.63] <6> [2.72] — —
RP2308B 1 (25) 12 696 27 [12.25] 25 [11.34] 23 [10.43] 19 [8.62] 15 [6.80] 11 [4.99] — —
<15> [6.80] <14> [6.35] <13> [5.90] <12> [5.44] <9> [4.08] <7> [3.18] — —
RP2309B 1-1/2 (38) 18 1029 32 [14.52] 30 [13.61] 27 [12.25] 22 [9.98] 18 [8.16] 13 [5.90] 8 [3.63] <6> 6 [2.72]
<19> [8.62] <18> [8.16] <16> [7.26] <14> [6.35] <11> [4.99] <9> [4.08] [2.72] <4> [1.81]
RP2310B 1-1/2 (38) 12 960 35 [15.88] 34 [15.42] 31 [14.06] 26 [11.79] 22 [9.98] 17 [7.71] 12 [5.44] 7 [3.18]
<20> [9.07] <19> [8.62] <17> [7.71] <15> [6.80] <12> [5.44] <9> [4.08] <7> [3.18] <4> [1.81]
* Forces shown are without return spring. Forces shown < > are with return spring. Forces shown in [ ] are in kilograms.
† To determine the operating current, divide the power (watts) indicated in the above table by the applied voltage. Solenoids will operate at any stroke less than maximum.

Solenoid Dimensions
RP2307B and RP2308B

RP2309B and RP2310B

Note 1. Typical operating temperature for single 15 second operation of the energize coil is less than:
140°F(60°C) ± 10°F (6°C) for 1 in. (25 mm) Stroke Solenoids (70°F/21°C Rise above ambient)
120°F(49°C) ± 10°F (6°C) 1-1/2 in. (38 mm) Stroke Solenoids (50°F/10°C Rise above ambient)
See CAUTION statement on next page and note maximum housing temperature is 185°F (85°C).
Note 2. The energize-coil should not be activated for more than 15 seconds. Longer energize-coil activation
times will damage the solenoid.
Note 3. Allow minimum 15 minutes for cooling between activations of energize-coil to avoid damaging the
solenoid. (Depends on length of time energize coil is energized.)
Note 4. The energize-coil must fully seat the plunger to allow the hold-coil to function properly.
 - 209 -

Typical Wiring Diagrams

NOTE: In either application if the starter hangs, on starters with
integral solenoids, the energize coil remains energized. CAUTION: On certain starter solenoids/
contactor relays, current can feed back
through the energize terminal from the
hold coil and provide a parallel path to
ground through the device connected to
the energize terminal.

Typical time-delayed shutdown using a 518PH magnetic switch (SD85 is optional)

Typical time-delayed shutdown using a 760A magnetic switch (SD85 is optional)

Mechanical Installation Operation

1. Bolt the solenoid securely to the mounting bracket. The solenoid coil is connected to the existing engine starter system or an
2. Connect linkage and check for binding. Plunger should move freely equivalent circuit. A SD85 is recommended. At starting, both the Energize
throughout the complete stroke and be allowed to “bottom” at the inter- and Hold-in coils are energized. In the run mode, the Hold-in coil is contin-
nal stop of the solenoid. uously energized while the Energize coil has to be disconnected, reducing
DO NOT MOUNT WITH BOOT DOWN. DO NOT APPLY ANY GREASE the heating effect and power consumption and avoiding damage to the
OR LUBRICATION TO PARTS. device.
IMPORTANT: If the plunger does not seat, it will release prematurely NOTE: Coils that burn out due to improper electrical hookup, mis-
when shifted to the “holding” mode of operation. Readjust linkage to adjustment or improper operation are not covered by Murphy fac-
lengthen the plunger stroke. Adjust the yoke in increments of 1/2 turn until tory warranty.
plunger will remain in hold position.
Electrical Installation
CAUTION: The solenoid housing is hot to
1. Refer to the diagrams above for typical electric wiring. the touch. A temperature rise to 185°F
2. Use minimum 10 AWG [65/0.3 mm (4.5 mm)] wire size, as noted in the (85°C) is permissible.
wiring diagrams. A smaller wire will reduce the current available and
thus the pulling force. Wire length must be kept to a minimum.
NOTE: A cool down period of 15 minutes minimum should be
allowed between energized pull in cycles.
 - 210 -

Accessories
RPS Linkage Parts and Assemblies

Clevis Yoke Bead Chain Assemblies 65-01-0110 Clevis Yoke Assembly 65-01-0108

SD85: Solenoid Drive Time Delay

The SD85 is used when the solenoid is duty
cycled for short time periods such as 2-posi-
tion throttle operation. It also provides
enhanced operational control for normal on-
off applications. The SD85 activates both
coils of the solenoid for a short time then de-
energizes the Energize-coil. The Hold-in coil
remains energized.
SD85: Specifications
Input Voltage: 8 to 30 VDC
Current Ratings:
40 ma standby (quiescent) 8 to 30 VDC
75 Amps Pull-in @12 VDC
1 Amps Hold @ 12 VDC
37.5 Amps Pull-in @ 24 VDC
0.5 Amps Hold @ 24 VDC
Terminal #3 2 Amps Maximum
Terminal #5 112.5 Amps Maximum during Pull-in
NOTE: Wires designated 10 ga. must be at
least 10 AWG [65/0.3 mm (4.5 mm)] to develop
full force.
 95028
- 211 - Revised 09-07
Section 40

Rack Puller for Diesel Engines Model RP75

Features
• Pulls Injection Pump or Air Intake Shut-
off Lever
• 30 lbf (133 N) Operating Force
• Models Available for 12 or 24 Volt Sys-
tems
• Operates on Signal from SWICHGAGE®
Installed on the Engine or Driven Equip-
ment
The RP75 rack puller is a semi-automatic device that provides a pulling force to initiate shutdown of diesel engines and equipment.
The RP75 connects to the injection pump or air intake shut-off lever via a cable (chain optional). A coil spring, within the RP75, is reset manually and is
held in place by an electromagnet. When the SWICHGAGE® detects a malfunction, the electromagnetic circuit is interrupted through a Magnetic Switch–
releasing the coil spring thus pulling the cable/chain to actuate shutdown. The spring, when fully compressed, exerts a pull of 30 lbf (133 N).
The RP75 is available for 12 or 24 VDC applications and is compatible with all SWICHGAGE® instruments.
Specifications
Operating Force: 30 lbf (133 N) maximum, 10 lbf (44 N) minimum. Control Linkage
Coil Voltage: Specify 12 or 24 VDC. • Cable: 4ft. (1.22 m); Optional 8 ft. (2.43 m) or 12 ft. (3.65 m) avail-
able.
Coil Resistance: RP75-12: 32.2 ohms. RP75-24: 129.8 ohms.
• Chain (optional): 30 in. (762 mm).
Length of Travel: 1-7/8 in. (48 mm).
NOTE: Specify options when ordering.
Shipping Weight: 5 lbs 3 oz. (2.4 kg).
Shipping Dimensions: 9-1/4 x 8-1/4 x 5-1/4 in. (235 x 210 x 133 mm).
Dimensions

How to Order Service Parts

Specify model number. Specify part number.
Part Num-
ber Description
40-00-0021 12 VDC core assembly
40-00-0044 Shaft solenoid assembly
40-01-0050 Bushing shaft assembly
40-01-0053 Case repair kit
40-01-0054 Cocking rod, bushing and knob repair kit
40-05-0136 Spring, main actuating
40-05-0149 Spring, cocking rod return
80-04-1030 2 Screws, machined #10-24 x 3/8 pan HD steel CAD II
Mounting Bracket 40-05-0161 is sold separately. Specify part number 40-00-0024 24 VDC core assembly
when ordering.
 - 212 -

Installation Instructions
WARNING Before beginning installation of this Murphy product:
 Disconnect ALL electrical power to the machine.
 Make sure the machine CANNOT operate during installation.
 Follow all safety warnings of the machine manufacturer.
 Read and follow all installation instructions.
Mounting
1. Mount the RP75 using the 40-05-0161 mounting bracket or similar (see Figure 1).
If installing the RP75 to an engine compartment firewall, go to Step 2.
2. If installing the RP75 to an engine compartment firewall, drill a 37/64 in. (15 mm)
diameter hole in the firewall (see Figure 2).

WARNING: The firewall must be capable of with-

standing the push and pull force of the RP75.

3. Remove the reset knob on the RP75 by loosening the allenhead screw on the
knob.
4. Remove the mounting nut and insert the RP75 reset stem through the hole from
the back of the firewall.
5. Replace the mounting nut and tighten. Reinstall the reset knob.
Typical Wiring Diagrams
Wire the RP75 appropriately (see Figure 3).
NOTE: RP75 is voltage rated; do not apply 24 VDC to 12 VDC
model and vice versa. Also, the 117PH Magnetic Switch is rated for
both 12 and 24 VDC circuits but voltage must be specified when
ordering the 518PH or 761APH Magnetic Switches.
Installing Cable or Chain
1. To install the control linkage (cable or chain), apply voltage to the RP75. Push in
the reset knob. If installing the cable, insert the cable attaching nut into the RP75
and tighten snugly (see Figure 1). DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN or threads may strip.
Attach and tighten outer cable securing nut. If installing the chain, attach the “S”
hook to the RP75 (see Figure 1).
2. Attach the other end of the cable or chain to the injection pump or air intake shut-
off lever so it moves freely without sharp bends and without binding.
Operation Test
NOTE: Some method must be provided to disconnect (lockout) all
normally closed SWICHGAGE® circuits when starting (such as
through the appropriate Magnetic Switch).
1. Reset magnetic switch.
2. Push in RP75 reset stem until coil latches the trip mechanism.
3. Start engine and observe that all locked out contacts clear.
4. With engine running, ground SWICHGAGE® contact. The Magnetic Switch will
trip thus removing voltage to RP75. The engine should shutdown immediately. If
the engine does shutdown, adjust control linkage (cable or chain) to ensure that
shutoff lever travels the full length in both directions.

CAUTION: Shut-off lever should not pull hard

against the stop in the “off” position.
 04052
- 213 - Revised 04-04
Section 40

MURPHYMATIC® Engine Throttle Controller Model AT03069

Features
• Automatically adjusts engine speed to
meet demands of pressure, level, load
and temperature.
• Speed changes made slowly and
smoothly.
• Saves fuel, engine wear, horsepower
and labor.
• Perfect for warm-up and cool-down on
automated systems.
• One model for both 12 and 24 VDC sys-
tems.

The AT03069 is a completely reliable heavy duty device developed specifically to automatically control engine speed to meet system demand. Low cur-
rent, high torque, solid state switching and electronic clutch make it ideal for all automatic and semiautomatic engine systems. Used with the appropriate
Murphy SWICHGAGE®, near constant pressure, level and load can be maintained. Check with our engineers for help with other applications where speed
control can improve your system.
Applications
Pressure • Sewer disposal systems.
• City Water Systems. • Flood control catch basins.
• Water Flood Injection. Temperature
• Sprinkler Lateral Changes. • Multi-engine cooling systems.
• Make-up if a “Gang Pump” stops. • Air conditioned chilled water systems.
• Multiple Hose-reel Irrigation Systems.
Engine Load
Level • Empty or fill reservoirs with a lower horsepower engine—fast when
• Water or oil storage tanks. head is high—slow when head is low.
• Waterflood tanks.
Specifications
Voltage: 11-28 VDC negative ground. Linkage adjustment on lever arm—5 holes:
Maximum Current: 500 mA (1/2 amp). Adjusts travel: 1-3/16 in. (30 mm); 1-11/16 in. (43 mm); 2 in. (51 mm);
2-1/4 in.
Standby Current: Approx. 7 mA.
(57 mm) approximately. Travel Time: 11 to 20 seconds depending on
Increase and Decrease: Inputs float at approx. 8.4 VDC. Grounding the voltage and force applied.
inputs causes 8-18 mA of current to flow from either.
Dimensions: See reverse side.
Torque: 25 inch pounds. Net Weight: 5 lb. (2.27 kg)
Sealed limit switches: Factory adjusted, controls maximum travel.
Features
The AT03069 can enhance features of our SELECTRONIC® Micro-Controller units by allowing features such as:
• Warm-up RPM Set point. • Auto Throttling To Match Flows (as needed in flood control
• Minimum RPM Set point. applications).
• Maximum RPM Set point. • Maintaining System Pressure (as needed in booster station
• Preset Operating RPM Set point. application).
• Adjustable Rate Of Change In RPM (allowing fine tuning of overall
system).
For more information, recommendations and quotations contact our engineering dept.
 - 214 -

Operation
A Murphy SWICHGAGE®* constantly monitors pressure, level, temperature
or load. Adjustable high and low contacts on SWICHGAGE® are set slightly
above and below desired operating point. When demand changes, pointer
touches appropriate high or low contact and signals speed change. AT03069
controller responds only so long as contact is made. The controller stops
immediately when contacts separate. Slow, smooth action prevents “hunting”
or “surging” on normal applications.

Dimensions Typical Wiring

How to Order
AT03069

* Mercury tube or snap-action switches are not suitable for this type control. For more information, recommendations and quotations contact our engineering dept.
 01035
- 215 - Revised 10-04
Section 40

Electric Motor Driven Clutch Operator

for Engine Automation Systems
Features
• Engages and Disengages Clutch
• 250 lb-f (1112N) or 500 lb-f (2224N)
Operating Force
• Compatible with MURPHYMATIC®
Engine Controllers
• Models Available for 12 or 24 Volt Sys-
tems
• Two-Year Limited Warranty
• Adjustable Stroke
The CO3 is an electrically controlled and driven actuator for automatic operation of two position, lever action equipment. Primarily designed to engage and
disengage over-center clutches on engines, the CO3 has a wide variety of applications such as opening and closing of pipeline valves, engagement and
disengagement of pumps, fixture positioning in automated process control, etc. The positive action screw-type actuator is fully adjustable for length of
stroke up to 6 inches (152 mm). The CO3 motor is equipped with an overload clutch that slips if overloaded. In addition, the motor is protected with an
automatic reset thermal overload. The CO3 is available for 12 or 24 VDC applications and is compatible with MURPHYMATIC® start-stop engine control-
lers.
Applications
• Engine Disc Clutches • Brakes
• Butterfly and Ball Valves • Two Position Lever-Action Equipment
Specifications
Voltage: Speed:
CO3-12: 12 VDC, negative ground. CO3-12: 1.2 in./sec (3 cm/sec.) @ 0 lb-f to 1.00 in./sec. (1 cm/sec.)
CO3-24: 24 VDC, negative ground. @ 250 lb-f (1112N).
Travel (adjustable): 6 in. (152 mm) max. CO3-24: 2.4 in./sec (6 cm/sec.) @ 0 lb-f to 1.35 in./sec. (3 cm/sec.)
Case Material: Cast aluminum. @ 500 lb-f (2224N).
Drive: Self-locking ACME screw.
Built-in Circuit Breaker: 20 A.
Current:
Operating Force: CO3-12: 20 amp max.
CO3-12: 250 lb-f (1112N) max.
CO3-24: 500 lb-f (2224N) max. CO3-24: 14 amp max.
Operating Temperature: -15 to 150°F (-26 to 66°C).
Duty Cycle @ 77°F (25°C):
CO3-12: 40% max. @ 125 lb-f (556N) to 25% @ 250 lb-f (1112N). Shipping Weight: 40 lb (18.1 kg).
CO3-24: 100% max. @ 75 lb-f (334N) to 25% @ 500 lb-f (2224N). Shipping Dimensions: 25 x 14-1/2 x 12 in. (635 x 368 x 305 mm).
Basic Operation
Refer to Figure 4 on back page.
When the CO3 receives a signal to engage, the heavy-duty DC motor operates to extend the actuator shaft and yoke a predetermined length. Length of
extension is controlled by the adjustable cams in the control housing. When disengaging, the motor reverses and retracts the actuator shaft. At engage-
ment end of the stroke, the actuator backs off from its maximum travel to relieve pressure on the clutch or other device.
Dimensions How to Order
For 12 VDC applications specify CO3-12. For 24 VDC applications specify
CO3-24.
 - 216 -

Installation Instructions
WARNING Before beginning installation of this
Murphy product:
 Disconnect ALL electrical power to the
machine.
 Make sure the machine CANNOT operate during
installation.
 Follow all safety warnings of the machine manu-
facturer.
 Read and follow all installation instructions.
1. Disengage clutch lever on the engine.
2. Remove the clutch lever and reposition it approximately 45 degrees
from vertical, towards the rear of the clutch (Figure 4).
3. Locate and remove outer roller of the CO3 operating yoke (Figure 1).
4. Place the CO3 in direct line with the clutch lever until the inner roller
touches the clutch lever at an approximate 90 degree angle
(See Detail in Figure 4).
NOTE: Reposition clutch lever so it does not bind between
rollers when actuator is fully extended and fully retracted.
5. Bolt the CO3 to the stabilizer arm to hold the angle of incidence to the
clutch arm (Figure 4).
6. Temporarily attach the CO3 mounting plate to the engine skid or base,
or mark its location on the skid or base. See Figure 2 for dimensions.
7. Open control housing cover and locate Cam “A” (Figure 1). Loosen the
two set screws on Cam “A” and slide the cam all the way to Cam “B”.
NOTE: Do not disturb setting of Cam “B”. It is factory
adjusted for proper operation.
8. Temporarily wire Battery Negative to terminal #5, Positive to terminal #4
of the CO3 (Figure 3).
9. Apply a momentary N.O. push button between terminals #1 and #3.
When the push button is pressed the CO3 actuator will extend (Figure
3).

CAUTION: Be ready to release the push button

when the clutch arm is fully engaged. Damage to
the clutch or the CO3 can occur if the actuator is
allowed to continue to push against the clutch
arm.

NOTE: This is best done by energizing the CO3 for short

intervals as the clutch arm approaches full engagement. Dis-
connect battery and remove push button from terminals #1
and #3.
10. Firmly affix the CO3 mounting plate to the engine or skid or pad.
11. Move Cam “A” back toward the front end of the CO3 so that it fully
depresses the roller of limit switch SW-2. Retighten both set screws.
12. Reconnect battery and the temporary push button across terminal #1
and #3. The actuator should “back-off” a short distance until clutch lever
is between both rollers to insure removal of load from throw out bear-
ings. If minor adjustment is necessary, move SW-2 forward to reduce
“back-off” or aft to increase “back-off”. Maximum adjustment is 1/2 in.
(13 mm). Remove momentary push button.
13. Place a N.O. momentary push button across terminals #2 and #3 (Fig-
ure 3). Press push button. Actuator should retract and disengage
clutch. Actuator will “back-off” and stop when clutch is fully disengaged.
Disconnect battery and remove push button from terminals #2 and
#3.
14. Reconnect battery. The CO3 is now ready for operation. A maintained
contact closure across terminals #1 and #3 will engage clutch. A main-
tained contact closure across terminals #2 and #3 will disengage clutch.
NOTE: Readjust CO3 after any clutch repair.
 0910462
- 217 - Revised 09-05
Section 40

Transformer Relay Assemblies

TR Series by MURPHYMATIC®
Features
• Electric Motor Controllers
• Use in Conjunction with Murphy
Swichgage® for:
• Electric Motor Start and Stop
• Emergency Shutdown and Time Delay
• Low Voltage Control of Magnetic Motor
Starters Utilizing a Low 24 Volt Pilot Cir-
cuit

The Murphy TR Series, Transformer Relay Assemblies are electric motor controllers. Models are available for emergency shutdown, start and stop only,
start and stop with emergency shutdown, and combinations of the above models with time delay.
All TR Series internal control circuits are completely prewired and relays are plug in type to facilitate field servicing.
NEMA 1 enclosure is standard on all TR Series models. NEMA 3 weatherproof enclosure, and “LC” Less Case versions are optional.
Murphy SWICHGAGE® instruments for pressure, temperature, level etc., can be used with the TR’s for semiautomatic or totally unattended operation and
control of your electric motor powered equipment.
Controls up to 480 Volts
A set of normally open, dry relay contacts controlled by a 24 VAC relay coil, controls the magnetic motor starter holding coil up to 480
volts. The high voltage contacts are completely isolated from the low voltage control to help reduce electrical hazards.
Features
• Heavy-duty transformer with multiple primary taps for easy con- • Power relay has extra heavy silver cadmium oxide contacts
nection to most any available AC power sources. rated 10 amp, 480 VAC.
• 24 VAC low Voltage secondary control circuit with terminals for • When TR is used with a Murphy Analog SWICHGAGE ®, it
remote auxiliary switches. allows for visual reading of operating conditions, and provides
• Plug-in relays have three SPDT silver cadmium oxide contacts an adjustable differential between high and low settings
providing long life reliability. throughout the SWICHGAGE® dial range.

Applications
The TR Series transformer relay assemblies are ideal for controlling a variety of electric motor driven applications. They are recom-
mended for use on salt water disposal systems, waterflood systems, and many others. A Model TR-1762 used in conjunction with a
model OPLHC Tank Level Controller, and an OPLC Series discharge pressure can completely automate a salt water disposal pump.
Specifications
Transformer: Primary (power supply) with triple taps for 120/240/ Approximated Shipping Dimensions:
480 VAC. 50/60 Hz. NEMA 1; NEMA 3; and “LC” Less Case: 15 x 15 x 7 in. (381 x
Secondary (control supply) 24 VAC. 381 x 178 mm).
Power Rating: 25 VA. Approximated Shipping Weight:
Terminal Blocks: High Voltage rated at 30 A, 600 V. NEMA 1: 18 lb. (8.16 kg.).
Low Voltage rated at 20 A, 300 V. NEMA 3: 22 lb. (10 kg.).
Control Relays: Plug-in, 120 V, 10 A contact rating. “LC” Less Case: 14 lb. (6.35 kg.).
Contacts:
Power (holding): 10 A, 480 VAC, SPST.
Control (auxiliary): 480 VAC, 690 VA pilot duty.
Conduit: Top: 3/4 in. hub; Bottom 1/2 in. hole.
 - 218 -

TR Assemblies
Models and Functions
TR7207 — Used for emergency shutdown of electric motors driven equip- operating remote panel lights or audible alarms. Also includes emergency
ment which are manually started. shutdown and lockout from a remote, normally open, one wire to ground
TATTLETALE® indicates shutdown and locks out power until the malfunc- SWICHGAGE®.
tion is corrected and the TATTLETALE® is reset. A momentary power fail- TR1762 — Same as TR1761 with adjustable time delay lockout of shut-
ure during shutdown will not void the lockout feature. For use with down functions, for up to 10 minutes, during start-up.
standard, normally open, one-wire to ground Murphy SWICHGAGE®
instruments. NOTE: TR1760, TR1761, and TR1762 comply with National Elec-
trical code 1975, Article 430-73.
TR7208 — Same as TR7207 except used with normally closed,
ungrounded SWICHGAGE® instruments which open for shutdown. Some models have been discontinued and replaced by other models:
TR9193 — Same as TR7207 with adjustable time delay, which locks out Discontinued Replacement
shutdown functions for up to 10 minutes, to allow pressures and tempera- TR-5171 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TR1760
tures to reach normal range after start-up. TR-7159 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TR1761
TR1760 — Used with electric motors or driven equipment which is started TR-9195 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TR1762
and stopped from a remote, normally open SWICHGAGE®.
To Order TR Assemblies Use The Appropriate Model Number
TR1761 — Includes the same features as the TR1760 plus provisions for

WARNING Before beginning installation of this Murphy product:

 Disconnect ALL electrical power to the machine.
 Make sure the machine CANNOT operate during installation.
 Follow all safety warnings of the machine manufacturer.
TR1762
 - 219 -

WARNING Before beginning installation of this Murphy product:

 Disconnect ALL electrical power to the machine.
 Make sure the machine CANNOT operate during installation.
 Follow all safety warnings of the machine manufacturer.
TR7207

TR1760
 - 220 -

WARNING Before beginning installation of this Murphy product:

 Disconnect ALL electrical power to the machine.
 Make sure the machine CANNOT operate during installation.
 Follow all safety warnings of the machine manufacturer.
TR1761
 0910474
- 221 - 07-15-10
Section 40

Ignition Control Systems (Murphy Power Ignition)

MPI-8/16/32 Ignition Controllers
- 222 -
 0910517
- 223 - 07-15-10
Section 40

MPI Ignition Control Systems (Murphy Power Ignition)

MPI 601 Series CD Ignition
- 224 -
 0910515
- 225 - 07-15-10
Section 40

MPI Detonation Sensing Interface System - Model DSI

- 226 -
 0910514
- 227 - 07-15-10
Section 40

Power Supply (Murphy Power Ignition)

MPI Brushless Alternators
- 228 -
 0910513
- 229 - 07-15-10
Section 40

MPI Ignition Control Systems (Murphy Power Ignition)

MPI Ignition Coils
- 230 -
 0910476
- 231 - 07-15-10
Section 40

Air Fuel Ratio Controls (Compliance Controls)

AFR-1R - Rich Burn Air-Fuel Ratio Controller
- 232 -
 0910477
- 233 - 07-15-10
Section 40

Air Fuel Ratio Controls (Compliance Controls)

AFR-9R - Multipoint Air-Fuel Ratio Controller
- 234 -
 0910475
- 235 - 07-15-10
Section 40

Air Fuel Ratio Controls (Compliance Controls)

AFR-64R — Rich-Burn Air-Fuel Control System
- 236 -
 0910491
- 237 - 01-26-10
Section 40

Air Fuel Ratio Controls (Compliance Controls)

AFR-64L — Lean-Burn Air-Fuel Control System
- 238 -
 0910478
- 239 - 07-15-10
Section 40

Air Fuel Ratio Controls (Compliance Controls)

AFR-FI - Air-Fuel Ratio Controller for Fuel Injected Engines
- 240 -
 1010670
- 241 - 01-17-12
Section 40

EICS - Engine Integrated Control System - (Compliance Controls)

Features
• An OEM approach to an aftermarket application
• Two packages available: performance/efficiency package,
optional emissions package (includes catalyst)
• One unit, three integrated functions - CD ignition, air/fuel
control, and electronic governing speed control
• Pre-calibrated and dyno tested for your specific engine
model
• Advanced electronic fuel control system
• Lightning fast response to engine speed/load variations
and fuel quality changes
• MPI “smart” ignition coils for expanded engine diagnostics
• Graphical color user interface
• Data sharing via Modbus RS485
• Data logging

Optimizing your engine’s performance and maintaining emission compliance is easier than ever with Murphy’s new Engine
Integrated Control System (EICS). The EICS combines many products into a complete integration package pre-calibrated
specifically for your engine model.
EICS combines key components - ignition system (powered by MPI), air-fuel control, speed governing, interface and diag-
nostics, sensors, harnessing, catalyst and engine control unit (ECU) - in one package, saving you money and man-hours
associated with the installation and setup of separate engine components.
The EICS has been pre-configured for your convenience, ensuring your engine will run at optimum performance without
the need for manual field adjustments. Its D-EPR valve accommodates wide variations in fuel composition and speed/load
range, maintaining efficiency with load following technology for even the toughest gas lift applications.
In addition, the EICS eliminates the need for pretest site visits by maintaining emissions - saving you time and money. With
EICS you can be certain your site will pass required testing, like Quad J testing, without the need for pretesting to get dialed
in.

Benefits
• Integrated system = simplified installation compared to separate
components
• The integrated approach makes more advanced diagnostics
possible
• No more setup of generic boxes - EICS is engine specific
• No more “dialing in” - it’s pre-calibrated
• Optimization of your engine’s performance
• Maintains emissions compliance between testing - no “tweaking”
necessary
• Eliminates magneto failures and premature spark plug changes
• Reduces engine failure diagnostic time
• Reduces costs associated with the engine’s operation
 - 242 -

How to Order

Step 1 - Pick the EICS Engine Kit based upon your engine model

EICS Engine Specific Kits

P/N 48-70-0027 - Arrow VRG330
P/N 48-70-0012 - Caterpillar 3304NA
P/N 48-70-0011 - Caterpillar 3306NA
P/N 48-70-0010 - Caterpillar 3306TA

Step 2 - Determine display variant

Every EICS Engine Kit Requires One Display - Choose One Variant Below
P/N 48-70-0017 - Display Kit, EICS, Display + EICS Pigtail + RS486 Pigtail
P/N 48-70-0021 - Display Panel with Switches, EICS

Step 3 - Add optional hardware if desired

Add Optional Emissions Package

P/N 48-70-0013 - Emissions Kit, Applicable for 3306TA, 3306NA, 3304NA, VRG330

To Add Optional Suction Pressure Control

Order key below and add a standard Murphy PXT 4-20ma Pressure sensor to complete
P/N 48-70-0015 - Suction Control Software Key (requires Murphy PXT sensor)
 SECTION 50 COMPRESSOR CONTROLS
AND PANELS

Control System Accessories

1110714 M2 Wireless Monitoring System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Annunciators
8535 LCDT Selectronic® Tattletale® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
0910435 TTD™ Series Configurable Fault Annunciator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
96122 Series 1501 Selectronic® Micro-Controller/Annunciator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Controllers
0910434 Centurion™ Configurable Controller – C4 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
0910452 Centurion™ PLUS Full Featured Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Panels
0910471 TTD™ Annunciator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
0910472 Centurion™ Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
0910492 Centurion™ PLUS Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
1210950 Control Systems & Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK..

 1110714
- 243 - Revised 06/08/11
Section 50

M2 Wireless™ Monitoring System

Features
• Fully-configurable monitoring system.
• Gateway supports 30 remotes
• Applications include new packages, re-furbished packages,
retrofits, etc.
• User configurable with Windows®-based software
• No programming experience required.
• Upload/Download capabilities for configurations and set
points
• Eliminates switch wiring back to control panel
• Eliminates thermocouple wiring back to control panel
• Eliminates the costly conduit runs back to control panel
• Configurations stored in a non-volatile FRAM memory.
(Gateway)
• Setpoints stored in non-volatile EEPROM memory.
(Remotes)
• Approved CSA Certification for Class 1, Division2, Groups
B,C,&D areas
• Approved FCC and Industry Canada Certifications for 900
MHz ISM band (10mW)
• Approved for use in United States and Canada

The M2 Wireless Monitoring System is a simple and unique system. The M2 Wireless system is well suited for many
control applications. Configured via Modbus RS485 network, users can utilize Murphy’s MConfig software, 3rd party Mod-
bus software, and/or configured using programmable logic controllers. When used in a control system designed by Murphy,
the Gateway, remotes and controller are defined and functioning to meet exact specifications for a variety of applications.
The Gateway (HUB) of the system continuously monitors input signals from remotes via an RF network. Digital Remotes
are monitored via a switch to determine fault. Set points for Thermocouple Remotes are monitored in the remote. When an
out-of-limits event occurs, the remotes will provide signals back to the Gateway. The system controller will read this data
from the Gateway, the controller will then stop, shutdown or control equipment to change conditions.
The M2 Wireless system provides NEAR real-time data via a communication port to a connected control system. This
advanced system offers multiple options for remote placement of end-devices deemed too costly to run conduit or prohib-
ited by laws. (Example: crossing under a roadway with conduit). The industry standard Modbus® RTU protocol means
greater support for a wide variety of communication equipment including radio and satellite communications systems.
Basic Components
The M2 Wireless Monitoring System typically consists of a Gateway, 17 Digital Remotes and 7 Thermocouple remotes. No
special cables are required. The Gateway is designed for use within a weatherproof enclosure only. The remotes are
approved and designed in a CSA approved enclosure for indoor and outdoor usage.
• Gateway: M2-G-XX: System Monitor
• Digital Remote: M2-DI: 1DI (N.O. or N.C)
• Thermocouple Remote: M2-TC, 1TC (Type J or K)
DI=Digital Input ; TC=Thermocouple Input
 - 244 -

Dimensions

Gateway

Remote
 - 245 -

Specifications
M2-G-XX Gateway: One (1) DC Digital Input: NO or NC, (active low), non-
Operating Temperature: -40 to +85°C (185°F). incendive
Power Input: 10-30VDC, 1W typical, 1.1W (max) LED indication
One (1) DC Digital Input: NO, (active low), non-incendive. Connect to dry contact switch only
(Gateway Reset)
Enclosure: CSA approved enclosure for indoor and
Nine (9) Outputs:
outdoor use. See Remote insert for enclosure certification.
• Eight (8) FET Outputs (non-latching, sink)
M2-TC
• One (1) Relay Output, form C, dry contact (latching)
Power Requirements:
1 Serial Port: Software configurable
• Two (2) Lithium, 3.6VDC “AA” batteries, 120mW (max)
• MODbus Slave RS485
• Battery Life 4 years typical@25°C (77°F) - 15 second
900 MHz RF Ouput power setting 10mw, FCC approved
pole rate
Range: 10mW 250ft with line of sight and low noise
One (1) Thermocouple Input: Configurable type J or K.
M2-DI
• LED indicators
Power Requirements:
• One (1) Lithium, 3.6VDC AA” battery, 120mW Connect to ungrounded thermocouples only
• Battery Life 3 years (typical) @25°C (77°F) – normally Built-in cold junction compensation
closed input Enclosure: CSA approved enclosure for indoor and
outdoor use. See Remote insert for enclosure certification.
• Battery Life 5 years (typical) @25°C (77°F) – normally ± 5°C (4°F) – -128°C (-200°F) to 648/1093°C (1200/
open input 2000°F) Type J or K thermocouples.
How to Order

Selecting a M2 Wireless Monitoring System

1. Specify M2-G-XX Gateway (50702321)
2. Specify Remotes necessary for application
• M2-DI Digital Input Remote (50702322)
• M2-TC Thermocouple Input Remote (50702323)
Accessories

Configuration Software
MurphyNET Configuration Suite - MConfig™ configuration tool or modifying wireless system, set points, timers and faults.
Includes file transfer utilities for configuration upgrades. Free download from www.fwmurphy.com/software/.
Replacement Parts and Assemblies
M2 Wireless Antenna Kit (53000011) Replacement antenna and bulkhead
M2 Wireless Remote Antenna Kit (53702324) External remote mounted antenna bracket and cable
M2 Wireless PC Interface Kit (53702325) USB to RS485 converter and cable
M2 Wireless Remote Battery (00031384) Replacement Lithium 3.6VDC, AA battery
 - 246 -

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

 8535
- 247 - Revised 07-06
Section 50

LCDT Selectronic® Tattletale® System

Features
• Monitor Engine or Motor Driven Pumps and
Compressors
• 47 Normally Open (N.O.) or Normally Closed
(N.C.) Sensor Inputs
• CSA* and Factory Mutual† Listed
• Rated for Hazardous Locations Specifications

The LCDT Selectronic Tattletale system is a compact fault annunciator with an electronic alarm/shutdown control system. It was
designed to protect engine-driven or motor-driven compressors and pumps. The annunciator indicates the sensor, and hence the param-
eter, that causes an alarm or shutdown. In addition, a means is provided for testing the operation of each sensor without initiating an
alarm or shutdown. Employing a liquid crystal display, the LCDT system gives a digital reading of the tripped sensor and the lockout timer
countdown.
As the heart of the system, the basic annunciator component has two variations: the Model LCDT-NO, which accommodates normally
open sensors, and the Model LCDT-NC, which accommodates normally closed sensors. These units are enclosed in an aluminum box
having a brush finish. The LCDT system accommodates 47 sensor inputs, 15 of which may be locked out during start-up by the start/run
timer delay.
A separate power supply is provided with the model LCDT instrument. Power may be supplied by CD ignition, a 120 VAC line, or by 12 or
24 VDC battery.
Intended for use with all Swichgage instruments without “OS” option.
Features
• System alarm or shutdown for up to 47 sensors. • Intrinsically safe annunciator unit; Class I, Division 1, Group D
• Timed start-up override for up to 15 sensors. Hazardous Locations.
• Liquid Crystal Display of tripped sensors and the lockout timer • Explosion-proof power supply.
countdown. • A battery maintains the electronics while the engine is not run-
• Test timer for shutdown override during sensor test. ning.
• Optional 3-second time delay allows a fuel valve to close before
grounding the ignition.
Specifications
Power: Supplied by CD ignition of an engine, 120 VAC line, or by 12 or 24 Case: LCDT-NO/NC (module): anodized aluminum.
VDC battery. Power Supply (all models): Explosion-proof aluminum.
Power Inputs (Operating Voltage): Multiplexer Scan Rate: Scans all 47 sensors in 0.7 sec.
LCDT-PS-CD (R)-P: 90-250 VDC, CD ignition, positive ground. Start-Run/Test Timer: Standard 5 minutes, specify other, up to 7 minutes
LCDT-PS-CD-N: 90-250 VDC CD ignition, negative ground. maximum
LCDT-PS-120/24/12: 120 VAC (6 VA), 24 VDC (1 watt), 12 VDC (0.5 (in 1 minute increments).
watts).
Laboratory Approvals: CSA* and Factory Mutual System† Listed for
Sensor Inputs: Accepts up to 47 sensors (NC version only 45) via a rib- Class I, Division 1, Group D, Hazardous Locations.
bon cable. The LCDT system was designed to be used with sensor Shipping Dimensions:
switches having normally open or normally closed contacts such as
Murphy Swichgage instrument. LCDT-NO/NC module: 8-1/2 x 9-1/2 x 5-1/2 in. (216 x 241 x 140
mm).
NOTE: An approved isolation barrier such as a thermocouple type LCDT-PS-CD-N and LCDT-PS-CD (R)-P: 4-1/2 x 15-1/2 x 5-1/2 in.
barrier, must be used between sensor switch and input terminals if (114 x 394 x
sensor outputs come from any energy storing device such as a 140 mm).
relay or transistor. LCDT-PS-120/24/12: 11-1/2 x 18-1/4 x 13-1/2 in. (291 x 464 x 343
mm).
Relay Outputs Ratings:
LCDT-PS-CD (R)-P Contact rating: 4A, 1/20 HP, 125/250 VAC/3A, 30 LCDT-50CA-36 or 100CA-36: 7-1/4 x 12 x 5-1/2 in. (184 x 305 x 140
VDC. mm).
LCDT-PS-120/24/12 Contact Rating: 5A, 28 VDC. 120 VAC (resis- Shipping Weights:
tive). LCDT-NO/NC Head: 5 lb. (2.2 kg.).
FET Outputs: LCDT-PS-CD-N rating (for fuel valve and ignition ground): LCDT-PS-CD (R)-P: 9 lb. (4.08 kg.).
0.5A @ 250 V. LCDT-PS-120/24/12: 21 lb. (9.5 kg.).
Alarm Relay Contact Rating: 4A, 1/20 HP, 125/250 VAC/3A, 30 VDC. LCDT-50CA-36 or 100CA-36: 3 lb. (1.3 kg.).
Operating Temperature: Module (head): -40 to 185°F (-40 to 85°C).
Power Supply: 0 to 158°F (-18 to 70°C) *When used with approved ignition A. Contact Murphy for details.
Storage Temperature: -40 to 302°F (-40 to 150°C). †When installed per Murphy drawings HC-9450-A (50-08-0021) or HC-9450-AA
(50-08-0019).
 - 248 -

Dimensions

LCDT System How to Order

The basic LCDT system consists of (1) the LCDT module, To order complete LCDT system, specify each component
(2) the terminal strip and cable assembly, and (3) the power as follows:
supply. 3. LCDT Module: Specify LCDT-
LCDT Module–described on front page. -NO: For normally open applications
-NC: For normally closed applications
Terminal Strip and Cable Assembly
The plug-in type Terminal Strip has 50 screw-type connec- 4. Terminal Strip and Cable Assembly: Specify LCDT-
tions for normally open sensors and 100 connections for -50CA-36: Normally open
normally closed sensors. The terminal strip can be con- -100CA-36: Normally closed
nected to the LCDT module with the 36 in. (914 mm) long 5. Power Supply: Specify LCDT-
flat ribbon cable. -PS-CD (R)-P: CD ignition positive ground
-PS-CD-N: CD one or two ignitions negative ground
Power Supply
-PS-120/24/12: Voltage: 120 AC, 12/24 DC
You have a choice of input power supplies: LCDT-PS-CD
(R)-P and LCDT-PS-CD-N for CD ignition or LCDT-PS-120/
24/12 for 120 VAC or 12 or 24 VDC. Each power supply
includes control Inputs/Outputs and an intrinsically safe
barrier. They were designed for Class I, Divisions 1 and 2,
Group D Hazardous Locations. FM and CSA listed.
 0910435
- 249 - Revised 11-01-10
Section 50

TTD™ Series Configurable Fault Annunciator

Features
• Fully-configurable fault annunciator
• Alarm and shutdown control system for engine-driven pumps
and compressors
• Monitors 48, user-configurable, sensor inputs from N.O. and/
or N.C. sensors
• User selectable templates provide ease of retrofit by selecting
configuration of existing annunciators via display keypad or
download from computer with windows based MConfig®
installed.
• Intuitive icons display status and operating mode for ease of
user operation.
• Serial communications port with selectable baud rates up to
38,400
• Universal power supplies powered by 12/24VDC or CD igni-
tion (neg. ground).
• CSA Class I, Division 2, Groups B, C, and D.
• Optional tachometer function with overspeed and underspeed
protection using CD Ignition or magnetic pickup input.
• Optional prelube and postlube functionality.
• Optional lubricator No-Flow detection for up to 4 proximity
switches.
• One display head is common to all configurations allowing
fewer spare parts required to be maintained in the field.
• Internal monitoring of DC Supply, CD ignition, and internal
battery voltage
The TTD product is a solid-state fault annunciator and shutdown control system designed to protect engines, pumps, compressors and their associated
equipment. The TTD model will accept 48 sensor inputs from normally open and/or normally closed sensors. Each of the 48 inputs can be configured for
“Shutdown” or “Alarm Only”. Any input can be locked out by one of the two Start-Run timers, or configured as Class C, ESD or Ignore. The annunciator
provides for both closing of a fuel valve and grounding of an ignition after a time delay.
Incorporated in the TTD non-volatile memory:
• Run Hours/Elapsed Time Meter • Selectable Modbus RTU slave RS232/RS485 serial communications
• Last 10 Shutdowns with associated run hours • Selectable baud rates
• Last 4 Alarms with associated run hours
Optional Features:
• Pre/Post lube timed functionality (hours roll over at 99,999) • Lubricator No-Flow detection for up to 4 proximity switches.
• Tachometer w/ Overspeed and Underspeed setpoints and running
hours.
The TTD Annunciator Has Two Separate Components:
Display Head
The Display Head displays operational and configuration data. Configuration parameters are entered via keypad or downloaded from MConfig software.
The Display Head will accept digital inputs directly on the back of the unit. Power is provided to the Display Head via a direct Phoenix connector or a cable
connecting to a remote mounted power supply. The Display Head contains the microprocessor, the Liquid Crystal Display (LCD), the membrane keys for
configuring the sensors inputs and the sensor input terminal blocks.
The TTD liquid crystal display annunciates any fault from the sensor inputs, displays engine speed, and run hours/elapsed time meter. Other features for
the TTD are: built-in “Test Mode” function to test the sensor circuits without causing a fault shutdown, Pre-lubrication and Post-lubrication timers, and on-
board backup battery to retain the fault display after shutdown on ignition powered units.
Power Supply
The Power Input and Control Output Terminals are mounted on the Plug-in Power Supply (PSU-2) or other Modbus RTU Master devices. Both of the
Power Supplies also include an RS485/RS232 serial communication port (MODBUS RTU slave) to interface with micro-controllers, PC’s, PLC’s, and/or
communication and control systems. The serial communication provides read and write register capability and selectable baud rate up to 38,400.
All Power Supply models are reverse polarity protected and can be powered by 10-32vdc or 90- 400vdc negative ground CD ignition. An optional Power
Supply (PSU-D2*) provides for 120vac power/positive ground CD ignition power. Use the PSU-1* Power Supply for Division 1 applications. The TTD
annunciator is fully operable with the internal battery; the external DC power enables communications support (Modbus slave) and turns on the display
backlight.

* Not released
 - 250 -

TTD System

TTD-H Display Head

TTD Intuitive Display Icons ►

The TTD system features a static LCD display (A) with backlight (external DC
is required). The applicable icon and number (B, C and D) will be displayed to
clarify the display readings or alert the operator to an operating condition.

* When powered by DC or AC source. Not available for Division 1 (PSU-1).

 - 251 -

Specifications
Power Requirements: Hourmeter Accuracy: ±1 hour per year.
PSU-2: 10-32VDC, 10W (max); 90-400VDC CD Ignition, 750uA @ Communication Ports: 1
100VDC (max) A single bi-color (GREEN/RED) LED is provided to give visual indication
On-Board Backup Power: Lithium battery, 6 VDC, 1300 mAh. of active transmit and receive traffic. Only one connection will be
Digital Inputs: 48 (a.k.a. Channels) active at any time.
Sensor Types: Discrete Input, N.O./N.C., intrinsically safe (with use of Interface: Factory configured for RS485; field-selectable for 3-wire RS232
PSU-1) or RS485.
or non-incendive (with use of PSU-2) Baud/Stop Bit Selections: 9600, 19.2K, 38.4K‡;N,8,1;N,8,2
Magnetic Pickup Input: Protocol: Modbus RTU
One Magnetic Pickup Sensor Input: 3.6 - 120 VAC, 2-10 kHz. Connection: There are 2 screw terminal connectors for RS485. There are
Outputs: 2 screw terminal connectors for RS232. There is 1 screw terminal
IGN: 0.4A @ 400VDC† for 5 seconds common for both ports labeled as GND.
0.15A @ 400VDC(*) cont. duty Third Party Approvals:
RLY: 0.5A @ 48VDC cont. duty TTD-H, PSU-2: CSA Class I, Division 2, Groups B, C, and D.
FV- : 0.5A @ 400VDC(*) cont. duty TTD-H: IEC 60529 - IP66 (NEMA 4 & 4X equivalent)
ALR: 0.5A @ 48VDC cont. duty Intuitive Display Icons:
AUX: 0.5A @ 48VDC cont. duty Display status and assist in setup and operation. The appropriate icon will
turn on to
Operator Interface: indicate unit status or navigation through the setup features.
Display Type: LCD, Static, 80 segment, custom text with LED Backlight
RUN – Run mode
Display Viewable Area: ~ 2.79 x 1 in. (71.04mm x 25.4mm)
Display Contrast: Automatic RPM – Screen Value
HOURS – Screen Value
Display Backlight: Yellow (Normal Operation); Red (Shutdown) (Back-
light will only be available when unit is powered by DC or AC.) TYPE – Channel Type Configuration
Voltage Level Monitor: Monitor and display voltage level of DC Supply, LOW BATT – Low Battery Warning (displayed when condition exists)
CD Ignition, and internal battery. HISTORY – Shutdown History
Keypad: 6 switches: Ridge Embossed, Metal Dome, Tactile 14 Oz. Trip TEST – Test Mode
Force LUBE – Pre-lubrication Timer
Enclosure Cutout: 5.50 x 5.50 inches (133 mm). POSTLUBE – Post-lubrication Timer
Operating Temperature: -40 to +85 degrees C SHUTDOWN – Stop Mode
Viewable Temperature: -40 to +85 degrees C ALARM – Alarm(s) Warning (displayed when condition exists)
Storage Temperature: -40 to +85 degrees C SETPOINT – Edit Set-point Value
Tachometer Accuracy: ±0.5% of the display reading or ±1 RPM, which- SETUP – Setup Menu(s)
ever is greater.
Resetable Hourmeter Range: 0 to 99999 hrs.
Non-Resetable Hourmeter Range: 0 to 99999 hrs. ‡ 38.4K baud will not be available when IGN input is selected as the source for
RPM calculations. When MPU is selected, this feature is available for selec-
† CSA approved for 250VDC maximum tion.

Dimensions
Display Head

Power Supply (PSU-2)

 - 252 -

How to Order

TTD Replacement Parts and Assemblies

TTD-H (50700597) Display head
PSU-2 (50700596) Div 2 Power Supply
PSU-2-T (50700594) Div 2 Power Supply w/ Tach
PSU-2-L (50700595) Div 2 Power Supply w/ Pre/Post Lube
PSU-2-N (50700945) Div 2 Power Supply w/ No-Flow
PSU-2-T-L (50700593) Div 2 Power Supply w/ Tach and Pre/Post Lube
PSU-2-T-N (50700943) Div 2 Power Supply w/ Tach and No-Flow
PSU-2-L-N (50700944) Div 2 Power Supply w/ Pre/Post Lube and No-Flow
PSU-2-T-L-N (50700942) Div 2 Power Supply w/ Tach, Pre/Post Lube, and No-Flow
Backup Battery (00005125) Lithium battery, 6VDC, 1300mAh
Choke (50000774) Ignition Choke Filter
TTD-H Plug Kit (00009741) Printed Replacement Terminal Plugs for TTD-H Sensor Inputs
PSU-2 Plug (00009768) Printed Replacement Plug for PSU-2 Power Connector
 96122
- 253 - 02-23-09
Section 50

Series 1501 Selectronic® Micro-Controller/Annunciator

Features
• Alarm/Shutdown for 32 or 64 N.O. or N.C. Sensors
• Operating Sequence Selection
• Field Adjustable Sensor Nomenclature
• Selectable Sensor Lockouts Class A, B, C or P
• Built-In Tachometer/Overspeed Function
• RS232 or RS485 Modbus RTU Communications
• Two Start/Run Timers and Elapsed Time Meter
• CSA Certified or NRTL Approved for Use in Class I,
Div. 1 Grps. C & D Hazardous Locations
NRTL/C

The Series 1501 instrument is a microprocessor- based alarm, shutdown and control system with tachometer/hourmeter function. It annunciates in alpha-
numeric characters the protective device that has signaled an alarm or caused equipment shutdown. Information is called up and adjustments are made
on a six-button keypad on the face of the unit. Configurations such as: Alarm or Shutdown Nomenclature, Preset Timers, and Tachometer Calibration can
be made in the field.
Murphy’s Series 1501 system has seven SPDT relays. On the standard model, the relays are assigned to the following functions: Lube, Crank, Ignition/
Motor, Fuel Valve, Load, Alarm, Shutdown.
The complete Series 1501 system consists of a head (monitor), sensor input terminal strip (two needed for 64 sensor models), 36 inch (914 mm) flat rib-
bon cable(s) for connecting the terminal block to the head/monitor, and a Class I, Div. 1, explosion-proof power supply.
The Series 1501 system is powered from 120 VAC or 12 or 24 VDC. The head/monitor is rated intrinsically safe and includes a communication port:
RS232 or RS485 (Modbus RTU slave). This port allows for remote control functions such as Start/Stop, Load/Unload, etc., and for access to Series 1501
registers.
Applications
The Series 1501 system can be configured to monitor applications such as: Air and Gas Compressors, Natural Gas Refueling, and other Industrial Oper-
ations. For a list of applications and our cataloged programs contact a Murphy sales representative. Custom programming available at additional charge.
Features
• 32 or 64 sensor inputs (N.O. or N.C.) for alarm or shutdown. • Two Start-Run Timers.
• Easy operation/adjustments Six-button keypad. • Seven Control Relay Outputs.
• RS232 or RS485 Modbus RTU communications. • Pre/Postlube Time Delay.
• Automatic Engine Control. • Automatic Compressor Loading.
Specifications
Power Consumption: 120 VAC (7.5 VA); 12 VDC (3.5 watts); 24 VDC Sensor Inputs Terminal Block: Rail mount DIN type; 32 terminals, screw
(3.5 watts). type.
Sensor Inputs: 32 to 64 N.O. and/or N.C. inputs such as Murphy Swich- Opto-Isolated Tach/Run Input: Magnetic pickup, 4.5 to 120 Vrms, 0-10
gage® instruments. Field selectable as a Class A, B1, B2, C, P or kHz. CD ignition, positive or negative ground, 100 to 300 VDC, 3-666
ESD for shutdown, alarm, or control function. Hz. 12 to 125 VDC or 120 Vrms, 50/60 Hz may be used for run sig-
Outputs: 7-SPDT relay outputs, 5 A, 1/16 HP, 125/250 VAC/ 1 A, 30 VDC. nals.
NOTE: For hazardous areas an approved isolation barrier must be used Operating Temperatures: 32 to 122°F (0 to 50°C).
between sensor switch and input terminals if the sensor output comes from any Storage Temperatures: -4 to 158°F (-20 to 70°C).
energy storing device such as a relay or transistor. Case: ABS plastic, 1/4 DIN (90 x 90 mm).
Adjustable Time Delays: (standard Series 1501) Interface Output: Factory configured for RS232; field-selectable for
• Prelube • Rest RS485 (specify for factory configured RS485).
• Process Delay • Permissive Alphanumeric Display: 2 lines, each line with 16 characters (32 charac-
• Run Delay • Idle/Cooldown ters total).
• Purge • Postlube Power Supply Enclosure: Explosion-proof, Class I, Division 1. Intrinsi-
• Fuel Delay • Crank cally safe barrier built into the power supply, 120 VAC with 7 form “C”
relay outputs for the following functions (with standard S1501):
• Load Delay • Test
• Lube • Load • Crank • Alarm
• Class B1 Sensor Lockout
• Ignition/Motor • Shutdown • Fuel Valve
• Class B2 Sensor Lockout
• Before Ignition Ground or Electric Motor Stop (for up to 59 sec-
onds)
 - 254 -

How to Order Dimensions

To order the Series 1501 system specify the model number for each indi-
vidual component and accessory:
Specify: To Order:
S1501H-32-2 Head with RS232 port for 32 sensors.
S1501H-64-2 Head with RS232 port for 64 sensors.
S1501H-32-4 Head with RS485 port for 32 sensors.
S1501H-64-4 Head with RS485 port for 64 sensors.
S1501CH-32-2 Head w/custom* program, RS232 port, 32 sensors.
S1501CH-64-2 Head w/custom* program, RS232 port, 64 sensors.
S1501CH-32-4 Head w/custom* program, RS485 port, 32 sensors.
S1501CH-64-4 Head w/custom* program, RS485 port, 64 sensors.
S1501CC48 Communications Cable Assembly, 48 in. (1.2 m) long.
S1500TB32 Terminal Block only†
S1500CA36 Ribbon Cable Assembly†
S1501PS-120 120 VAC, 12 or 24 VDC Power Supply.
Accessories:
S1501PCA72 Power and Control Cable Assembly, 72 in. (1.8 m) long.
S1501PS-120-E Power Supply with 90° Conduit Elbow fitting.
S1501PS-120-LC Power Supply Less Case.
Approximate Shipping Weights
Complete Series 1501 System: 28 lb. (12.7 kg).
S1501H-32-2; S1501H-64-2; S1501H-32-4; S1501H-64-4;
S1501CH-32-2; S1501CH-64-2; S1501CH-32-4; S1501CH-64-4:
2 lb. (0.907 kg).
S1500TB32: 2 lb. (0.907 kg).
S1500CA36; S1501CC48; S1501PCA72: 2 lb. (0.907 kg).
S1501PS-120-LC: 3 lb. (1.36 kg).
S1501PS-120 and S1501PS-120-E: 22 lb. (9.98 kg).
Approximate Shipping Dimensions
Complete Series 1501 System: 20 x 14 x 12-1/2 in. (508 x 356 x 318 mm).
S1501H-32-2; S1501H-64-2; S1501H-32-4; S1501H-64-4;
S1501CH-32-2; S1501CH-64-2; S1501CH-32-4; S1501CH-64-4: 6 x 6 x
6 in. (152 x 152 x 152 mm).
S1500TB32: 12 x 7 x 4 in. (305 x 178 x 102 mm).
S1500CA36; S1501CC48; S1501PCA72: 6 x 6 x 6 in. (152 x 152 x
152 mm).
S1501PS-120-LC: 12 x 7 x 4 in. (305 x 178 x 102 mm).
S1501PS-120 and S1501PS-120-E: 17 x 10 x 9-3/4 in. (431 x 254 x
248 mm).

* Specify program number or contact Murphy for available programs listings.

† Two required for 64 sensor models.
 0910434
- 255 - Revised 01-25-11
Section 50

Centurion™ Configurable Controller – C4 Series

The C4 Series Centurion Configurable Controller is a control and monitoring system. Primarily designed for engine/electric motor driven compressors, the
Centurion is well suited for many control applications using standard configurations to save money and reduce training. Additionally, Murphy can custom
design a control package to meet exact specifications for a variety of applications.
The Centurion continuously monitors input signals and set points and commands outputs to maintain proper operation. When an out-of-limits event
occurs, the controller will stop, shutdown, or control equipment to change conditions. The Auto-Start capabilities of the Centurion allows for start/stop
based on parameters such as pressure setpoints or by digital signals.
The Centurion provides real-time data via communication ports to a connected display and/or supervisory system. This advanced system offers multiple
options for remote communications and operation including HMI’s, PLC’s, PC’s, and SCADA systems. The industry standard Modbus® RTU protocol
means greater support for a wide variety of communication equipment including radio and satellite communications systems.
Features
• Fully-configurable control and monitoring system. Applications include • Shutdown History List (Last 20 events)
reciprocating / screw compressors and pump systems • Event History List (Last 32 events)
• System is expandable to meet most 3-stage compressor applications. • Active Alarm List
• User configurable with Windows®-based software. Allows the operator • 10 Maintenance Timers
to point-and-click to implement standard processes. All I/O points can
• Run Hourmeter
be custom-configured.
• Support for No-flow Totalization
• No programming experience required.
• Number of starts per hour (Electric Motor)
• Local and remote communications, Modbus RTU via RS485/232.
• 6 PID Loops w/ Override (up to 3 each)
• USB 1.1 support for laptops without a serial port.
• Configuration Templates provided for simple user configuration.
• Upload / Download capabilites for configuratons and setpoints.
• Configurations stored in non-volatile flash memory.
• Approved Certification for Class I, Division 2, Groups B, C, & D areas
• Setpoints stored in non-volatile eeprom memory.
Basic Components
The Centurion consists of a Display Module, a Main I/O Module, and – Display Module (Head): C4-3: LCD Graphic Display.
optional Expansion I/O Module. No special cables are required. The Cen- – Main I/O Module: C4-1-A: 32 DI, 10 DO, 12 AI, 8 TC, 2 AO, 1 MPU.
turion is designed for use within a weatherproof enclosure only. – Expansion Module: MX4: 18 TC (Type J or K). MX5-A: 6 DO, 8 AI, 4
AO, 1 MPU.
DI= Digital Input; DO= Digital Output; AI= Analog Input; AO= Analog Output;
TC= Thermocouple Input; MPU= Magnetic Pick Up Input.
RTD= Resistive Temperature Device

C4 Series General Specifications

Power Input: 10 -32 VDC
Operating Temp.: -40 to 85°C (-40 to 185°F)
Configuration: PC-based Centurion Configuration Software.
 - 256 -

C4-3 Display Module with Graphical LCD

• Operating temperature: -40 to +85°C (185°F).
• 128x64 pixels, LCD Display with Green Backlight.
• 12-key keypad for user interface for set point entry, alarm
acknowledgement, start, stop, reset, etc.
• 2 Serial Ports - Software Configurable
- Port 1 - Modbus Master RS232 or RS485
- Port 2 - Modbus Slave RS232, RS485, or USB (future)
• Customizable Process Screens (up to 9)
- Line by Line
- Gauge
- Control Loop
- Generic Register

C4-1-A Main I/O Module

• All I/O options individually software selectable. No jumpers
required.
• 32 Optically-isolated DC Digital Inputs: NO or NC, (active
high/active low), non-incendive.
- LED indicators.
- Approved for use with general purpose switches in haz-
ardous areas.
• 12 Analog Inputs: 0-24mA or 0-5VDC , 10 bit hardware.
• 8 Thermocouples
- Open Thermocouple
- Cold Junction Compensation.
• 1 Magnetic Pickup Input/AC Run Signal: 30 to 10kHz,
4.5VAC rms min, 120VAC rms max.
• 10 Digital Outputs:
- LED indicators
- Four (4) relay outputs, form C, dry contacts.
- Four (4) FET outputs (source).
- Two (2) FET outputs (sink).
• 2 Analog Outputs
- 4-20mA, 16 bit hardware.

• 3 Communication Ports: Port 2 (USB): Interface: USB 1.1 Compliant Port emulating RS232 com-
Port 1 (SERIAL): munications via PC driver.
- Interface: RS232 or RS485. - Protocol/Services: Modbus RTU (Slave), Proprietary (Configuration
- Protocol: Modbus RTU (Slave) Transfer)
Port 2 (SERIAL): - Connection: USB Type B connector
- Interface: RS232 or RS485. - Automatic selection of USB when a signal is detected on the USB
Type B connector.
- Protocol: Modbus RTU (Slave), Proprietary (Configuration Transfer)
Port 3: Interface: CANBUS
- Protocol/Services: Proprietary communications for Expansion I/O
Module support.
 - 257 -

Expansion I/O Modules

MX4 Expansion I/O Module

 All I/O options individually software selectable. No Jumpers required.

 18 Thermocouple Inputs: Type J or K, 12 bit hardware.
- Open Thermocouple Detection: Drives channel reading high
(max of scale).
- Cold Junction Compensation.
 1 Magnetic Pickup Input: 4.5VAC – 120 VAC, 30 – 10kHz.

MX5-A Expansion I/O Module

 8 Analog Inputs: 0-24mA, or 0-5VDC, 10 bit hardware.

 6 Digital Outputs: Open Collector Transistor, 150mA (sink)
 4 Analog Outputs: 4-20mA, 16 bit hardware.
 1 Magnetic Pickup Input: 4.5VAC – 120 VAC, 30 – 10kHz.

Dimensions
C4-3

C4-1-A
 - 258 -

How To Order
Selecting a Centurion Configurable Controller C4 Series Model:
1. Specify C4-1-A Main I/O Module

2. Specify one (optional) Expansion I/O Module

MX4
or
MX5-A

3. Specify one (optional) C4-3 Display Module The minimum system requirements:
C4-1-A Main I/O Module
Display capable of Modbus communications
The Murphy C4-3 Display Module is a highly integrated
HMI for use with the Centurion system and is
recommended for most customers.
Some systems may require additional I/O which is
available on the MX4 or MX5-A Expansion I/O
Modules..*

Accessories
Configuration Software
MurphyNET Configuration Suite - Centurion configuration tool for modifying sequence of operation, set points, timers,
faults, and *displays for Centurion. Includes file transfer utilities for configuration and firmware upgrades.
Replacement Parts and Accessories
C4-1-A Plug Kit (00000504) Printed Replacement Terminal Plugs for Centurion (C4-1-A) Main I/O Module
C4-3 Plug Kit (00000543) Printed Replacement Terminal Plugs for Centurion (C4-3) Display Module
Choke (50000774) Ignition Noise (Choke) Filter
MX4 Plug Kit (00030867) Printed Replacement Terminal Plugs for MX4 Expansion I/O Module
MX5 Plug Kit (00030868) Printed Replacement Terminal Plugs for MX5 Expansion I/O Module
Centurion Configuration Tool (50702313) Configuration tool for user application setup

* Display configuration and other settings for display are only for use with the C4-3 Display Module.
 0910452
- 259 - Revised 07-28-10
Section 50

Centurion™ PLUS Full Featured Controller

The Centurion PLUS Controller is a custom programmable control and monitoring system. Primarily designed for engine driven compressors, the
Centurion PLUS is well suited for many control applications such as CNG control, Fire Pump Control, and many industrial control applications. Addition-
ally, Murphy can custom design a control package to meet exact specifications for a variety of other applications.
The Centurion PLUS continuously monitors input signals and set points and commands outputs to maintain proper operation. When an out-of-limits event
occurs, the controller will stop, shutdown, or control equipment to change conditions. The Auto-Start capabilities of the Centurion PLUS allows for start/
stop based on parameters such as pressure set points or by digital signals. The Centurion PLUS allows for customer valve logic sequencing, purge cycle
control, and many other logic applications. The Centurion PLUS can also provide complex calculation abilities such as rod load and temperature
deviation.
The Centurion PLUS provides real-time data via communications ports to a connected display and/or supervisory system. This advanced system offers
multiple options for remote communications and operation including HMI’s, PLC’s, PC’s, and SCADA systems. The industry standard Modbus® RTU pro-
tocol means greater support for a wide variety of communication equipment including radio and satellite communications systems. Other communication
options include Modbus TCP/IP, web page hosting, and data logging captured in standard CSV files uploadable through USB port.
Features
• Custom Programmed to meet exact application requirements. • Expanded communication abilities
• Communications via 2 RS485/RS232 ports • Modem dial in/dial out using terminal interfaces, Modbus RTU
• USB 1.1 support for laptops without a serial port protocols
• Upload/Download capabilities for setpoint edits • Remote monitoring and control via Ethernet (several protocols
• Shutdown and Alarm History, Maintenance Timers supported including but not limited to Modbus TCP, TCP/IP
Internet Web server)
• Complex valve logic and sequencing support
• Event driven email, SMS text messaging possible
• PID Loops w/ Overrides (Multiple control loop possibilities)
• Protocol conversion (many industry protocols supportede)
• Expand I/O up to three (3) expansion modules, any combination
• Web page hosting
• Firmware stored in non-volatile flash memory
• Data logging
• Setpoints stored in non-volatile eeprom memory
• Using common Compact Flash card memory, 1 GB of storage
• Approved Certification for Class 1, Division 2, Groups B, C, & D areas.
• Trends data as well as capture of readings at time of fault
• Expanded calculation abilities
• Security file logs all setpoint changes
• Rod load equations
• Importable to CSV files
• Lookup table support
• Multi-Language support
• Temperature channel deviation

Basic Components
The Centurion PLUS consists of a Display Module, a Main I/O Module, – Expansion Modules:
and optional Expansion I/O Modules. No special cables are required. The MX4: 18 TC (Type J or K)., 1 MPU
Centurion PLUS is designed for use within a weatherproof enclosure only.
MX5: 24 DI, 8 DO, 10 AI, 1 MPU
– Display Module (Head): Full color VGA 6” Touchscreen (Optional 10” MX5-A: Same I/O as MX5, additional 4 analog outputs
available)
MX5-D: Same I/O as MX5, additional 8 digital outputs
– Main I/O Module: CPC4-1-A: 32 DI, 10 DO, 12 AI, 8 TC, 2 AO, 1 MPU.

DI= Digital Input; DO= Digital Output; AI= Analog Input; AO= Analog Output;
TC= Thermocouple Input; MPU= Magnetic Pick Up Input.
 - 260 -

General Specifications
Power Input: 10 -32 VDC Application Firmware: Programming Proprietary C Language - PC-
Operating Temp. (CPC4-1): -40 to 85°C (-40 to 185°F) based upload/download setpoint editor
Operating Temp. (Touchscreen): 0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F)
Full-Color VGA Touchscreen
• Full-Color VGA Touchscreen (Resistive Analog)
• 6” Standard offering, 10” upgrade
• Data logging - 1 GB memory card
• Data Log transfer “on the fly”
• Communications
- Serial RS232 - 2
- Serial RS485 - 1
- USB 1.1 - 1
- Ethernet (several protocols supported including, but not limited to Modbus TCP,
TCP/IP Internet Web server)
• 5-Button keypad for on screen menus (6”)
• 8-Button keypad for on-screen menus (10”)
• Standard Screen offerings
• Front panel Power LED
• 24 VDC Powered

CPC4-1-A Main I/O Module

• All I/O options individually software selectable. No jumpers
required.
• 32 Optically-isolated DC Digital Inputs: NO or NC, (active high/
active low), non-incendive.
- LED indicators.
- Approved for use with general purpose switches in hazardous
areas.
• 12 Analog Inputs: 4-20mA or 0-5V, 10 bit hardware.
• 8 Thermocouples: Type J or K, 12 bit hardware.
- Open Thermocouple Detection: Drives channel reading high
(max of scale).
- Cold Junction Compensation.
• 1 Magnetic Pickup Input/AC Run Signal: 30 to 10kHz, 5VAC rms
min, 120VAC rms max.
• 10 Digital Outputs:
- LED indicators
- Four (4) relay outputs, form C, dry contacts.
- Four (4) FET outputs (source).
- Two (2) FET outputs (sink).
• 2 Analog Outputs
- 4-20mA, 16 bit hardware.
• 3 Communication Ports: Port 2 (USB): Interface: USB 1.1 Compliant Port emulating RS232 com-
Port 1: Interface: RS232 or RS485. munications via PC driver.
- Protocol: Modbus RTU (Slave) - Protocol/Services: Modbus RTU (Slave), Proprietary (Firmware
Port 2 (SERIAL): Transfer) Proprietary (Setpoint upload/down)
- Interface: RS232 or RS485. - Connection: USB Type B connector
- Protocol: Modbus RTU (Master or Slave), Proprietary (Firmware - Automatic selection of USB when a signal is detected on the USB
Transfer) Type B connector.
Port 3: Interface: CAN
- Protocol/Services: Proprietary communications for Expansion I/O
Module support.
 - 261 -

Expansion I/O Modules

MX4 Expansion I/O Module
 All I/O options individually software selectable. No Jumpers required.
 18 Thermocouple Inputs: Type J or K, 12 bit hardware.
- Open Thermocouple Detection: Drives channel reading high
(max of scale).
- Cold Junction Compensation.
 1 Magnetic Pickup Input: 4.5VAC – 120 VAC, 30 – 10kHz.

MX5 Expansion I/O Module

 24 Digital Inputs: Optically-isolated DC Digital Inputs,
(active high/active low), non-incendive
 10 Analog Inputs: 4-20mA or 0-5VDC, 10 bit hardware.
 8 Digital Outputs: Open Collector Transistor, 150mA (sink)
 1 Magnetic Pickup Input: 4.5VAC – 120 VAC, 30 – 10kHz.
MX5-A Expansion I/O Module (Analog Output option)
 24 Digital Inputs: Optically-isolated DC Digital Inputs,
(active high/active low), non-incendive
 10 Analog Inputs: 4-20mA or 0-5VDC, 10 bit hardware.
 8 Digital Outputs: Open Collector Transistor, 150mA (sink)
 4 Analog Outputs: 4-20mA, 16 bit hardware.
 1 Magnetic Pickup Input: 4.5VAC – 120 VAC, 30 – 10kHz.
MX5-D Expansion I/O Module (Digital Output option, 8 additional)
 24 Digital Inputs: Optically-isolated DC Digital Inputs,
(active high/active low), non-incendive
 10 Analog Inputs: 4-20mA or 0-5VDC, 10 bit hardware.
 16 Digital Outputs: Open Collector Transistor, 150mA (sink)
 1 Magnetic Pickup Input: 4.5VAC – 120 VAC, 30 – 10kHz.

Dimensions

         6” 
Touchscreen
CPC4‐1‐A

        10” 
Touchscreen
 - 262 -

How To Order
Selecting a Centurion PLUS Controller Model:
1. Specify CPC4-1-A Main I/O Module

2. Specify any combination up to three (3) (optional) Expansion I/O Modules

MX4
MX5
MX5-A
&/or
MX5-D

3. Specify one 6-inch or 10-inch (upgrade) VGA Color Touchscreen The minimum system requirements:
CPC4-1-A Main I/O Module
Full-color VGA Touchscreen (for operation control
and interface with Main I/O Module)

Some systems may require the use of our Inter-

change™ Comm Control Module, MX-Series
Expansion I/O. Chose up to three (3) of any
combination.

Replacement Parts and Accessories

CPC4-1-A Plug Kit (00030866) Printed Replacement Terminal Plugs for Centurion PLUS (CPC4-1-A) Main I/O Module
Choke (50000774) Ignition Noise (Choke) Filter
MX4 Plug Kit (00030867) Printed Replacement Terminal Plugs for MX4 Expansion I/O Module
MX5 Plug Kit (00030868) Printed Replacement Terminal Plugs for MX5 Expansion I/O Module
 0910471
- 263 - 11-11-09
Section 50

TTD™ Annunciator Panel

- 264 -
 0910472
- 265 - 07-28-10
Section 50

Centurion™ Control Panel

The Centurion Configurable Controller (C4)

is a hybrid of annunciator and compressor
controller.
The C4 combines the monitoring and
shutdown features of an annunciator,
with auto-start and basic engine controls
that help prevent shutdowns.

Features
• PC Configurable / USB Compatible
• No programming experience required
 - 266 -

C4 Series General Specifications

• Display Module (Head): C4-3: LCD Graphic Display.
• Main I/O Module: C4-1-A: 32 DI, 10 DO, 12 AI, 8 TC, 2 AO, 1 MPU.
• Power Input: 10 -32 VDC
• Operating Temp.: -40 to 85°C (-40 to 185°F)
• Configuration: PC-based Centurion Configuration Software.

C4-3 Display Module with Graphical LCD

• Operating temperature: -40 to +85°C (185°F).
• 128x64 pixels, LCD Display with Green Backlight.
• 12-key keypad for user interface for set point entry, alarm acknowledgement, start, stop, reset, etc.
• 2 Serial Ports - Software Configurable
- Port 1 - Modbus Master RS232 or RS485
- Port 2 - Modbus Slave RS232, RS485, or USB (future)
• Customizable Process Screens (up to 9)
- Line by Line
- Gauge
- Control Loop
- Generic Register

C4-1-A Main I/O Module

• All I/O options individually software selectable. No jumpers required. • 1 Magnetic Pickup Input/AC Run Signal: 30 to 10kHz, 4.5VAC rms min,
• 32 Optically-isolated DC Digital Inputs: NO or NC, (active high/active 120VAC rms max.
low), non-incendive. • 10 Digital Outputs:
- LED indicators. - LED indicators
- Approved for use with general purpose switches in hazardous areas. - Four (4) relay outputs, form C, dry contacts.
• 12 Analog Inputs: 0-24mA or 0-5VDC , 10 bit hardware. - Four (4) FET outputs (source).
• 8 Thermocouple - Two (2) FET outputs (sink).
- Open Thermocouple • 2 Analog Outputs
- Cold Junction Compensation.
- 4-20mA, 16 bit hardware.
• 3 Communication Ports: Port 2 (USB): Interface: USB 1.1 Compliant Port emulating RS232 com-
Port 1 (SERIAL): munications via PC driver.
- Interface: RS232 or RS485. - Protocol/Services: Modbus RTU (Slave), Proprietary (Configuration
- Protocol: Modbus RTU (Slave) Transfer)
Port 2 (SERIAL): - Connection: USB Type B connector
- Interface: RS232 or RS485. - Automatic selection of USB when a signal is detected on the USB
Type B connector.
- Protocol: Modbus RTU (Slave), Proprietary (Configuration Transfer)
Port 3: Interface: CANBUS
- Protocol/Services: Proprietary communications for Expansion I/O
Module support.
 0910492
- 267 - Revised 07-28-10
Section 50

Centurion™ PLUS Control Panel

 - 268 -

General Specifications
Power Input: 10 -32 VDC Application Firmware: Programming Proprietary C Language - PC-
Operating Temp. (CPC4-1): -40 to 85°C (-40 to 185°F) based upload/download setpoint editor
Operating Temp. (Touchscreen): 0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F)
Full-Color VGA Touchscreen
• Full-Color VGA Touchscreen (Resistive Analog)
• 6” Standard offering, 10” upgrade
• Data logging - 1 GB memory card
• Data Log transfer “on the fly”
• Communications
- Serial RS232 - 2
- Serial RS485 - 1
- USB 1.1 - 1
- Ethernet (several protocols supported including, but not limited to Modbus TCP,
TCP/IP Internet Web server)
• 5-Button keypad for on screen menus (6”)
• 8-Button keypad for on-screen menus (10”)
• Standard Screen offerings
• Front panel Power LED
• 24 VDC Powered

CPC4-1-A Main I/O Module

• All I/O options individually software selectable. No jumpers
required.
• 32 Optically-isolated DC Digital Inputs: NO or NC, (active high/
active low), non-incendive.
- LED indicators.
- Approved for use with general purpose switches in hazardous
areas.
• 12 Analog Inputs: 4-20mA or 0-5V, 10 bit hardware.
• 8 Thermocouples: Type J or K, 12 bit hardware.
- Open Thermocouple Detection: Drives channel reading high
(max of scale).
- Cold Junction Compensation.
• 1 Magnetic Pickup Input/AC Run Signal: 30 to 10kHz, 5VAC rms
min, 120VAC rms max.
• 10 Digital Outputs:
- LED indicators
- Four (4) relay outputs, form C, dry contacts.
- Four (4) FET outputs (source).
- Two (2) FET outputs (sink).
• 2 Analog Outputs
- 4-20mA, 16 bit hardware.
• 3 Communication Ports: Port 2 (USB): Interface: USB 1.1 Compliant Port emulating RS232 com-
Port 1: Interface: RS232 or RS485. munications via PC driver.
- Protocol: Modbus RTU (Slave) - Protocol/Services: Modbus RTU (Slave), Proprietary (Firmware
Port 2 (SERIAL): Transfer) Proprietary (Setpoint upload/down)
- Interface: RS232 or RS485. - Connection: USB Type B connector
- Protocol: Modbus RTU (Master or Slave), Proprietary (Firmware - Automatic selection of USB when a signal is detected on the USB
Transfer) Type B connector.
Port 3: Interface: CAN
- Protocol/Services: Proprietary communications for Expansion I/O
Module support.
 - 269 -

Expansion I/O Modules

MX4 Expansion I/O Module
 All I/O options individually software selectable. No Jumpers required.
 18 Thermocouple Inputs: Type J or K, 12 bit hardware.
- Open Thermocouple Detection: Drives channel reading high
(max of scale).
- Cold Junction Compensation.
 1 Magnetic Pickup Input: 4.5VAC – 120 VAC, 30 – 10kHz.

MX5 Expansion I/O Module

 24 Digital Inputs: Optically-isolated DC Digital Inputs,
(active high/active low), non-incendive
 10 Analog Inputs: 4-20mA or 0-5VDC, 10 bit hardware.
 8 Digital Outputs: Open Collector Transistor, 150mA (sink)
 1 Magnetic Pickup Input: 4.5VAC – 120 VAC, 30 – 10kHz.
MX5-A Expansion I/O Module (Analog Output option)
 24 Digital Inputs: Optically-isolated DC Digital Inputs,
(active high/active low), non-incendive
 10 Analog Inputs: 4-20mA or 0-5VDC, 10 bit hardware.
 8 Digital Outputs: Open Collector Transistor, 150mA (sink)
 4 Analog Outputs: 4-20mA, 16 bit hardware.
 1 Magnetic Pickup Input: 4.5VAC – 120 VAC, 30 – 10kHz.
MX5-D Expansion I/O Module (Digital Output option, 8 additional)
 24 Digital Inputs: Optically-isolated DC Digital Inputs,
(active high/active low), non-incendive
 10 Analog Inputs: 4-20mA or 0-5VDC, 10 bit hardware.
 16 Digital Outputs: Open Collector Transistor, 150mA (sink)
 1 Magnetic Pickup Input: 4.5VAC – 120 VAC, 30 – 10kHz.

Dimensions

         6” 
Touchscreen
CPC4‐1‐A

        10” 
Touchscreen
 - 270 -

How To Order
Selecting a Centurion PLUS Controller Model:
1. Specify CPC4-1-A Main I/O Module

2. Specify any combination up to three (3) (optional) Expansion I/O Modules

MX4
MX5
MX5-A
&/or
MX5-D

3. Specify one 6-inch or 10-inch (upgrade) VGA Color Touchscreen The minimum system requirements:
CPC4-1-A Main I/O Module
Full-color VGA Touchscreen (for operation control
and interface with Main I/O Module)

Some systems may require the use of our Inter-

change™ Comm Control Module, MX-Series
Expansion I/O. Chose up to three (3) of any combi-
nation.

Replacement Parts and Accessories

CPC4-1-A Plug Kit (00030866) Printed Replacement Terminal Plugs for Centurion PLUS (CPC4-1-A) Main I/O Module
Choke (50000774) Ignition Noise (Choke) Filter
MX4 Plug Kit (00030867) Printed Replacement Terminal Plugs for MX4 Expansion I/O Module
MX5 Plug Kit (00030868) Printed Replacement Terminal Plugs for MX5 Expansion I/O Module
 1210950
- 271 - 02-03-12
Section 50

Control Systems & Services

With more than 70 years of history, Murphy’s Control Systems & Services division has the
experience to provide the correct solution for any control system need. We work with
clients to quickly identify critical needs and cost-effective solutions in a wide variety of
control systems applications, from basic annunciator shutdown panels to complex
PLC-based systems.

CS&S takes any project from conception to completion and beyond, with 24-hour
technical support.

Our services include:

• Project Management
• Design and Engineering
• Testing
• Training
• Technical Support

Project Management: Dedicated to the Details

Our employees have the proven ability to take your project from concept to design to
fabrication and field support. We begin the process with the end in mind, utilizing a
consultative approach to get a clear picture of your desired end result.

Design and Engineering: Built Right, Every Time

Consistent design maintains similar look and feel across many different PLC panels. This
concept allows production, support staff, customer staff and end-users to be
familiar with the controls panels even before they see it for the first time.

Start-Up Assistance: Money Saved, Not Spent

In the Oil & Gas industry, start ups are critical. Having the right personnel on site can save
downtime and money by reducing lost production time. Downtime is expensive and can be
minimized by having a PLC Service Engineer provide the technical
expertise needed for advanced troubleshooting and on-site control philosophy
modifications.

Troubleshooting: Extensive Knowledge When & Where You

Need It
Equipment malfunctions can happen any time, day or night. So we provide 24-
hour technical support to help get your equipment back up and running. Our
support team is available by phone to answer your questions and assist with
troubleshooting.

Training: Helping Your Team

Our dedicated team of PLC Engineers help your operators feel more
comfortable with the systems by spending time with them to go through the
PLC as well as basic troubleshooting tips.
 - 272 -

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

 SECTI ON 55 VALVES

Check/Relief Valves - Diesel Fuel

7867 Diesel Fuel Check Valves – CKV/PRV Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Shutoff Valves
99026 Diesel-Fuel Shutoff Valves – SV Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
94134 Electromechanical Fuel Shutoff Valves – M25 and M50 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
94129 Pneumatic Valves for Fuel Gas Shutoff
Models M2582-P and M5180-P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Pulsation Dampener Valves
95145 Pulsation Dampener – PD8100 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

 7867
- 273 - Revised 04-01-10
Section 55

Diesel Fuel Check Valves

Features
• Problem Solvers for Diesel Engine Shutdown
Systems
• Precision Made
• Stainless Steel Spring
• Compact and Simple to Install

Murphy offers two types of diesel fuel line valves: check valves and pressure relief valves.
The CKV series check valves are in-line, one-way valves that prevent fuel from being siphoned back into an injector or
injection pump which could delay a shutdown.
There are two types of check valves: CKV2336 and CKV1WPS. The CKV2336 has a 1/4 NPT threaded male connection
on each end for connecting to fuel line fittings or hoses. The CKV1WPS check valve is typically mounted in the fuel bypass
line of the last fuel injector. The CKV1WPS features a hollow bolt connection and a barbed, 1/8 NPT connection for flex
hose or fitting.
The PRV series pressure relief valves, relieve overpressure in a fuel system usually caused by closing of a solenoid fuel
valve. The PRV50 and PRV70 have a 1/4 NPT threaded connection on each end for connecting to fuel line fittings or
hoses.
Specifications
Materials Opening Pressure
Body Seal Spring CKV2336 4 psi (27)
CKV2336 Brass Poppet SS CKV1WPS 2 psi (14)
CKV1WPS Brass SS SS PRV50 25 psi (172)
PRV50/PRV70 Brass SS SS PRV70 70 psi (483)
Note: SS=Stainless steel. Note: metric (kPa) equivalents in parenthesis.
Static Pressure (all):
150 psi (1.03 MPa) maximum
Weight:
CKV2336: 1.3 oz (40.5 grams)
CKV1WPS: 1.3 oz (40.5 grams)
PRV50/PRV70: 1.3 oz (40.5 grams)
Dimensions
 - 274 -

Basic Operation
Murphy Check Valves and Pressure Relief
Valves enhance at the operation of diesel
engine shutdown valves by reducing the time
required for complete engine shutdown after
the solenoid valve closes. The diagram to the
right shows a typical installation using CKV
check valves and PRV pressure relief valves.
All valves are shown closed.
Check Valves close off the fuel return line(s)
to prevent fuel or air from re-entering the
injection system through the bypass line(s).
Models CKV2336 (3) is an in-line valve.
Model CKV1WPS (2) has a 21/64 in. (8 mm)
banjo fitting that attaches to the return line of
the final injector. All check valves allow fuel to
flow away from the injectors but close to pre-
vent fuel from flowing in the reverse direction.
The PRV50 and PRV70 (1) relieve pressure
buildup in the fuel system that can cause fuel
filter canisters to burst. When the solenoid
valve closes to stop the engine, the fuel trans-
fer pump will continue to produce pressure as
the engine slows down to stop. This pressure
buildup, if not relieved, can cause fuel filter
canisters or gaskets to leak. PRV’s are
installed in the bypass line from the fuel fil-
ter(s) to the fuel return line.

How to Order
Specify model number:
CKV2336
CKV1WPS
PRV50
PRV70
Note: there are no replacement parts.
 99026
- 275 - Revised 08-07
Section 55

Diesel-Fuel Shutoff Valves – SV-Series

Features
• Solenoid Operated Fuel Shutoff Valve
• Diesel Engines
• Diesel Driven Pumps and Compressors
• High Pressure Models
• Select from 12 or 24 VDC Models

The SV-series valve is a normally closed valve that opens when current is supplied from the battery through a magnetic switch. Temper-
ature, level, or pressure SWICHGAGE® instruments installed on the engine and pump or compressor, trip the magnetic switch, breaking
the circuit from the battery which closes the valve and stops the engine.
The SV-12 valve operates on 12VDC, has a 1/4 NPT inlet and outlet, and a full 3/16 in. (5 mm) orifice. 24 VDC (SV-24) is optional The SV
valves open against 30 psi. (207 kPa) [2.07 bar] inlet pressure.
Greater Flow Rate Valve
Special series SV valve is available with a 1/4 in. (6 mm) orifice which opens against maximum pressure of 15 psi (103 kPa) [1.03 bar].
This valve is recommended where greater flow is required, and only static head or low transfer pump pressures are encountered.
High Pressure Valves
SV-HP series valves open against diesel fuel transfer pump pressure up to 60 psi (414 kPa) [4.14 bar]. Models are available for 12 or 24
volt DC systems. The orifice is 1/4 in. (6 mm), using the same inlet/outlet and options as standard SV.
Things You Should Know About SV-Series Valves
The SV-Series fuel shutoff valve is intended for use with diesel engines having externally accessible fuel injection pumps. The volume of
fuel required for the engine to operate must be able to pass through the 3/16 in. (5 mm) or 1/4 in. (6 mm) orifice of the valve. You must be
able to attach the fuel valve directly onto or in close proximity to the fuel injection pump in order to close off fuel flow to the pump.
SV-series is NOT intended for use with engines having “unit” injectors or distributor type injection pumps. Use only with diesel.
Auxiliary Fuel Valves
Fuel Return Line Check Valve
The CKV series is an in-line, one-way valve for the prevention of fuel siphoning from the
diesel return line by an injection pump. In engine shutdown systems using a Murphy SV
valve, the CKV is necessary to ensure a rapid shut down of the engine by fuel starvation of
the injection system. For details see bulletin CKV-7867B.
Fuel Line Pressure Relief Valve
The PRV50 is an in-line, one-way valve for the prevention of overpressure damage to fuel
filters and their housings. This pressure relief valve operates in conjunction with a Murphy
SV series shutdown valve; after the SV closes, a rapid high pressure build-up caused by the
fuel pump can occur. The PRV, mounted in a fuel return line after the filter, will open to
relieve pressure buildup.
 - 276 -

Typical SV Valve Installation

NOTE: Mount the SV valve as close as possible to the injection pump. If using the SV valve with electronic
devices, we recommend installing a suppression diode across the SV valve coil.

Installation and Service Suggestions

1. Make sure the valve is the same voltage as the battery. Under continuous duty, the coil will normally be hot, however, incorrect voltage can cause smok-
ing and burned coils.
2. The valve will not operate if the flow arrow on the side of the valve does not indicate the correct direction of flow.
3. Do not apply pipe dope to female valve threads. Dope inside the valve will foul the seat and prevent proper seal.
4. Install the valve as close as possible to the injection pump.
Troubleshooting the SV-Series Valves
Check Control Circuit: To determine if the electrical system is energizing the solenoid, listen for a metallic click signifying the solenoid is operating.
Absence of the click indicates loss of power supply. Check for blown or loose fuses, for an open circuit or a grounded coil, for broken lead wires or open
splice connections.
Coil Burnout: Check for open-circuit coil. Replace coil if necessary. Fuel Leak Through Valve: Disassemble the valve and clean parts.
High or Low Voltage: Check voltage across the coil with a voltmeter. Volt- Replace any parts that are worn or damaged (see other side for repair
age must be in 85% to 110% of nameplate rating. parts).
Incorrect Pressure: Check fuel line pressure. Pressure on the valve must Slow Shutdown: Due to the internal fuel capacity of some injection
be within the specific range of the SV in use. pumps, engine shutdown will not occur until that fuel is used up
Note: If engine continues to run after the valve closes, install a check valve such as CKV2336 in return line.
.

Specifications Dimensions
Electrical Rating: 12 VDC, 10 watts
Orifice: 3/16 in. (5 mm) diameter (optional 1/4 in. [6 mm] diameter). See
chart below.
Body Connections: 1/4 NPT inlet/outlet
Maximum Opening Pressure:
3/16 in. (5 mm) orifice: 30 psi (207 kPa) [2.07 bar]
1/4 in. (6 mm) orifice: 15 psi (103 kPa) [1.03 bar]
Shipping Weight: 1 lb. 6 oz. (0.68 kg)
Shipping Dimension: 3 x 2-3/4 Sx 2-3/4 in. (76 x 70 x 70 mm)
SV-HP (High Pressure model)
Orifice: 1/4 in. (6 mm) diameter. See chart below.
Maximum Opening Pressure: 60 psi (414 kPa) [4.14 bar].
 - 277 -

SV Repair Parts

Call- Part Num-

out Part Description ber
A Screw 80-04-1412
B Coil Replacement Kit 12 volt kit 55-01-0141
B Coil Replacement Kit 24 volt kit 55-01-0145
C Core Repair Kit (Std mdls) 55-01-0155
C Core Repair Kit (HP mdls) 55-01-0156
D Valve Body: 3/16 Orifice 1/4 NPT x 1/4 NPT (std.) 55-05-0194
D Valve Body: 1/4 Orifice 1/4 NPT x 1/4 NPT 55-05-0193

How to Order
See the diagram below, example: SV–12 –HP
SV – ____ – ____ – ____
Coil Voltage
12 = 12 VDC
Orifice
24 = 24 VDC
Blank (non-”HP” models) = 3/16 in. (5mm) dia.
Blank (“HP” models = 1/4 in. (6mm) dia.
HP = High Pressure
4 = 1/4 in. (6mm) dia. (non-”HP” models only)

CAUTION: Do NOT use the SV valves with distributor type injection pumps. For use
with DIESEL ONLY.
 - 278 -

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

 94134
- 279 - Revised 07-99
Section 55

Electromechanical Fuel Shutoff Valves – M25 and M50 Series

Features
• Instant Response to Shut Off Signal
• Positive Valve Closure
• Vents Gases Trapped After Shutdown
• Explosion-proof Models Available
• Models Available for Magneto, CD Ignition or
12/24 VDC
• Normally Energized Model Available

These fuel shutoff valves are semi-automatic devices for shutdown of natural gas fueled engines. The valve is opened manually and closes when the
electromagnet is energized and trips the latch. The valve can be closed manually by turning the valve’s disconnect knob. A normally energized model is
available that holds the valve open electrically and closes when the coil is de-energized. A vent in the valve body relieves trapped gas when the valve
closes. A pop-out indicator button informs you when the valve is open or closed.
The valve’s tripping power is provided by an engine ignition system or battery. Models are available for magneto, CD ignition or 12/24 V battery.
The M2582 is a 1 inch (25 mm) valve with 1 NPT connections. It has one SPDT snap-switch. The valve body is made of sandcast aluminum. It does not
include the open/close indicator button.
M5081 is a 2 inch (51 mm) valve with 2 NPT connections. It has two SPDT snap-switches. The valve body is available in sandcast aluminum or cast
steel (optional).
M5081FS is the same as the M5081 but has a normally energized circuit. This circuit allows the valve to be held open electrically and close by interruption
of the coil’s power circuit. A manual trip knob is not available on this model. An optional 2 in. (51 mm) steel flange pipe connection is available for
M5081 and M5081FS steel body models (see Dimensions page 3).
Specifications
Valve Body: Sandcast aluminum, painted red (corrosion resistance). • Magneto ignition coil resistance: 0.5 Ω
Optional cast steel available for M5081 and M5081FS models only. • Magneto primary voltage: 1 to 5 A
Valve Seat: Buna-N • Battery coil resistance: 7 Ω
Maximum Pressure Rating: 12 or 24 VDC: 1.2 to 2.4 A
• M2582: 80 psig (552 kPa) [5.52 bar]
Wiring (See Internal Wiring page 2):
• M5081: 100 psig (689 kPa) [6.89 bar] • M2582: Wire leads
• M5081FS: 100 psig (689 kPa) [6.89 bar] • M5081 and M5081FS: Terminal blocks
Coil Rating: Intermittent duty; coil type must match power source; Snap-switch Rating: 5 A @ 480 VAC
• CD ignition coil resistance: 72 Ω Laboratory Approval: CSA listed for Class I, Groups C and D Hazardous
CD primary voltage: 1.38 to 3.8 A Locations. 5 amps maximum; intermittent duty; models M5081 and
• M5081FS model: Energized to run (continuous-duty coil) coil resistance: M5081-CD engine ignition powered, and model M5081-B, 12 or 24
VAC or VDC; switch contacts rated 5 A @ 480 VAC maximum.
12 Volt model: 33 Ω (0.36 A)
24 Volt model: 136 Ω (0.17 A)
Options and Accessories
Diode Package (65010065)
The Murphy 202 V diode package is designed to allow the fuel shutoff valve to be used with dual Magneto Ignition systems. Sold separately (see How to
Order).
Magnetic Switch Adapter
As ignition systems wear from usage their power output becomes less and less. Ignition may not have the capacity to reliably trip the fuel valve. Therefore,
the use of a Magnetic Switch Adapter for CD ignition systems is recommended. The adapter stores energy from the CD ignition to trip the fuel valve.
Three models are available:
65020126: For Negative Ground CD Ignitions up to 240 VDC
65020127: For Positive Ground CD Ignitions up to 450 VDC
65020155: For Negative Ground CD Ignitions 240 VDC to 450 VDC
 - 280 -

Flow Rates

Internal Wiring
M2582 M5081 and M5081FS

NOTE: For grounding the ignition (CD models only) through the NOTE: For grounding the ignition (CD models only) through the
fuel valve’s internal snap-switch, a Murphy Magnetic Switch fuel valve’s internal snap-switch, a Murphy Magnetic Switch
adapter (see page 4) must be used in addition to a 100 ohm, 2 watt adapter (see page 4) must be used in addition to a 100 ohm, 2 watt
resistor (supplied with valve). resistor (supplied with valve).
 - 281 -

Dimensions
M2582 Steel Flanged Option “3” (available on M5081FS and M5081FS
steel body configurations only)

M5081 and M5081FS

 - 282 -

How to Order
To order your valve, use the diagram below to specify your model and options. Example: M5081-A-2

Accessories Service Parts

Specify part number when ordering. Specify part number when ordering.
Magnetic Switch Adapter
65020126: For Negative Ground CD Ignitions up to 240 VDC
65020127: For Positive Ground CD Ignitions up to 450 VDC
65020155: For Negative Ground CD Ignitions 240 VDC to 450 VDC
Diode Package
65010065: For use with dual Magneto Ignition systems.
Shipping Information
Shipping Weights:
• M2582: 5 lbs 8 oz. (2.49 kg)
• M5081: 14 lbs 8 oz. (6.58 kg)
• M5081-2: 40 lbs (18.14 kg)
• M5081-3: 56 lbs (25.40 kg)
• M5081FS: 14 lbs 8 oz. (6.58 kg)
• M5081FS-2: 40 lbs (18.14 kg)
• M5081FS-3: 56 lbs (25.40 kg)
Shipping Dimensions:
• M2582: 8 x 8 x 7 in. (203 x 203 x 178 mm)
• M5081: 12 x 12 x 9-5/16 in. (305 x 305 x 237 mm)
• M5081-2: 12 x 12 x 9-5/16 in. (305 x 305 x 237 mm)
• M5081-3: 18 x 12 x 13-1/2 in. (457 x 305 x 343 mm)
• M5081FS: 12 x 12 x 9-5/16 in. (305 x 305 x 237 mm)
• M5081FS-2: 12 x 12 x 9-5/16 in. (305 x 305 x 237 mm)
• M5081FS-3: 18 x 12 x 13-1/2 in. (457 x 305 x 343 mm)
 94129
- 283 - 08-07
Section 55

Pneumatic Valves for Fuel Gas Shutoff

Models M2582-P and M5180-P
- 284 -
 95145
- 285 - Revised 12-03-10
Section 55

Pulsation Dampener – PD8100 Series

Features
• Used On Controllers, Instruments and Recorders
to Dampen Pressure Pulsation
• Eliminate Gage Pointer Flutter
• Aids In Providing More Accurate Pressure
Indication
• Decreases Wear On Gage’s Geared Movement
NOT INTENDED FOR USE AS A
SHUTOFF VALVE
The PD8100 Series eliminates pointer flutter on
pressure indicating SWICHGAGE® devices which
are subject to pulsating pressure from reciprocat-
ing pumps or compressors. It also allows a close
setting of high and low contact points providing for
more accurate pressure indication and control of
equipment.
The PD8100 Series decreases wear on geared
movements and increases the life of pressure indi-
cating instruments by eliminating excessive gage
strain and unnecessary movement.
A necessity which quickly pays for itself by protect-
ing any pressure indicating and control instrument
which is subject to pulsation.
PD8100 SERIES NOT FOR USE ON OXYGEN
OR LIQUID OXYGEN APPLICATIONS.
Quality built with a large diameter valve stem wheel for ease of adjustment with clearly printed operating instructions.
Machined from 1-3/8 in. (35 mm) hex bar stock. A two degree taper on valve and stem assure positive dampening. Avail-
able in brass, carbon steel, 303 stainless steel or 316 stainless steel to meet pressure and environmental requirements with
either 1/2 NPT or 1/4 NPT inlet connections.
Specifications Dimensions
See “How to Order” section for available inlet and out-
let connections.
PD8183: All wetted parts are Brass. Rated to 3,000 psi (20.68 MPa)
[206.80 bar].
PD8184: All wetted parts are Carbon steel. Rated to 5,000 psi (34.47
MPa) [344.70 bar].
PD8185: All wetted parts are 303 stainless steel. Rated to 10,000 psi
(68.95 MPa)
[689.50 bar].
PD8190: All wetted parts are 316 stainless steel. Rated to 10,000 psi
(68.95 MPa)
[689.50 bar]. Meets NACE standard MR- 01-75 for direct exposure to
H2S.
Operating Temperature: -15 to 400°F (-26 to 204°C)
Shipping Weight (all models): 2 lbs.(0.9 kgs.)
Shipping Dimensions (all models): 4-3/4 x 4-3/4 x 3-1/4 in. (121 x 121 x
83 mm)
 - 286 -

Mounting for the OPLFC Pressure MURPHYMATIC®

SWICHGAGE® and PD8100 Series Compressor Panel
The PD8100 Series pulsation dampener is mounted Shown at right, is a typical
directly below the OPLFC MURPHYMATIC® compres-
sor panel featuring three
Pulsation Dampeners and
Murphy’s OPLFC gages.
The PD's are recommended
for use on piston pumps and
compressors to eliminate
pointer contact flutter and
gage wear.

Precautions: Dope or use teflon

tape on connection threads. Do
not block the inlet orifice.

Service Parts

How to Order
 SECTI ON 70 ELECTRI C GAGES

Electric Gages
95090 EG SERIES – Electric Gage and Swichgage® Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Annunciators
0910469 Four-Function Tattletale® Annunciator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

 95090
- 287 - Revised 10-06-09
Section 70

EG Series – Electric Gage and Swichgage® Instrument

Features
• EG Air Core movement design
• Technological improvements in lighting, accuracy in
reading and wiring installation
• Environmentally sealed design
• Exceeds the rigid SAE J1810 standard
• Corrosion-resistant materials
• Desirable for marine and other environmentally
sensitive applications
• Soft, non-glare dial and pointer illumination by “cold
light” LED

Electric Swichgage Instrument

The EGS21 Series Swichgage instrument has all of the features of the EG21 Series Gage plus an adjustable set point
PowerHall® Effect switch output for operating alarms or equipment shutdown. The trip point is adjustable over 90% of the
scale and has a set point indicator visible from the gage face. Now you can have both, the ease of electric gage installation
and the reliable switching of Murphy’s famous Swichgage instrument.

Specifications
Power Input: For Gage, Swichgage instrument and Output saturation voltage (voltage drop across
Sender: 12 VDC; 24 or 32 VDC when specified (see switch): 1.3-2.3 Volts @ 25°C (May require some con-
below for 32 VDC limitations). ditioning to work with logic inputs)
NOTE: EG21 Series gage and EGS21 Series Swich- Swichgage instrument Set Point Indicator: Visible on
gage instrument MOVEMENT and ILLUMINATION mirror band (scale); adjustable from the back of the unit
require 12 VDC to function. For 24 or 32 volt systems, (1/16 in. hex type wrench).
voltage converters are built into the electrical wire/ Wiring: Plug connector with wire leads, 18 AWG (1.0 mm2)
connector assembly and supplied with instrument. x 8 in. (203 mm) length.
Specify voltage when ordering. Operating Temperature: -40 to 185°F (-40 to +85°C).
Case: Polyester (PBT), impact and weather resistant; with Storage Temperature: -77 to 185°F (-60 to 85°C).
convenient screw-on mounting clamp. Over Voltage (Gage Movement): Withstands a voltage of
Bezel: Polished 316 stainless steel bezel is supplied as 200% of nominal system voltage for 5 minutes. (Meets
standard; Available in black. SAE style optional. SAE J1810 standards).
Lens: Clear Polycarbonate and UV stabilized. Reversed Polarity (Gage Movement): Withstands
reversed battery terminal polarity indefinitely within
Air Core Movement: Silicon dampened pointer. operating temperatures.
Dial: Black background and white markings; behind dial Environment and Test: Meets SAE J1810 standards.
lighting (white marking becomes red when illuminated);
dual scale with mirror band to reduce parallax reading
errors.
Swichgage instrument Sensor: PowerHall® Effect; out-
puts ground signal (sinking output) rated: 300 mA con-
tinuous (EGS21 Series only). Pressure, Fuel, Volts set
on decreasing scale. Temperature amd Amps set on
increasing scale.
 - 288 -

Electric Gage Senders

Pressure Temperature Fuel

• ESP: 1-wire-to-ground sender * • EST: 1-wire-to-ground sender

• ES2P: 2-wire ungrounded sender * • ES2T: 2-wire ungrounded sender • ESF: 1-wire-to-ground sender
• ESDP: 2-wire ungrounded sender, • ESDT: 2-wire ungrounded sender, • ES2F: 2-wire ungrounded sender
drives 2 gages * drives 2 gages. • ESDF: 2-wire ungrounded sender,
• ESPM: 1-wire-to-ground sender † ‡ drives 2 gages.
• ES2PM: 2-wire ungrounded
sender † ‡
* Thru 100 psi (689 kPa) [6.89 bar].
† Ranges above 100 psi (689 kPa) [6.89 bar].
‡ Mounting off-equipment recommended.
 - 289 -

How to Order

EG Series Gage and Swichgage Instrument

NOTE: EG21 and EGS21 Series are designed for use with 12 volt systems. For 24 or 32 volt
systems, voltage reducing resistors are included in the wire/connector assembly. No designator
required for Standard configurations.
*The EG21PV-80-12, 24 or 32-A is designed to read senders with a resistance curve of 9.5 to
182Ù, which are commonly supplied as standard senders on Deutz and VW Engines.
**The EG21TV-300-12, 24 or 32-A is designed to read senders with a resistance curve of 240 to
18Ù, which are commonly supplied as standard senders on Deutz and VW Engines.
 - 290 -

EG Series Senders Accessories and Replacement Parts

Off-Equipment Mounting Kit
This kit allows off-equipment mounting of the ESPM, ES2PM and
ESDPM pressure senders. Recommended for protection from
damaging vibration. Customer supplies hose and fittings. Specify
part number 30-00-0213 when ordering.
Wire/Connector Assembly
Listed below are replacement part numbers for all wire/connector
assemblies.
Voltage converter included for 24 and 32 volt. Specify part num-
ber when ordering.
12 VDC 24 VDC 32 VDC
EG21P / T / F 05004506 05006166 (05004546)6) 05006167(05004547)6)
EGS21P / T / F 05004507 05006168 (05004548)6) 05006169(05004549)6)
EG21AM 05004505 05006170 (05004550)6) 05006171(05004551)6)
8)
EGS21AM 05004504 05006172 (05004552) –––
EG21VM 05004508 05004508 –––
EGS21VM 05004504 05004504 –––

1) Thru 100 psi (689 kPa) [6.89 bar].

2) Ranges above 100 psi (689 kPa) [6.89 bar].
3) Mounting off-equipment recommended.
4) Straight threads, for use with adapter nut.
5) Separate adapter nut not required.
6) For gages with date code R1 (January 1996) or earlier (Q12, Q11,
etc.) specify part number shown in parenthesis.
 0910469
- 291 - Revised 10-06-09
Section 70

Four-Function Tattletale® Annunciator - EN204 Series

Features
• Designed for use with electric Swichgage instruments
or normally open, close to negative contacts
• LED Annunication for low oil pressure, high water
temperature, loss of battery voltage, and low fuel level
or glow plug.
• Output may be used for tripping an Electromagnetic
Control Switch for engine shutdown
• Developed with the same leading edge technology as
our EGS Series Electric Swichgage.

Electric Swichgage Instrument

The EN204 Series Tattletale Annunciator works with other engine com- ground when a fault condition occurs. As an example, in a system with a
ponents to clearly indicate cirtical engine operating conditions. The four Murphy EGS21P-100 Oil Pressure Swichgage instrument, the Swichgage
bright LEDs on the facer of the annunciator indicate the cause of an alarm closes to ground when the oil pressure drops below a pre-determined set
or shutdown condition. point. This will energize the Oil Pressure LED on the EN204 to highlight a
low oil pressure failure.
Two EN204 models are available. Each shows the standard critical engine
operating parameters—oil pressure, coolant temperature, and battery volt- A very important feature of the EN204 is the ability to interface with
age. Model EN204-S-12 also includes an indicator for low fuel level. Murphy 518PH or the 760A Electromagnetic Switches to perform auto-
Model EN204-SG-12 substitutes the fuel level indicator with a glow plug matic engine shutdown when fault conditions occur. The EN204 can also
indicator for those engines that use a glow plug for easier starting. be used with other Murphy visual and audible alarms (STAS series remote
alarm, SAH audible alarm, and the TL7 visual alarm) for remote annuncia-
tion and equipment shutdown.
The EN204 Annunciators are used in conjunction with Murphy Electric
Swichgage instrument or other normally open switches that close to
Specifications
Operating Voltage: Dial: Black background and white markings
12 VDC (10 V min. - 16 V max.). with four (4) Red LED indicators.
Current: 0.020 A to 0.025 A per LED. Wiring: Plug connector with wire leads,
Output: Sink 0.275 A. 18 AWG (1.0 mm2) x 8 in. (203 mm) long.
Output Saturation Voltage: Operating Temperature:
.7-1.1 V @ 25°C. -40 to 185°F (-40 to +85°C).
Case and Screw-on Mounting Clamp: Storage Temperature:
Polyester (PBT). -76 to 185°F (-60 to 85°C).
Bezel: Bright stainless steel. Shipping Weight: 0.5 lb. (226 g).
Lens: Clear Polycarbonate, UV stabilized. Shipping Dimensions: 8 x 4 x 4-1/2 in.
(203 x 102 x 114 mm).
Basic Models
The following two basic models are offered:
The Switched functions listed are able to sink a current up
to 0.275 amps and may be used to activate the electrome-
chanical control switches or other devices.
 - 292 -

Dimensions

EN204-S Typical Wiring Diagram

How to Order
EN204-S-12 and switch Four-LED Tattletale annunciator including Fuel Level LED indicator.
EN204-SG-12 Four-LED Tattletale annunciator including Glow Plug LED indicator.
 SECTION 75 GEN-SET CONTROLS

Genset Controls
0810288 Keystart 9620 Series - Engine and Generator Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
0810330 CANstart™ 9630 Series
Engine and Generator Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
94012 Automatic Engine Controller ASM150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
03021 ASM170 Auto Start Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
05195 Auto-Start/Stop Controller – Cascade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
02058 Digital Generator Set Controller – iGUARD™ Gen-Set Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
0910470 Murphy Generator Control Panels (MGC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Battery Chargers
1010704 Sentinel 150 Series – UL Approved Automatic Battery Chargers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
1010705 Sentinel 300P Series – Programmable Switch Mode Battery Chargers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

 0810288
- 293 - 01-29-10
Section 40&75

Keystart 9620 Series - Engine and Generator Controls

- 294 -
 0810330
- 295 - 01-29-10
Section 40 & 75

CANstart™ 9630 Series

Engine and Generator Controls
- 296 -
 94012
- 297 - Revised 01-04
Section 40

Automatic Engine Controller ASM150

Features
• Ideal for Generators
• Solid-state Construction
• Compatible with Most New or Existing Murphy
SWICHGAGE® Monitoring Systems
• Advanced, Rugged, Reliable Microprocessor
Based Design
• Built-in Crank Disconnect and Overspeed Switch
• First-out Shutdown LED Description

The ASM150 is a user friendly, solid-state, automatic engine controller. It provides basic automatic start/stop capabilities
plus other features found on more sophisticated and expensive controllers.
The ASM150 operates from 12 or 24 volt battery. It includes features such as selectable crank and rest cycles, sensing cir-
cuit for crank disconnect and overspeed, overcrank, and re- crank protection on false starts. Four LEDs indicate first-out
shutdown for: low pressure, high temperature, overcrank and overspeed. A fifth LED indicates engine running.
Advanced microprocessor circuitry gives the ASM150 high reliability and flexibility.
The ASM150 is compact and housed in a corrosion-resistant case. It mounts flush in a panel and requires very little room.
Ideal for small generator or engine panels.
Features
• Compact design • Two (2) Element Adjustable Speed Switch
• Optically Isolated Noise Resistant Inputs • Outputs for Cranking and Fuel Valve
• Re-Cranks Engine on False Starts • Outputs for Fault Annunciation
• Adjustable Lockout Time Delay During Startup • Lamp Test Terminal
Specifications
Power Input: 12 or 24 VDC. Crank/Rest Cycle Timing: 4 to 25 seconds (adjustable).
Operating Temperature: -40 to 185°F (-40 to +85°C). Lockout Time Delay: 1 to 25 seconds (adjustable). Locks
Inputs: Ground or positive inputs for high temperature or out low oil and high temperature on start-up.
low pressure sensors. Crank Disconnect Speed Setting: From 30 to 8500 Hz.
Outputs: Overspeed Trip Point Setting: From 30 to 8500 Hz.
• 5 A relay for cranking and fuel valve. Magnetic Pickup Input: Requires 2V rms minimum.
• 300 mA transistor for fault annunciation. Shipping Weight: 1 lb. 2 oz. (0.51 kg.).
Cycle Crank Timer: Up to 8 attempts. Re-Cranks on false Shipping Dimensions: 5 x 4-3/4 x 2-3/4 in. (127 x 121 x
starts (fixed 30 seconds). 70 mm).
 - 298 -

Dimensions

Typical Wiring Diagram

How to Order
Specify ASM150-14.

CAUTION: Certain danger to human and to equipment such as applied in a mobile or

marine application may occur if some equipment is stopped without pre-warning. It
is therefore, recommended that monitored functions be limited to alarm only or to
alarm before shutdown in such applications.
 03021
- 299 - Revised 01-15-10
Section 40

ASM170 Auto Start Module

Features
• Ideal for all basic auto-start/stop
• Programmable Multifunction Output
• Extended Operating Temperature Range
• Excellent Low Voltage Performance
• Compact Size Retrofits Existing ASM150
Installations
• Built-In Manual-Off-Auto Toggle Switch
• Smart FET Outputs Description

The ASM170 is a compact yet powerful engine auto-start module. It offers flexibility and features normally found in much
larger and more expensive units. Its high density MOLEX plug makes it ideal for panel builders. It can also be easily
replaced in the field if problems should arise.
With the on-board Manual-Off-Automatic switch, Panel wiring is greatly simplified.
Its unique design also allows it to draw virtually no current in standby mode, yet be able to auto-start based on a sustained
or momentary contact closure.
Features
The ASM170 is typically used in generator applications but can be applied anywhere a basic auto-start operation is
required. Basic functions include engine crank/rest, crank disconnect, overspeed, low oil pressure, high engine tempera-
ture, low levels and spare shutdowns. The start signal to the controller can be momentary or sustained.
It also has a multifunction output that can be selected to perform one of the following functions:
• Glowplug • Cooldown
• Warmup/Cooldown • Choke
• Warmup • Air Damper Shutoff
Specifications
Power Input: 6 to 28 VDC. Crank/Rest Cycle Timing: Field adjustable 1 to 30 sec-
Power Consumption Standby: <1 mA. onds.
Operating Temperature: -40 to 185°F (-40 to +85°C). Multifunction Output: Field programmable to one of the
Inputs: Ground or positive inputs for high temperature, low following options: Glowplug, Cooldown, Warmup/
oil pressure, High/Low Level, Auxiliary/Remote Stop Cooldown, Warmup, Air gate – Overspeed Only, Air
sensors. gate – Always, Choke, or Auxiliary Run output.
Lamp Test: When unit is powered up in Manual or Auto, Shutdown Lockout Time Delay: Field adjustable 1 to 300
the LED’s light for 1 second as a test. seconds. Locks out low oil pressure, high temperature,
and loss of speed shutdowns on start-up.
Outputs: 5A smart FET for cranking and multifunction out-
put. 10A smart FET for Fuel Valve (Energized to Run) Crank Disconnect Speed Setting: From 13 to 2500 Hz.
output. All 3 supply battery “+” 125 mA transistor for Overspeed Trip Point Setting: From 13 to 8500 Hz.
common failure, engine run, and auxiliary output. (Sink Speed Sensing Input: 1.5VAC RMS to 140 VAC RMS.
to battery “-”) Shipping Weight: 1 lb. (.45 kg.)
Crank Attempts: Selectable for 3, 5, 10, or 255. Shipping Dimensions: 6.25 x 6.25 x 4.5 in. (159 x 159 x
114 mm).
 - 300 -

CAUTION: Certain danger to human and to equipment such as applied in a mobile or

marine application may occur if some equipment is stopped without pre-warning. It
is therefore, recommended that monitored functions be limited to alarm only or to
alarm before shutdown in such applications.

How to Order:

ASM170 00009126 ASM170 Standard with Toggle Switch

ASM170-LT 00009347 ASM170 without Toggle Switch
ASM170-LT160 40700252 ASM160 Replacement Kit
INCLUDES: 40000168 Drilling Template with terminal block and wire harness
00009347 ASM170 without Toggle Switch

NOTE: P/N 40000138 connector and 4 ft. wire harness must be ordered separately if
required.
 05195
- 301 - Revised 03-15-11
Section 40 & 75

Auto-Start/Stop Controller — Cascade

Features
• Durable encapsulated protection against
dirt, water, and dust – rated NEMA4 and
IP65
• Operates during low battery blackouts
• Compatible with Electronic and
Mechanical engines – ECU, MPU,
AC Frequency
• J1939 Ready – Works directly with
MurphyLink J1939 PowerView gages

The Cascade controller offers automatic start and stop control with easy configuration for a broad number of applications.
This auto-start controller is designed to fit any engine-driven application requiring a simple and robust automatic start and
stop sequence. Pumps, Compressors, Grinders, Power Units and Generators are just few of the industrial applications for
the controller.
The Cascade controller is fully compatible with all major engine types. Whether you are running mechanical or J1939
engines, the controller will work with your application.
Here are some of the unique features of the Cascade that only Murphy can offer at our competitive price.
• Durability: Encapsulated to protect it against dirt, water and dust, along with a compression gasket to fully seal it to the
panel. Cascade is rated NEMA4 and IP65.
• Low Battery Blackouts: Operates in total blackout for a minimum of two seconds.
• Compatibility: Accept MPU, AC Frequency and ECU speed signals and can operate with standard and J1939 engines.
• Inputs and Outputs: The Cascade Inputs and Outputs are ruggedly protected and fault tolerant.
• J1939 Ready: Works directly with Murphy’s J1939-ready PowerView gages, just plug and go, no sender is required.
• CD101 Cascade Configuration Tool: Allows quick setup and loading of parameters into a Murphy standard Cascade
via a PC software tool.
Specifications
Power input: 9-35VDC continuous - operates during total black- Outputs: 7 – 4 auxiliary, configurable (1A DC protected). 3 dedi-
out for 2 seconds minimum. cated outputs for Crank, Fuel/ECU, Alternator excitation.
Power consumption: Sleep Mode (Manual): 1mA typical; Sleep Crank attempts: 3, 5, 10, Continuous.
Mode (Automatic): 4mA typical. Running Mode (Manual): Crank Rest: 5-60 seconds, adjustable.
20mA typical; Running Mode (Automatic): 24mA typical. Shutdown lockout time delay: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 seconds.
Operating/Storage temperature: -40 to 85°C; (-40 to 185°F). Crank disconnect speed setting: Field settable 0-9999 RPM
Humidity: 0-100%, non-condensing. (16-60Hz AC freq input).
Housing: UV stabilized black polycarbonate and epoxy encapsu- Overspeed/underspeed trip point setting: ±5 to 50% of nomi-
lation. Weather tight and includes sealing gasket to keep nal.
moisture and debris out of enclosure. Properly mounted con- Speed sensing inputs: Magnetic pickup (5-120VAC RMS / 0-10
troller will maintain NEMA4 / IP65 rating of enclosure. kHz) & AC frequency (30-600VAC RMS / 16-80 Hz).
Vibration: Rated to 6G. CANbus interface: Directly reads engine speed, & engine status
Impact: Rated to 10G. data* from SAE-J1939 enabled engines.
Inputs: Dedicated digital inputs for low oil pressure, high engine MODbus interface: In J1939 applications drives PVA series
temperature, remote start, DC charge fail/Alternator fail. Two analog gages.
aux inputs are configurable for multiple functions.

*Engine status data limited to low oil pressure, high engine temperature, “Wait to start” status, Warning & Fault lamp information, and communication
error.
 - 302 -

Cascade Auto-Start Controller Dimensions

Front View Back View

How to Order
To Order specify: CD101 P/N 40700259
Shipping Weight: 1 lb. (453 g) approximately.
Shipping Dimensions: 5.1 x 6.7 x 1.6 inch (130 x 170 x 41 mm) approx.

Accessories
CD101 Cascade Configuration Kit P/N:40090045
 02058
- 303 - Revised 11-05
Section 75

Digital Generator Set Controller – iGUARD™ Gen-Set Controller

Features
• SAE J1939 Compatible. Reads this common
SAE protocol used on newer electronic
engines.
• Universal. This controller fits any standard
gen-set application. Simplify your life with only
one controller to learn and stock.
• Designed to meet NFPA110/NFPA 99
• Unmatched Price. No other controller has
these features at a comparable price.
®
C US

Description
The iGUARD™ is one controller for all your engine-driven generator set applications. It is designed from the ground up to work with today’s electronic
engines, accepting the J1939 protocol. The iGUARD™ also works with nonelectronic engines.
Designed to meet NFPA-110 and NFPA-99 requirements the iGUARD™ has ample inputs and outputs.
The new iGUARD™ controller can be used for all gen-set applications: single-phase or three-phase, and 12 or 24 V.
Engine speed can be read from a magnetic pickup, AC generator frequency, or J-1939 CANbus.
Programming Updates in the Field
Because the microprocessor is flash-based, the controller can be easily re-programmed or updated using a PC in the field.
Applications
• Packagers and OEM • Ground Support Equipment
• Rental Companies • Agriculture
• Prime Power • Marine
• Hospitals
iGUARD Standard Components
• 24 - Digital inputs • 1 - RS232 port
• 8 - Analog inputs (one dedicated for battery) • 1 - RS485 port
• Inputs for up to three phases and neutral of AC voltage • 1 - RS232/RS485 port
• Inputs for 3 CT’s for current monitoring • 1 - J1939 port
• 1 - Magnetic pickup input • 1 - 64 x 128 pixel full graphic LCD with backlight
• 8 - 20A Form “C” relays • 1 - 12 position keypad
Mounts in Several Ways
• Standard set-top • In existing enclosures
• Alternator mounting
Specifications
Mounting (Cut-out) Dimensions: 7.05 x 5.25 x 2.76 in. (179 x 133 x 70 Power supply: Operates from any DC supply for 8-35VDC continuous.
mm) Brownout (5V) ridethrough is 5 seconds and a total blackout (0V)
Mounting Screws: 4, #6-32 screws and nitrile rubber o-ring are supplied ridethrough of 100 milliseconds.
to meet NEMA4 specs. Vibration/Survivability: 3g, 3 axis, frequency swept 10-1000 Hz.
Case Material: Black Polycarbonate, textured finish, UV stabilized. Operating and Storage Temperature Range: –40/+185°F (–40/+85°C).
Connection: 600V rated multi-wire quick connect for DC and AC connec- LCD Operating Range: –4/+176°F (–20/+70°C).
tions, suitable for wire harnessing. I/O’s: Expansion relay board available for additional I/O.
Shipping Dimensions: 10 x 9 x 6 in. (254 x 229 x 152 mm)
Shipping Weights: 2 lb. (910 g.).
Performance Specs Approvals
NFPA-110, NFPA-99 SAE Load Dump Test UL/CUL Recognized component as stand alone controller.
UL/CUL Listed when sold in conjunction with Murphy supplied harness.
 - 304 -

Typical Dimensions

iGuard™ Accessories
Wire Harness Current Transformer
Part Part
Number Description Number Description
75-00-0074 4-position power connector; 12 ft (3.65 m) wire leads. 00-00-2592 50:5A Current transformer, 12 inch (305 mm) leads
75-00-0075 10-position comm. connector—J1939, RS232, RS485; 12 ft. (3.65 00-00-2707 60:5A Current transformer, 12 inch (305 mm) leads
m) wire lead
00-00-4893 75:5A Current transformer, 12 inch (305 mm) leads
75-00-0076 10-position communications connector - RS232, RS485
00-00-2372 100:5A Current transformer, 12 inch (305 mm) leads
75-00-0077 Digital Inputs 1-8; 12 ft. (3.65 m) wire leads 12 ft. (3.65 m) wire leads
00-00-2484 150:5A Current transformer, 12 inch (305 mm) leads
75-00-0078 Digital Inputs 9-24; 12 ft. (3.65 m) wire leads
00-00-2485 200:5A Current transformer, 12 inch (305 mm) leads
75-00-0079 Analog Inputs, Magnetic Pickup; 12 ft. (3.65 m) wire leads
00-00-2486 300:5A Current transformer, 12 inch (305 mm) leads
75-00-0080 ESD Jumper; 0.2 feet (61 mm) wire leads
00-00-2487 400:5A Current transformer, 12 inch (305 mm) leads
75-00-0081 AC Voltage connector; 12 ft. (3.65 m) wire leads
00-00-2488 500:5A Current transformer, 12 inch (305 mm) leads
75-00-0082 AC Current connector; 12 ft. (3.65 m) wire leads
00-00-2489 600:5A Current transformer, 12 inch (305 mm) leads

00-00-2490 800:5A Current transformer, 12 inch (305 mm) leads

Senders and End Devices
Part 00-00-2441 1000:5A Current transformer, 12 inch (305 mm) leads
Number Description
00-00-2441 1000:5A Current transformer, 12 inch (305 mm) leads
05-70-1858 0-100 psi Oil pressure sender
00-00-2516 1200:5A Current transformer, 12 inch (305 mm) leads
10-70-2013 300 °F (150°C) Coolant temperature sender
00-00-2517 1500:5A Current transformer, 12 inch (305 mm) leads
15-70-0116 EL150K1 Coolant level indicator and low Coolant level shutdown
00-00-2504 1600:5A Current transformer, 12 inch (305 mm) leads
15-70-0104 L129 high/low Oil level indicator and shutdown
00-00-2518 2000:5A Current transformer, 12 inch (305 mm) leads
15-70-0660 LM2000 Engine oil replenisher and low oil level shutdown
00-00-2519 3000:5A Current transformer, 12 inch (305 mm) leads
05-70-6345 PXMS-100 4-20mA Pressure sender 100 psi

How to Order
Specify: iGUARD™ - Digital Generator Set Controller.
 0910470
- 305 - 10-06-09
Section 75

Murphy Generator Control Panels

Features
• Full compliment of options
• High quality construction and
components
• Standard panels shipped in 2 weeks or less
• Competitive pricing

Our Murphy Generator Control line features standard panels for all levels of use, from basic manual start to full-featured
auto-start. Each standard panel is designed for maximum flexibility, allowing you to customize the instrumentation to fit
your specific application. You get plenty of options, but with the short delivery time of a pre-engineered panel.
- 306 -
 1010704
- 307 - 11-11-11
Section 75

Sentinel 150 Series - UL Approved* Automatic Battery Chargers

1010704
- 307 - 11-11-11
Section 75

Sentinel 150 Series - UL Approved* Automatic Battery Chargers

- 308 -
- 309 -
- 310 -
 1010705
- 311 - 11-11-11
Section 75

Sentinel 300P Series - Programmable Switch Mode Battery Chargers

- 312 -
- 313 -
- 314 -
 SECTION 78 MURPHYLINK® J1939

PowerView™ Displays
0910495 PowerView™ – Model PV750 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
1010638 PowerView™ – Model PV450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
1010582 PowerView™ – Model PV101-C - Configurable Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
1010676 PowerView™ – Model PV101-C - Configuration Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
PowerView™ PVA Gages and Accessories
1010612 PowerView™ – CAN Gages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
02125 PowerView™ – Analog Gages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
03020 Wiring Harness Accessories for PV101 PowerView™ Module and PVA Analog Gages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
PowerView™ PVM Gages and Accessories
0710178 PowerView™ – PVM Series Gages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
0710179 Wiring Harness Accessories for PowerView™ – Model PV101 and PVM Gages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
PowerView™ Power Supplies
0910389 PVS-5 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
PowerView™ CAN I/O Modules
0710175 XM500 I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
0610067 CANdrive™ – CANbus J1939 to Electric Gage Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
0810308 FuelCAN™ – Fuel Level Sender to J1939 Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
0810313 SenderCAN™ – SAE J1939 Input/Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
0810332 MeCAN™ – Mechanical Engine to J1939 CAN Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

 0910495
- 315 - Revised 02-01-12
Section 78

PowerView™ Model PV750

Features
• CAN-based display with fully modular design
• Customize the bezel, buttons, I/O interface and
more
• Configuration software for OEMs available
• Bonded LCD screen viewable in direct sunlight
• Rugged / Reliable Design
• Endless possibilities

The PowerView 750 display features a fully modular design. Any of the major components can be
redesigned and assembled to meet your exact needs. It’s an incredible amount of customization with
minimal non-recurring engineering costs.
You can change the shape of the bezel and buttons. You can rework the I/O board to add extra input.
You can add custom graphics and company branding to the interface.
The PowerView 750 display also has configuration software for OEMs available, so you can continue
to make quick and easy changes to the on-screen display.
The PV750 display is also highly durable. See the full specs on the back of this sheet for a full over-
view of its technical features.

Dimensions
 - 316 -

Specifications
Technical
Display: 7” / 178mm color transmissive TFT LCD CAN: 3 CAN ports according to CAN specification 2.0A or 2.0B;
Resolution: WGA, 800 x 480 pixels, 16-bit color one port isolated according to NMEA 2000 (GPS)
Aspect Ratio: 16:9 RS485: 1 MODBUS Master/Slave port, PVA Gage
Orientation: Landscape or portrait Video input: optional NTSC/PAL
Backlighting: LED, 400-500 cd / mC (50,000 h lifetime) Protocols: J1939, NMEA 2000 (GPS), CANopen® and Free Form
Microprocessor: Freescale i.MX31 32bit, 400Mhz (proprietary) CAN protocol support.
QNX Operating System Connection: 5 Deutsch DT 6-pin connectors
Flash Memory: 2 GB Keyboard: 10 tactile buttons (landscape) and 11 tactile buttons
(portrait)
RAM: 128 Mbytes SDRAM
USB: 2.0 host (full speed)
Operating Voltage: 8-35 VDC, protected against, reverse polarity
and load-dump Output Digital: (1) capable of sinking 500mA
Power Consumption: 10w full backlight; 22w full backlight with Inputs: (3) 0-5 VDC analog inputs. (1) input configurable to sup-
heater (<-10 °C) port measurement frequencies from 2Hz - 10kHz and PWM
values from 0-100% duty cycle.

Environmental Mechanical
Operating Temperature: -40°C to +85°C Dimensions: 8.37 x 6.0 in. (212.5 x 152.3 mm) landscape
Storage Temperature: -40°C to +85°C Unit Depth: 3.57 in. (90.8 mm)
Protection: IP67, front and back. Case material: Polycarbonate back case
Emissions: IEC 60945, 95/54/EC Mounting Options: Front mount, back mount or gimbal mount
Immunity: SAE J1113, ISO 11452
Vibration: Random vibration, 7.86 Grms (5-2000 Hz), 3 axis
Shock: +/- 50G in 3 axis

How to Order
To Order Use: PV750 with Video: P/N 78-70-0493
PV750 without Video: P/N 78-70-0494
PV750 Portrait with Video: P/N 78-70-0520
PV750 Marine: P/N 78-70-0508 (commercial marine Config without ABS certification)
HV750 ABS Certified Version: 78-70-0525 (must be listed as HV name on the ABS version)
Accessories: PV750 Visor Kit: P/N 78-00-0732
PV750 Cover Plate: P/N 78-05-0701
Gimbal Mount ASSY, Modular: P/N 78-00-0697
Gimbal Mount ASSY, Modular (Extended Kit): P/N 78-00-0769
PV450/PV750 Mounting Plug Kit: P/N 78-00-0814
 1010638
- 317 - Revised 02-03-12
Section 78

PowerView™ Model PV450

Features
• Compact CAN-based display to fit your application
with freely configurable design
• Customize the bezel, buttons, I/O interface and
more
• Easy-to-use PowerVision Configuration Studio™
Software.
• Bonded LCD screen viewable in direct sunlight
• Rugged / Reliable Design
• Endless possibilities
The PowerView 450 display features a freely configurable design. Any of the major components can
be custom engineered to meet your exact needs. It’s an incredible amount of customizing with minimal
non-recurring engineering costs.
You can change the shape of the bezel and buttons. You can rework the I/O board to add extra inputs.
You can add custom graphics and company branding to the interface.
The PowerView 450 display is compatible with PowerVision Configuration Studio software, so you can
continue to make quick and easy changes to the display.
The PV450 display is also highly durable. See the full specs on the back of this sheet for a full over-
view of its technical features.

Dimensions
 - 318 -

Specifications
Technical Output: (1) Open-drain, capable of syncing 500 mA
Display: Bonded 4.3” color transmissive TFT LCD Input: (1) Resistive, 0-5 V, or 4-20 mA (software configu-
Resolution: WQVGA, 480 x 272 pixels, 16-bit color rable)

Aspect Ratio: 16:9 Real-time clock with battery backup

Orientation: Landscape or portrait

Backlighting: LED, 500-650 cd / m2 (30,000 hr lifetime) Environmental

Microprocessor: Freescale iMX35 32bit, 532Mhz Operating Temperature: -40°C to +85°C

QNX Real-Time Operating System Storage Temperature: -40°C to +85°C

Flash Memory: 256 MB (expandable to 8GB) Protection: IP 66 and 67, front and back.

RAM: 128 Mbytes DDR2 SDRAM Emissions and Immunity: Electromagnetic Compatibility:
2004/108/EC
Operating Voltage: 6-32 VDC, protected against reverse
polarity and load-dump EN 61000-6-4

Power Consumption: 10W max EN 61000-6-2 (immunity)

CAN: Two CAN 2.0B; optional NMEA 2000 isolation EN 501121-3-2

RS-485: 1 MODBUS Master/Slave EN 12895

Video input (Optional): Two NTSC/PAL input channels J1113/2, 4, 11, 12, 21, 24, 26 and 41
with one displayed at a time. Vibration: Random vibration, 7.86 Grms (5-2000 Hz), 3
Protocols: J1939, NMEA 2000, CANopen axis

Connection: 4 Deutsch DT 6-pin connectors Shock: ± 50G in 3 axis

Keyboard: 8 tactile buttons

USB 2.0 host (full speed), optional OTG support Additional Options
LCD Touchscreen (projected capacitance) capability

How to Order:
To Order Use: PV450 without Video (MSTD): P/N 78-70-0436
PV450 with Video (NMEA): P/N 78-70-0538
PV450 with Video (MSTD): P/N 78-70-0515
Accessories: PV450 Visor Kit: P/N 78-00-0831
PV450/PV750 Mounting Plug Kit: P/N 78-00-0814
 1010582
- 319 - 09-30-10
Section 78

PowerView™ - Model PV101-C

Features
• Tier 4 emissions compliant
• For modern electronic engines and equipment applica-
tions using SAE J1939 Controller Area Network
• Displays over 50 standard SAE J1939 parameters broad-
cast by engine and transmission ECU’s
• Displays active and ECU-stored faults with text
description for diagnosing equipment malfunctions
• Simple connection to optional components
• Software configurable with configuration tool

The PowerView Model PV101, Murphy’s powerful display in the J1939 MurphyLink® family of components, provides a window into
modern electronic engines and transmissions.
The PV101 display is a multifunction tool which enables equipment operators to view many standard engine and transmission parame-
ters as well as active and stored trouble codes. The display can show either a single parameter or a quadrant display showing four
parameters simultaneously. Diagnostic capabilities include codes with text translation for the most common fault conditions. The
enhanced alarm indication has ultra-bright alarm and shutdown LEDs (amber and red).
The PV101 has been enhanced with new features including:
• Tier 4 Emissions Implementation - Three icons indicating Active Regeneration, Inhibit Regeneration, and Diesel Particulate Filter
Restricted. Auto DPF Regen, Request DPF Regen, and Inhibit Regen Menu active only if enabled via the Configuration Tool.
• TSCI (Torque Speed Control) - Allows user to set run speed via CAN if supported by engine manufacturer.
• Additional 4-Up Screen - Allows user to have two 4-Up screens to toggle between. Second user configurable screen is defaulted to
show Tier 4 Parameters; Catalyst Tank Level, DPF Active Regen Status, Exhaust Filter Outlet Temp, and Exhaust Filter Inlet Temp.
• Multiple language options − Russian, Czech, Brazilian Portuguese, Chinese, and Japanese models have been added to the line of
existing languages (English, Spanish, French, German, and Italian).
• Sender Input − select between backlight dimmer function or fuel level. Can be calibrated to use non-Murphy fuel senders.
• Service Reminders – 5 service reminders allow users to set hours for: Change Engine Oil, Change Air Filters, Change Hydraulic Oil,
Service Engine, and Service Machine.
• Select Source Address – select the exact address the PV101 will claim on the Bus.
• Select CANBUS Data Rate – allows user to select CANBUS data rate.
• PV101 Configuration Tool – allows users to create, view, edit and download configurations for the PV101 using their computer.
The PV101 display is compatible with all our current J1939 gages, as well as additional J1939 I/O modules. It is also fully backward com-
patible with it’s predecessor, the PV100.
Other components in the MurphyLink system include micro-processor-based PowerView Analog Gages for displaying critical engine data
broadcast by an electronic engine or transmission’s Engine Control Unit (ECU); engine RPM, oil pressure, coolant temperature, system
voltage, and a combination audible alarm and relay unit for warning and shutdown annunciation. Up to 32 components may be linked to
the PowerView using a simple daisy chain wire connection scheme using RS485. The PowerView and all connected components can be
powered by either 12 or 24-volt systems.
Display Parameters
The following are some of the engine and transmission parameters displayed by the PowerView (when applicable, consult engine or
transmission manufacturer for SAE J1939 supported parameters). The PowerView can display these parameters in all available lan-
guages, as well as in English or Metric units.
.

• Engine RPM • Oil Pressure • Transmission Oil Temperature

• Engine Hours • Fuel Economy • Transmission Gear Position
• Fuel Rate • Throttle Position • Active Service codes
• System Voltage • Engine Manifold Air Temperature • Stored Service Codes (when
• % Engine Load at the Current RPM • Current Fuel Consumption supported)
• Coolant Temperature • Transmission Oil Pressure • View Engine Configuration
• Catalyst Level • NMEA 2000 GPS Parameters Parameters
 - 320 -

Specifications
Operating Voltage Case: Polycarbonate/polyester
• 8 VDC minimum to 32 VDC maximum Maximum Panel Thickness: 3/8 inch (9.6 mm)
Reversed Polarity: Withstands reversed battery terminal polarity indef- Auxiliary RS485 Communications Port
initely within operating temperatures. • User configurable as Modbus MASTER or Modbus RTU SLAVE
Environmental • MASTER ACTIVE (default) drives optional PVA or PVM gages
Operating Temperature: -40o to +85oC (-40o to +185oF) • SLAVE ACTIVE offers user adjustable communication parameters
Display Viewing Temperature: -29o to +85oC (-20o to +185oF) Resistive Input: (user selectable as one of the following)
• Backlighting Poteniometer: 1 K Ohm, 1/4 W
Storage Temperature: -40o to +85oC (-40o to +185oF) • Murphy Fuel Sender: 33 Ohm full, 240 Ohm empty set standard from
Environmental Sealing: IP68, +/-5 PSI (+/- 34kPa) factory for use with Murphy fuel sender. Programmable for use with
non-Murphy fuel senders.
Power Supply Operating Current
• (@ 14VDC) 52 mA min.: 300 mA max Shipping Weights (all models): 1 Lb. (450 g.)
• (@ 32VDC) 1A max (with LCD heater) Clamp: PBT
CAN Bus: SAE J1939 compliant Connectors: 6-pin Deutsche DT Series

Product Dimensions

How to Order

Part Number Model Number Description Languages Available

78700439 PV101-C-MSTD Murphy STD English, Spanish, French, Italian, German
78700497 PV101-C-M01 Murphy STD Russian English, Russian, French, German, Spanish
78700498 PV101-C-M02 Murphy STD Chinese English, Chinese
78700499 PV101-C-M03 Murphy STD Japanese English, Japanese
78700500 PV101-C-M04 Murphy STD Brazilian Portuguese English, Brazilian Portuguese, French, German, Spanish
78700501 PV101-C-M05 Murphy STD Czech English, Czech, French, German, Spanish
78700435 PV101-C Configuration Tool Kit User Configuration Tool
 1010676
- 321 - 10-27-10
Section 78

PowerView™ - Model PV101-C Configuration Tool

Features
• Build custom configurations
• Easy-to-use Windows-based interface
• Add custom splash screens
• Tier 4 menu setup
• Add proprietary parameters
• Add supporting parameters outside SAE J1939
Parameters
• Add alternate languages
• Allows corrective action setup for DTCs
• Upload configurations from PV101-C to your PC
• Supports 10 languages including: English, Spanish,
French, Italian, German, Russian, Chinese, Japanese,
Brazilian Portuguese and Czech*

The PowerView Model PV101 Configuration Tool is a PC-based configuration software for the PV101-C display. Mur-
phy’s powerful display in the SAE J1939 MurphyLink® family of components, provides a window into modern electronic
engines and transmissions. With the configuration tool, you can create custom configurations and upload them to the
PV101-C without incurring engineering software development charges**.
The PV101-C Configuration Tool is an easy-to-use interface that enables you to modify features of the PV101-C including:
• Parameters - Allows users to create proprietary and supporting parameters and add them to their configurations along
with the SAE J1939 parameters.
• Diagnostic trouble codes (DTC) - Allows the user select and use DTCs as well as add custom corrective actions.
• Service reminders - Allows the user to set service reminders.
• Diesel particulate filter (DPF) - Allows users to modify messaging structure and icons.
• Modbus gauges - Allows users to use a proprietary PVA gage if setup in the portion of the configuration tool.
• Engine configuration - Allows user to view the configuration of the engine via SAE J1939 PGN 65251.***

NOTES:
* The configuration tool, itself, is only available in English; however, it supports all languages displayed in the PV101-C.
** If configurations are outside the scope of the configuration tool, contact Murphy for a quotation. Normal NRE charges shall apply.
*** If supported by engine manufacturer.

Configurable Display Parameters

Add custom and proprietary parameters to the robust Murphy standard configuration provided. The following are some of
the engine and transmission parameters already displayed by the PowerView (when applicable, consult engine or trans-
mission manufacturer for SAE J1939 supported parameters). The PowerView can display these parameters and more in all
available languages, as well as in English or Metric units.
• Engine RPM • Oil Pressure • Transmission Oil Tempera-
• Engine Hours • Fuel Economy ture
• Fuel Rate • Throttle Position • Transmission Gear Position
• System Voltage • Engine Manifold Air Tempera- • Active Service codes
• % Engine Load at the Current ture • Stored Service Codes (when
RPM • Current Fuel Consumption supported)
• Coolant Temperature • Transmission Oil Pressure • View Engine Configuration
Parameters (when sup-
• Catalyst Level • NMEA 2000 GPS Parameters
ported)
 - 322 -

System Requirements
A USB 1.1 connection is required for transferring the configuration from PC to the PV 101.
While the configuration software will function on any PC or laptop running Windows, it will not perform transfers using the
USB driver unless the operating system supports USB. USB supported operating systems include Win98SE, NT, XP, Vista
and Windows 7.
The configuration software and USB driver provide efficient use of your hard drive, using only 3-5 MB of disk space after
installation.

Example Screens

How to Order
P/N 78700435 - PV101-C Configuration Tool Kit
Shipping Weight:2lbs (0.907kg)
Product Dimensions:8-1/4” x 8-1/4” x 3-3/4” (210mm x 210mm x 96mm)
 1010612
- 323 - 01-21-11
Section 78

PowerView™ CAN Gages

Features
• For modern electronic engines and equipment
using SAE J1939 Controller Area Network
• Displays SAE J1939 parameters broadcast via
CAN
• Cutting edge, stepper motor technology and robust
functionality combined
• Microprocessor driven for high accuracy
• Simple installation and wiring design
• No driving device required

The PowerView CAN Gages (PVCAN) are a series of intelligent gages designed to display easy-to-read information
broadcast over the SAE J1939 communications. These gages are designed to be wired directly to the J1939 CAN bus
without the need of another device driving them.
The PVCAN gage include features such as a smooth stepper motor operation for the 270° sweep pointer, an environmen-
tally sealed case with two Deutsch DT style connectors molded into the casing, and green LED back lighting. They are
available for standard 2-1/6” (52mm) and 3-3/8” (86mm) diameter hole sizes. In addition, their polycarbonate cases incor-
porate a “D” shape allowing panel cutouts that eliminate gage rotation during installation.
All PowerView gages can be powered by 12 or 24 VDC systems.

PVCAN Series Models: 2 inch size gages Specifications

Power Supply Input Voltage:
PVCAN20-A = Engine Oil Pressure 12/24V (8-32VDC Minimum and Maximum Voltage)
PVCAN20-B = Coolant Temperature Power Supply Operating Current:
PVCAN20-C = Voltmeter Typically 70mA
PVCAN20-D = Percent Load at Current RPM Backlight Maximum Current: 45mA
PVCAN20-E = Transmission Oil Pressure Input: CAN (SAE J1939)
PVCAN20-F = Transmission Oil Temperature Operating Temperatures:
PVCAN20-G = Engine Oil Temperature -40° to 185°F (-40° to 85°C)

PVCAN20-H = Hydraulic Oil Temperature Storage Temperatures:

PVCAN20-J = Percent Fuel Level -76° to 185°F (-60° to 85°C)

PVCAN20-K = Boost Pressure Dial:

PVCAN20-L = Exhaust Gas Temperature White numerals over black background
PVCAN20-M = Intake Manifold Temperature Gage Accuracy:
PVCAN20-N = Auxiliary Temperature Better than ±1% of scale
PVCAN20-P = Auxiliary Pressure Environmentally Sealed Enclosure:
PVCAN20-T = Tachometer IP68: ±5PSI (±34.4kPa).
Case and Clamp Material: Polyester (PBT)
Lens Material: Polycabonate
PVCAN Series Models: 3.5 inch size gages Bezel Material: ABS
Maximum Panel Thickness: 3/8 in. (9.6mm)
PVCAN35-T = Tachometer
Connectors: 6-Pin Deutsch DT06 Series
PVCAN35-S = Speedometer
- 324 -
 - 325 -

How to Order

Accessories

Part Number Model Description

78000761 CANJR Terminating Resistor
78000745 CANW-J-9 9” Jumper Harness*
78000746 CANW-J-12 12” Jumper Harness*
78000747 CANW-J-24 24” Jumper Harness*
78000748 CANW-J-36 36” Jumper Harness1
78000124 PVW-P-12 12” Power/CAN Harness
1 According to recommended SAE J1939 wiring practices, any device on the CAN bus should be noded into the bus with a distance of no more
than 1 meter.
 - 326 -

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

 02125
- 327 - 10-27-11
Section 78

PowerView™ Analog Gages - PVA Series

Features
• For modern electronic engines and equipment
using SAE J1939 Controller Area Network
• Display SAE J1939 parameters broadcast by the
PowerView system
• Cutting edge, stepper motor technology and robust
functionality combined
• Microprocessor driven for high accuracy
• Simple installation and wiring design

The PowerView Analog Gages (PVA) are a series of intelligent gages designed to display easy-to-read information trans-
mitted by the PowerView. The PVA gages communicate with the PowerView via a single RS485 twisted pair MODBUS®
RTU serial link. The gages can be daisy-chained using quick-connect harnesses with watertight connectors.
The major feature of the PVA gages is their balance between design and functionality. These modern gages offer a selec-
tion of lens and bezel styles and colors.
The PVA gages also include features such as a smooth stepper motor operation for the 270°sweep pointer, an environ-
mentally sealed case with two Deutsch DT style connectors molded into the casing, and green LED back lighting. They
are available for standard 2-1/6” (52mm) and 3-3/8” (86mm) diameter mounting hole sizes. In addition their plastic cases
incorporate a “D” shape allowing panel cutouts that eliminate gage rotation during installation.
The PowerView Audible Alarm (PVAA) alerts operators to fault conditions via piezoelectric alarm and relay contacts. It
also has a temporary silencer button that silences the audible tone for 2 minutes on warnings and 30 seconds on shut-
down conditions. All PowerView gages can be powered by 12 or 24 VDC systems.

Specifications

Power Supply Input: 12/24V (8-32VDC min/max voltage) Environmentally Sealed Enclosure:
Power Supply Operating Current: (@ 14VDC) = • Sealing: IP66, ±5 psi (±34.4 kPa)
• PAV20, PVA35: 28 mA minimum: 52 mA maximum • Case and Clamp Materials: Polyester (PBT)
• PVAA20: 19 ma minimum; 46 mA maximum • Lens Material: Polycarbonate
Backlight Maximum Current: 24 mA (Not valid for • Bezel Material: Polyester (PBT)
PVAA20) Maximum Panel Thickness: 3/8 inch (9.6mm)
Input: RS485 MODBUS© RTU Data Connectors: 6-pin Deutsch DT06 Series
Output: Analog readout
Operating Temperature: -40° to 185°F (-40° to 85°C) The following items apply only to PVAA20
Storage Temperature: -76° to 185°F (-60° to 85°C)
Sound Output Level: 90 dB @ 30cm
Dial: White text over black background
Relay Rated Load: 0.5A, 125VAC: 1A, 24VDC
Indicating Pointer: Stepper motor Operation with 270
sweep Relay Maximum Switching Capacity: 62.5VA, 30W
Gage Accuracy: External Audible Alarm Output: 28VDC, 30 mA maxi-
mum current sink
• PVA20 - Better than ±1.0% scale
• PVA35 - Better than ±2% of scale Temporary Silence Button: Charge transfer technology
- 328 -
 - 329 -

PVA20 Series Models - 2 inch size gages

PVA20-A = Engine Oil Pressure PVA20-J = Percent Fuel Level

PVA20-B = Coolant Temperature PVA20-K = Boost Pressure
PVA20-C = Voltmeter PVA20-L = Exhaust Gas Temperature
PVA20-D = Percent Load at Current RPM PVA20-M = Intake Manifold Temperature
PVA20-E = Transmission Oil Pressure PVA20-N = Auxiliary Temperature
PVA20-F = Transmission Oil Temperature PVA20-P = Auxiliary Pressure
PVA20-G = Engine Oil Temperature PVA20-T = Tachometer
PVA20-H = Hydraulic Oil Temperature PVAA20 = Audible Alarm

PVA35 Series Models - 3 1/2 inch size gages

PVA35-T = Tachometer PVA35-S = Speedometer
 - 330 -

How to Order

Wiring Harness and Accessories

For ordering and connecting wire harnesses, see Bulletin 03020.
Shipping Weight All Models: 1 lb. (450 g)
Shipping Dimensions All Models: 6x6x6 inches (153x153x153 mm)
 03020
- 331 - 10-04
Section 78

Wiring Harness Accessories for PV101 PowerView Module and

PVA Analog Gages
Use the Easy Connect Diagram below to help you locate the wiring harness you need.
- 332 -
 0710178
- 333 - 11-22-11
Section 78

PowerView™ PVM Series Gages

Features
• For modern electronic engines and equipment
using SAE J1939 Controller Area Network
• Display SAE J1939 parameters broadcast by the
PowerView system
• Cutting edge, stepper motor technology and robust
functionality combined
• Microprocessor driven for high accuracy
• Simple installation and wiring design

The PowerView PVM Series Gages are intelligent gages designed to display easy-to-read informa-
tion transmitted by the PowerView. The PVM gages communicate with the PowerView via a single
RS485 twisted pair MODBUS® RTU serial link. The gages can be daisy-chained using quick-connect
harnesses.
The major feature of the PVM gages is their balance between design and functionality. These modern
gages offer a selection of lens and bezel styles and colors.
The PVM gages also include features such as a smooth stepper motor operation for the 270°sweep
pointer, an environmentally sealed case with two Amp Mini Universal Mate-N-Lok connectors molded
into the casing, and green LED back lighting. They are available for standard 2-1/6” (52mm) and 3-3/
8” (86mm) diameter hole sizes. In addition their plastic cases incorporate a “D” shape allowing panel
cutouts that eliminate gage rotation during installation.

PVM20 Series Models

• PVM20-A - Engine Oil Pressure • PVM20-J - Percent Fuel Level
• PVM20-B - Coolant Temperature • PVM20-K - Boost Pressure
• PVM20-C - Voltmeter • PVM20-L - Exhaust Gas Temperature
• PVM20-D - Percent Load at current RPM • PVM20-M - Intake Manifold Temperature
• PVM20-E - Transmission Oil Pressure • PVM20-N - Auxiliary Temperature
• PVM20-F - Transmission Oil Temperature • PVM20-P - Auxiliary Pressure
• PVM20-G - Engine Oil Temperature • PVM20-T - Tachometer
• PVM20-H - Hydraulic Oil Temperature

PVM35 Series Models

• PVM35-T - Tachometer
• PVM35-S - Speedometer
- 334 -
- 335 -
 - 336 -

How to Order

Wiring Harnesses and Accessories

For details see bulletin “0710179 - Wiring Harness Accessories for PVM Gages”
 0710179
- 337 - 06-27-07
Section 78

Wiring Harness Accessories for PowerView™ - Model PV101

and PVM Gages
Use the Easy Connect Diagram below to help you locate the wiring harness you need. The charge below the diagram
includes the harness schematic to help you with selection of wiring leads length, if applicable.
- 338 -
 0910389
- 339 - 02-02-09
Section 78

PVS-5 Power Supply

Features
• Provides 5 Volt power supply to PVM gages
• Capable of supplying power to a maximum of 6
PVM gages
• Enables PVM gage compatibility with existing
MurphyLink products

External power is required to make the PVM gage line compatible with existing MurphyLink products,
i.e. PV1000, Cascade, iGuard, and eGuard. The PVS-5 power supply device supplies 5 Volts of exter-
nal power and load dump protectiion for up to 6 PVM gages. The maximum length of the power and
data connection between gages is 0.5 meters (8.5 meters total).
The unit may be installed inside a panel or behind a dash.
Product Dimensions

Wiring Diagram

Mating Connector - Tyco Electronics AMP Mini Universal Mate-N-Lok Plug Housing 4 Position,
AMP P/N 172338-1
Murphy P/N 00-00-6935
- 340 -
 0710175
- 341 - 02-02-12
Section 78

XM500 I/O Module

Features
• Adds I/O to J1939 Network
• Works with Standard J1939 Display Modules
• Wide Operating Temperature range
• Industry standard Deutsch enclosure and
connectors
• Custom programming available
• Easy-to-use Configuration Tool Available

The XM500 Module is a configurable Input/Output (I/O) module designed to bring analog and digital inputs and output
onto the SAE J1939 Controller Area Network.
The XM500 Config Tool provides a user-friendly interface allowing the user to create or change the configuration used on
the XM500 unit.
Your application may require monitoring of other information which may not be provided by the OEM Engine or Transmis-
sion Electronic Control Unit (ECU), such as Fuel Level, Hydraulic Oil Pressure, or a Low Engine Coolant Level switch.
The XM500 is ideally suited to bring the additional information you need onto the J1939 CANBus, and can be configured
to broadcast fault codes and activate digital outputs per input condition such as Fuel Level Low, Hydraulic Oil Temperature
High, etc. Because the XM500 broadcasts information using the J1939 standard protocol, the information can be dis-
played using standard J1939 display modules, such as the PowerView PV101.
 - 342 -

Specifications
Power Input: 8 to 28VDC Communication Ports: CAN J1939
Operating Temperature: -40 to 85°C (-40° to 185°F) Product Weight: 10 ounces
Digital Inputs: 4 - Ground or battery positive activation Shipping Weight: 12 ounces
Digital Outputs*: 2 Sinking (500 mA) Shipping Dimensions: 4” x 6” x 2”
*(Outputs are NOT reverse polarity protected. Damage will occur if B+ is connected to the outputs.
Damage incurred from improper installation is not covered under the FW Murphy limited warranty policy.)
Thermocouple Input1: Type K and Type J
Analog Inputs2:
1 - Battery Supply Voltage (dedicated)
7 - Configurable as 0-5VDC, 4-20mA, resistive senders3 or used as an additional Digital Input
Speed Sensing Input: 2 to 120VAC RMS from 30 to 10,000 Hz
1When the thermocouple input is used, only 5 resistive, 4-20 mA, or 0-5 VDC can be used instead of 7.
2
Analog inputs can be exchanged for digital inputs (battery ground activation only), for a total of eleven digital inputs.
3
Other resistive senders can be supported. Contact FW Murphy’s Industrial Panel Division for programming charges.

How to Order
Part # Description
78700420 - XM500 Murphy Standard (To determine other configurations, review XM500 Config & Wiring documents at www.fwmurphy.com.)
78700534 - XM500 Configuration Tool
Wiring Harnessing:
30000669 - 6’ harness with terminating resistor 30000670 - 12’ harness with terminating resistor
 0610067
- 343 - 01-07-11
Section 78

CANdrive™ - CANbus J1939 to Electric Gage Interface

- 344 -
 0810308
- 345 - 09-20-10
Section 78

FuelCAN™- Fuel Level Sender to J1939 Transmitter

 - 346 -

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

 0810313
- 347 - 02-26-10
Section 78

SenderCAN™ - SAE J1939 Input/Output Module

 - 348 -

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

 0810332
- 349 - 02-26-10
Section 78

MeCAN™ - Mechanical Engine to J1939 CAN Interface

 - 350 -

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

 INDEX

Numerics C

20 and 25 Series Pressure SWICHGAGE ..................... 5 CANdrive.................................................................... 343

20 and 25 Series Temperature Swichgage ................. 35 CANstart 9630.....................................................187, 295
20, 25, A20 and A25 Series Temperature Swichgage 41 Cascade ............................................................. 195, 301
20DP, 25DP, A20DP, A25DP ........................................ 3 Centurion C4 Series................................................... 255
45APE Pressure Swichgage ....................................... 23 Centurion™ Control Panel ......................................... 265
45TE ............................................................................ 49 Centurion™ PLUS...................................................... 259
75160 Series ............................................................. 139 Centurion™ PLUS Control Panel ...............................267
Clutch Operator.......................................................... 215
Control Systems & Services........................................271

A
D
A20 and A25 Series Pressure Swichgage..................... 9
DF Series ..................................................................... 67
A20 and A25 Series Temperature SWICHGAGE........ 31
Diagnostic Panel Kits For Cummins B
A20 and A25 Series Vacuum Swichgage...................... 1
and C-Series Engines ............................................... 159
A20DP and A25DP Series............................................. 3
Dial Level Swichgage................................................... 99
A91 ............................................................................ 193
Dial Temperature SWICHGAGE ...................................49
AEC101 ..................................................................... 181
Diesel Fuel Check Valves .......................................... 273
AFR-1R ...................................................................... 231
Diesel-Fuel Shutoff Valves......................................... 275
AFR-64L .................................................................... 237
Differential Pressure for Filter Restriction ...................... 3
AFR-64R .................................................................... 235
Digital Tachometer and Hourmeter ....................107, 109
AFR-9R...................................................................... 233
Direct Mount Temperature Switch – Model TSB.......... 39
AFR-FI ....................................................................... 239
Direct-Mount Temperature Swichgage ........................ 45
Air Temperature Sensor .............................................. 63
DSI ............................................................................. 225
Analog Gages............................................................ 327
Dual Temperature SWICHGAGE................................. 53
Annunciator Panel ..................................................... 263
Dump Valves - DVU Series.......................................... 97
ASM150............................................................. 189, 297
ASM170 ............................................................. 191, 299
AT and ATH............................................................... 103
AT03069 .................................................................... 213 E
Auto Start Module.............................................. 191, 299
Automatic Engine Controller .............................. 181, 189 EG Series................................................................... 287
Auto-Start/Stop Controller ................................. 195, 301 EICS............................................................................241
Electric Gage Shutdown Panels................................. 149
Electromechanical Fuel Shutoff Valves ......................279
B Electronic Monitoring System/Controller ....................205
Electronic Monitoring Systems................................... 203
Electronic Speed Switches......................................... 111
Bilge Level Switch System BLSK1 Series ................... 65 Electronic Vibration Switch .........................................119
B-Series Murphygage .................................................. 13 EMS PRO....................................................................197
EMS PRO LITE ...........................................................199
EMS447 ..................................................................... 203
EMS448 .....................................................................203
EMS467 ..................................................................... 201
EMS547 .....................................................................205
Engine and Generator Controls ......................... 187, 185
Engine Integrated Control System ..............................241
Engine Throttle Controller ..........................................213
EVS ............................................................................ 119
Exhaust Pyrometers..................................................... 43
 INDEX

M5180-P..................................................................... 283
F Magnetic Switches ..................................................... 133
MDTM89 ...................................................................... 53
Fault Annunciator ...................................................... 249 MeCAN....................................................................... 349
Float Actuated Oil Level Swichgage............................ 85 Micro-Controller/Annunciator ......................................253
Float Level Oil Level Switchgage ................................ 85 Mini-siren ....................................................................137
FuelCAN™ ................................................................ 345 MPI ..................................................................... 221-229
MPI 601 Series........................................................... 223
MPI Brushless Alternators.......................................... 227
MPI Detonation Sensing Interface ............................. 225
H MPI Ignition Coils ....................................................... 229
MT90 .......................................................................... 105
HD9063 ..................................................................... 111 MTH6 .........................................................................107
Hourmeters................................................................ 115 Multipoint Air-Fuel Ratio Controller ............................ 233
Hydrostatic Head Level Switches ................................ 67 MurphyLink® Panels ..........................................167, 191
MURPHYMATIC® Engine Micro-Controller ...............193

I
I/O Module ................................................................. 341
O
Ignition Controllers..................................................... 221
iGuard™ Gen-Set Controller ...................................... 303 Oil Level Regulators..................................................... 81
Oil Level Swichgage .....................................................85
OPL Pressure Gage and Swichgage ........................... 17
OPLH / OPLHACS ....................................................... 99
K OS77D .......................................................................111

Keystart 9620 .................................................... 185, 293

P
L PD8100 ......................................................................285
Pneumatic Valves for Fuel Gas Shutoff ..................... 283
L129............................................................................. 87 Power Supply ............................................................. 339
L150/ EL150K1 Series................................................. 71 PowerView ......................................................... 315-337
L971............................................................................. 89 Pressure SWICHGAGE ............................................. 5, 9
LCDT ......................................................................... 247 PSB Direct Mount Pressure Switch.............................. 15
Level Maintainer .......................................................... 77 PT167EX Lead Line Pressure Swichgage ................... 25
Level Swichgage ......................................................... 71 Pulsation Dampener................................................... 285
Liquid Level Switches ............................................ 91, 93 PV101 ................................................................ 319, 321
LM2000/LM2000S ....................................................... 79 PV450 .........................................................................317
LM300 .......................................................................... 77 PV750 ........................................................................315
LR500 .......................................................................... 81 PVM Series Gages..................................................... 333
LR857 .......................................................................... 83 PVS-5......................................................................... 339
LS200 & L1100............................................................ 93 PXT Series Pressure Transmitters............................... 27
Lube Level Maintainer ............................................ 73-83
Lube Level Swichgage ................................................ 83

M
M110 Panels.............................................................. 167
M25............................................................................ 279
M2582-P .................................................................... 283
M310.......................................................................... 171
M50............................................................................. 279
 INDEX

R Thermocouple ........................................................ 59, 61

Thermocouple, RTD, and RTD Transmitter
Rack Puller ................................................................ 211 Assemblies................................................................. 59
Remote Alarm Annunciators...................................... 127 Time Switches ............................................................117
Rich Burn Air-Fuel Ratio Controller ........................... 231 TL7 .............................................................................137
RP 2900 ..................................................................... 207 TM Hourmeter .............................................................115
RP75.......................................................................... 211 Transformer Relay Assemblies .................................. 217
RTD ............................................................................. 59 TSB .............................................................................. 39
RTDT ........................................................................... 59 TTD ............................................................................249

S V
SAH ........................................................................... 137 Vacuum Swichgage .......................................................1
SDB ............................................................................. 45 VS2 ............................................................................ 121
Selectronic® Digital Tachometer ............................... 105 VS94 .......................................................................... 125
Selectronic® Flasher Alarm Light .............................. 137
SenderCAN ............................................................... 347
Sensing Bulb/Scale/Capillary Length Combinations ... 41 W
Sentinal 150 Series .................................................... 307
Sentinal 300P ............................................................. 311
W0162........................................................................ 159
Series 1501 ............................................................... 253
W0163........................................................................ 159
SHD30-45.................................................................. 109
W0168........................................................................ 163
Shock and Vibration Control Switch .......................... 125
W0241........................................................................ 163
Shock and Vibration Switch....................................... 121
W0270........................................................................ 165
Shutdown Panel Kits ................................................. 157
WAI ............................................................................141
Shutdown Panels for DEUTZ .................................... 149
WD100 ....................................................................... 145
Shutdown Panels for Diesel Engines ........................ 147
WD300 ....................................................................... 147
Shutdown Panels for Irrigation Engines .................... 155
WDU ...........................................................................149
Shutdown Panels for Irrigation Engines and Pumps . 139
WHB ...........................................................................155
Shutdown Panels for Mobile Equipment of All Kinds. 141
Wiring Harness Accessories ..............................331, 337
Solenoids................................................................... 207
Solenoids for Diesel Engines..................................... 207
SPL and 45TE Series .................................................. 49
SS300........................................................................ 111 X
ST Selectronic Tattletale ........................................... 127
SV-Series .................................................................. 275 XM500 ........................................................................341
Swichgage® Diagnostic Panel Kits ........................... 159
Swichgage® Kits for Engines .................................... 145
Swichgage® Shutdown Panel Kit ...................... 163, 165
Swichgage® Shutdown Panels ......... 139, 141, 147, 155

T
Tachometers and Tach/Hourmeters.......................... 103
Tattletale® Annunciator ..................................... 133, 291
TC Thermocouple........................................................ 59
TDX6 ........................................................................... 55
TDXM .......................................................................... 57
Temperature Scanner/Pyrometer ................................ 57
Temperature Scanner/Pyrometer SWICHGAGE......... 55
Temperature SWICHGAGE ................. 31, 35, 41, 45, 49
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
Terms and Conditions of Sale
FW Murphy Limited Warranty
FW MURPHY ECONTROLS, INC
5311 South 122nd East Avenue 5757 Farinon Drive
Tulsa, Oklahoma 74146 USA San Antonio, Texas 78249 USA
Phone: +1 918 317 4100 Phone: +1 210 495 9772
Fax: +1 918 317 4266 Fax: +1 210 495 9791
E-mail: sales@fwmurphy.com E-mail: info@econtrols.com
Website: www.fwmurphy.com Website: www.econtrols.com

FW Murphy (Latin & South America) FW Murphy Instruments (Hangzhou) Co. Ltd.
San Luis Potosí, México 77 23rd Street
Phone: +1 918 770 8775 Hangzhou Economic & Technological Development Area
E-mail: samericasales@fwmurphy.com Hangzhou, Zhejiang 310018 China
Website: www.fwmurphy.com/company_sp Phone: +86 571 8788 6060
Fax: +86 571 8684 8878
FW Murphy (India) E-mail: apsales@fwmurphy.com
230, Regus, Website : www.fwmurphy.com/company_ch
Connaught Place Centre
Bund Garden Road, Pune 411001
Maharashtra State, India
Frank W. Murphy, Ltd.
Church Road Laverstock
Phone: +91 915 813 7633
Salisbury SP1 1QZ UK
E-mail: indiasales@fwmurphy.com
Phone: +44 1722 410055
Website: www.fwmurphy.com
Fax: +44 1722 410088
E-mail: sales@fwmurphy.co.uk
Controls Systems & Services Div.* Website: www.fwmurphy.co.uk
105 Randon Dyer Road
Rosenberg, Texas 77471 USA
Phone: +1 281 633 4500
Computronic Controls, Ltd. ACCREDITA

41 - 46 Railway Terrace Nechells

Fax: +1 281 633 4588
Birmingham B7 5NG UK
E-mail: css-solutions@fwmurphy.com
E-mail: sales@computroniccontrols.com
Website: www.fwmurphy.com
Website: www.computroniccontrols.com
Industrial Panel Division**
5311 South 122nd East Avenue Compliance Controls
Tulsa, Oklahoma 74146 USA 5311 South 122nd East Avenue
Phone: +1 918 317 4100 Tulsa, Oklahoma 74146 USA
Fax: +1 918 317 4124 Phone: +1 918 317 4100
E-mail: ipdsales@fwmurphy.com Fax: +1 918 317 4266
Website: www.fwmurphy.com E-mail: compliancecontrolsinfo@fwmurphy.com
Website: www.compliancecontrols.com
Murphy Power Ignition
5311 South 122nd East Avenue In order to bring you the highest quality, full featured products, we reserve
Tulsa, Oklahoma 74146 USA the right to change our specifications and designs at any time.
Phone: +1 918 317 4100
Specifications and performance data subject to change without notice.
Fax: +1 918 317 4124
Certified specifications and performance data available upon request.
Website: www.murphy-pi.com
All trade marks and service marks used in this document are the property
of their respective owners.

Distributed by:

* Oil & Gas applications: Field Gas Gathering, Gas Transmission, Gas Power Generation.
**Industrial applications.

Printed in the USA 1110787 3-12